System Setup

You can customize Theatre Manager for your organization using the system setup functions.

Theatre Maps

Although Theatre Maps is part of System Setup, the category is so large and so often used by clients, it has it's own place in Theatre Manager's Online Help. Click here to access Theatre Map help.

Events / Plays and Dates

In this section, we explain the Play setup window and take you through the set up of an event. You must enter Play and date information before tickets can be sold. Each play can have a number of performance dates, called a series. The price code values for each series can be unique. You customize the name of this section to a title which suits your company (e.g. Plays or Games) in the Appearance section of Default Data.

Opening the Plays and Dates Window

Select Plays from the Setup Menu

The Plays and Dates window opens displaying the data of the play in memory.

Event / Play List

You use the Play List window to locate plays or to generate a quick list of events that can be printed.

Parts of the Play List Window

Adds a new Play. Click here for more information on creating events.
Opens the selected Play. Click here for more information on editing an event.
Creates a copy of the selected event.
Deletes the selected Play. For more information on deleting events click here.
Generates a report of the Play List to the screen or default print location.
Exports the Play List in a tab-delimited format.
Clicking the button, puts any images or pictures associated with the event, onto the FTP site.
Changes the view of the plays, from list to calendar or calendat to list.
Search Field With the search fields, you can change how you search the Play List Window. Click here for more information.
Active Check this to show all active events in the list.
Inactive Check this to show all inactive events in the list.

Finding Events / Plays

You can access the list of Plays (Events) two ways. First, you can to select the list from the main toolbar.

Or you can select Plays in the Setup drop down menu.

Finding a Play Using the Search Button

This find method is best used when you have the event number since it only returns the event closest to your criteria.

  1. Open the Play List window.

    Click here for more information.

  2. Press <RETURN> or <ENTER>, or use the mouse to select the Search Button.

Finding a Play Using The Play List Window

This is a useful search method if you do not have the event number. This method will return a list of all events which match your selected criteria. Then you can choose the correct event.

  1. Open the Play List window.

    Click here for more information.

  2. Choose a search field from the drop down list.

    There are ten fields to choose from:

  3. Enter search criteria in the From and To Fields

    The criteria you enter in the "from" and "to" fields will be based on the field selected in the drop down list to the left of the field. In the above picture you search by Event code. When entering criteria you can be specific or general. That is, if you are searching by Event Code, you can enter the entire event code into the search field ("99-01" - will find the specific event) or you can just enter the first part of the event will find all Events that have event codes beginning with "99-").

  4. Click the Search Button.

    All events matching the search criteria are returned.

  5. Double click on an event to open the Play Setup window.

Creating a New Event / Play

The following links, describe how to insert new plays and events into the database.

Creating New Events / Plays

Before you add an event / play into Theatre Manager, a general ledger account number must be created for the new event / play. Refer to General Ledger Accounts for more information.

In the Event / Play window, there are eight different account number fields in five different ticket types. The eight accounts are:

  1. Sales
  2. Exchange
  3. Refund
  4. Discount
  5. Markup
  6. Ticket Fee account 1
  7. Ticket Fee account 2
  8. Ticket Fee account 3

The five ticket types are:

  1. Regular
  2. Season
  3. Other Type 1
  4. Other Type 2
  5. Internet

Depending on how your accounting system is setup:

  • You may need to create only one G/L account for the entire event / play, or
  • You may need a separate account for each of the account number fields in each of the five ticket type categories.

    To start, you perform the following steps:

  1. Open the Event / Play List Window.

    Click here to learn how to access this window.

  2. Click the New button.

    The fields are blanked to allow you to add new data.

  3. Enter the Event / Play information.

    Click here for more information on Event / Play Information tab.

  4. Click the Save Button to Save the new information.

    Click the Cancel Button in the toolbar to cancel the insert.

Accounting Tab

The Accounting Tab displays the accounting information for an event. It displays the general ledger accounts that are set for the event and the applicable taxes applied. As well, when the revenue will be received into the general ledger can be determined.

Taxes to Apply to Tickets

There are three taxation levels that can be applied to an event. Checking the box beside a tax level tells Theatre Manager that taxation level will be applied to the price of a ticket for the event. Tax levels are set up in the Accounting Tab of Default Data.

Deferred Revenue

In general, deferred revenue results when payment for goods and services (tickets to an event) is received in advance of the goods (the event). Deferred Revenue is a Liability until the event has pasted. Theatre Manager then transfers the revenue from the liability account to the earned revenue accounts. Checking the box beside Use Deferred Revenue will define this event as a deferred revenue event. You will be required to insert the necessary set of General Ledger Liability Accounts for recording the deferred revenue. Refer to the section, General Ledger Setting Up the Chart of Accounts for more information on determining a Chart of Accounts.

Posting Accounts

Their are six different types of accounts that are used in combination with Events. They are, a Sales Account, an Exchange Account, a Refund Account, a Discount Account, a Markup Account, and three levels of Ticket Fee Accounts. As well, there are five different ticket categories for each type of ticket. They are, Regular, Season, Other-Type 1, Other-Type 2 and Other-Type 3.

Depending on how your accounting system is designed, you may want to set up all account types with the same general ledger account. For example, the same general ledger account can be entered for all revenue accounts -- the general ledger will record all revenue for the event into one account. Separate general ledger accounts can be entered for all revenue accounts -- the general ledger will record each type of revenue for the event in a separate account. Refer to the section, General Ledger Setting Up the Chart of Accounts for more information on determining whether to use a detailed versus a simplified general ledger number setup.

Sales Account Designates the general ledger account number used to record revenue received through new ticket sales for the event.
Exchange Account Designates the general ledger account number used to record revenue gain or revenue loss through ticket exchanges for the event.
Refund Account Designates the general ledger account number used to record revenue loss through ticket refunds for the event.
Discount Account Designates the general ledger account number used to record the net value of ticket discounts through ticket sales, ticket exchanges, and ticket refunds for the event.
Markup Account Designates the general ledger account number used to record the net value of ticket markups through to ticket sales, ticket exchanges, and ticket refunds for the event.
Ticket Fee Accounts Designates the general ledger account number used to record the net value of per ticket service charges applied to ticket sales, ticket exchanges, and ticket refunds for the event.

Ticket Types

Theatre Manager can also breakdown your ticket sales for an event into five separate sections.

This allows you to keep track of how your tickets are being sold. The "Other Type" Tabs can be renamed in Default Data: Appearance. Under each of these tabs are independent deferred revenue and earned revenue accounts for each type. Thus allowing you to designate separate accounts for each revenue for all types.

Adding Performances

Once you have created an event you can create performances to sell tickets to. Click here to learn how to create an event.

Adding a new performance can use a lot of space in the database. Each performance requires about 400-600 bytes. If you create an event with 10 performances, you might require 4K to 6K. Typically, most of the required space is for tickets. Each ticket sold uses between 500 & 1000 bytes, depending on the length of your promotion codes, credit cards, etc.

You can regain the space used, by archiving an event when all performances and reports are completed or at the end of a year.

Festival Seating

Tickets are created at time of sale and a ticket can represent an admission of a number of people (e.g. admit 10). If a ticket always represents one admission, the number of tickets created will be similar to reserved seating.

Example #1

  • 600 seat house
  • average ticket being admit 3
  • house sold to 60% capacity for 30 performances

This would require:

600 seats * 30 performances * .6 (capacity) /3 (average tickets qty) = 3600 tickets issued

3600 * 500 bytes = approx. 2 Meg

Example #2

  • 200 seat house
  • average ticket being admit 1
  • house sold to 110% capacity for 10 performances

This would require:

200 seats * 10 performances * 1.1 (capacity) /1 (average tickets qty) = 2200 tickets issued

2200 * 500 bytes = approx. 1 Meg

Reserved Seating

Tickets are created at the same time as the performances. One ticket is created for each seat in the theatre so the formula for predicting the amount of space used is relatively constant.

Example

  • 600 seat house and 30 performances

would require: 600 seats * 30 performances = 18000 tickets * 500 bytes = approx. 9 meg

2 Year Requirement

  • 600 seat house
  • 5 productions
  • 30 performances
  • using reserved seating

may require 9 megs * 5 * 2 = 90 megs for 2 years of tickets online.

Adding a Performance - Step 1

  1. From the Performance Tab of the Play Setup window, click the Add Button.

    The Performances window opens. You can now add /create performances for an event.

  2. Enter the Number of Performances you want.

    You can type the number directly into the text box.

  3. In the sales Method drop down list, choose the type of seating that will be used in this performance, typically either Festival or Reserved.

    There are seven different sales methods to choose from. They are: Auction Item, Consignment Tickets, Course, Festival Seating, Inventory, Reserved, and Traveling Troupe.

    Auction Item Used to sell items being used for an auction. Click here for more information on Auction Items.
    Consignment Tix Used to sell tickets on the behalf of another group. For example, a group allots you a particular number of seats that you can sell for them. Once those tickets are gone no more can be sold. This choice has no overselling feature.
    Festival Seating Used to sell tickets to an event that does not have reserved seats. For example, Rush Seating, General Seating. Advantages:
    • The performance can usually be oversold because there is some no-show factor that can be counted on.
    • The price of the tickets is usually a little less than reserved seating
    • Patrons will automatically space themselves out to create a comfortable house dressing
    • Can be used for flexible passes
    Disadvantages:
    • Patrons often arrive at the venue earlier to ensure a good seat. (this can be an advantage if you have a bar)
    Inventory Used to sell merchandise. For example, T-shirts, Programs, etc. It is inventory based sales.
    Reserved Used to sell tickets to an event having reserved seats. Reserved seats can only be used with theatre maps that have had seats created. Advantages:
    • Customers will pay a higher price for the ticket
    • Most popular ticket sales method
    Disadvantages:
    • Cannot count on a no show factor to over sell the theatre
    • House seats must be explicitly booked out
    • Causes some work for the Box Office manager to ensure the house is dressed properly
    Traveling Troupe This is used for shows that travel to various locations. This sales method enables a new performance to be created for each booking.
  4. If required, enter a Performance Type.
  5. In the next two boxes, enter the quantity of tickets to sell, and the quantity of tickets to report as available.

    This option is not applicable for Traveling Troupe and Reserved seating performances. You use this feature to reduce the number of seats available to a festival, consignment or inventory style event. For example, you may normally have 400 seats in your theatre, but the designer has created a set that obstructs 50 seats. You do not want to create another theatre map, or you just don't have access to them. Enter a quantity of 350 seats to sell. That will be your house total for that event.

  6. Choose if you would like to use the default map holds for the performance.
  7. Choose if you would like to include this performance in the annual patron data.
  8. Enter a sales target in the text box (if required).
  9. Decide where you want the performance available for sale. You can sell the performance at the Box Office, on the Internet, or at an Outlet.
  10. Decide where you want to use the performance in a Control House for subscription sales.
  11. Choose if you want to allow overselling of this performance.
  12. Select which Security groups have permission to sell the performance.

    You use this if you would like only users of a certain level to sell the tickets. This can be changed at any time.

  13. Proceed to Step 2 to move on, or Cancel if you do not want to finish setting up the performance.

    Adding a Performance - Step 2

    1. Enter the date of the First Performance (if no performances already exist,) or the Next Performance (if you are just adding another performance).

      The date that is entered here is not written in stone. It can be altered at anytime. It is meant to be used as a guide in creating all performances for the event.

    2. Using the slider for each day, select the maximum number of performances (up to 10) that may occur.

      If you have multiple performances on a specific day of the week, select that number and additional performance times will appear on the right hand side. The number of performances is to be used as a general guide line when setting up the performances.

    3. Enter the Performance Time(s).

      If there is a day of the week that has more then one performance then you may set a matinee time as well as an evening time. These times are to be used as a general guide line when setting up an event. They can be changed at anytime after the performance has been created.

    4. Set up Performance Codes.

      Click here for more information on Performance Codes.

    5. When complete, click the Step 3 button to move on, or Cancel if you do not want to finish setting up the performance.

    Performance Codes

    Performance Codes

    The performance code provides quick reference to a performance(s) of an event. The code should be reflective of an easy way to find the specific performance during the sales process. Performance codes can be up to eight characters or numbers.

    If it is important to find a particular performance (1st Friday) for several events at the same time, each series should have the same code. This becomes very usefully when a patron is booking a season subscription and would like to attend the same time every month. Establishing a consistent nomenclature for the Event and Performance codes saves time during the sales process.

    The following examples are recommended as an easy way for the sales person to verify that they have the correct performance. Codes should be in a week - day - performance format.

    Week Long Performances

    The following example would allow for easy comparison of week-long runs of shows.

    1-SAT

    For the performance on the first Saturday.

    2-SUN-M

    For the matinee performance on the second Sunday .

    3-SAT-E

    For the evening performance on the third Saturday.

    3-SAT-M

    For matinee performance on the third Saturday.

    Single Day Performances

    If you do not have multiple performances per day the next example would allow for an easy comparison of the days of the week.

    SAT-1

    For the performance on the first Saturday.

    SUN-1

    For the performance on the first Sunday .

    SAT-2

    For the performance on the second Saturday.

    SUN-2

    For the performance on the second Sunday.

    Multiple Day Performances

    If you have multiple performances per day the next example would allow for an easy comparison of the performances per day.

    1-SAT-1

    For the first performance on the first Saturday.

    1-SAT-2

    For the second performance on the first Saturday.

    1-SAT-3

    For the third performance on the first Saturday.

    1-SAT-4

    For the fourth performance on the first Saturday.

    Inventory Items

    Finally, for a non-event (inventory) performance: ie boutique sales.

    T-Shirt

    For the inventory item - T-shirts

    Program

    For the inventory item - Programmes

    Hats

    For the inventory item - Hats.

    Mugs

    For the inventory item - Coffee Mugs

    Adding a Peformance - Step 3

    After you click the Step 3 button, the Step 3 window - Adding a Performance, opens.

    1. Review the calendar.

      As performances can span months, use the forward - back buttons to move through the calendar.

    2. To finsh, click the Build button.

      To go back, push the Step 2 , or Cancel if you do not want to finish setting up the performance.

      When you push the Build button, the Build Performance list dialog opens.

    3. Click the Build button.

      The Adding performance verification window opens.

    4. Close the window and you are returned to the Performance tab of the Play window and the performance you entered is displayed.

    Price Codes

    on the Play/Event Setup Window, price codes are displayed on the right side and are for the currently selected (highlighted) performance. Clicking on the different performances will change the prices seen.

    This section is a description of the Price List, Setting a Default Price Code for a performance, Copying Prices and Editing Prices.

    Pricing Information

    Pricing information for the selected performance on the left, displays in the price list on the right side of the Play Setup Window. When you click on different performances the price list will change. From left to right the price list displays:

    Code Displays the single character code that is associated with this price. This character was assigned in the Price Code field in the Venue Map window.
    Use? Check box field. If the box is checked then the price code is available for use by the performance that is highlighted in the performance list.
    Description The description you give to easily identify the price code. For example, Adult, Child, Senior, Student. Or alternatively: Front, Mezzanine, Loge, Balcony.
    Price Displays the dollar value of the price code. For example, $10.00, 15.00... etc.
    City Displays the amount of city tax charged on the price code.
    State/PST Displays the amount of provincial / state tax that is charged on the price code.
    Federal/GST Displays the amount of Federal tax charged on the price code.
    Price + Tax Displays the total price of the price code with all taxes included.

    Selecting a Default Price Code

    Each performance (series) can have its own default price code setting.

    1. Click on the Pricing Tab of the Event Setup Window.

      Pricing information should now display on the right side of the Event Setup Window.

    2. Select the performance for which you are setting the Default Price Code.

      Click on the performance from the performance list. The prices for this performance display in the price list on the right side of the window. 

    3. Open the Default Price Code drop down list.

      A list of usable price codes is displayed.

    4. Select a Price Code to be the Default.

      Do this by clicking on a price code from the list.

    Copying Prices

    In Theatre Manager , you can copy prices to a single performance or group of performances, from any performance saved in Theatre Manager.

    1. Click on the Pricing Tab of the Events and Dates Window.

      Pricing information should now display on the right side of the Events and Dates window.

    2. Select the performances that you want to Copy Prices to.

      To do this, click on the first performance you want to copy prices to, then drag you cursor over the remaining performances from the performances list on the left side of the window. Alternately, you can click the first performance, and then hold <CTRL> (Windows) or <COMMAND> (Mac) and click each additional performance.

    3. Click the Copy Prices Button.

      The Copy Price Wizard window opens.

    4. In Step 1, select the performance to use as a Pricing Template.

      To further refine your searchm click the drop down list under the 1. You can then choose a different five search fields. They are:

      Select a search field, and you can further restrict the search using the "from" and "to" fields to enter criteria. For example, the (picture) below displays a successful search for performance that have Play Codes starting with 07.

    5. In Step 2, you select the performance that you want to use as a Pricing Template.

      As you select plays on the right, their price codes are displayed on the left and the performance's price codes are displayed on the right.

    6. Select the Price Codes you want to copy.

      Highlight the Price Codes you want. You can select all, none, or some of the price codes to be copied.

    7. In Step 3, you choose which Attributes of the Price Code to copy.

      There are four parts of the price code that you can copy across. The Description, the Price, Able To Use Flag, and Enabled/Disabled Promotions. To copy an attribute put a check in the box beside the attribute desired.

    8. Click the Copy Button.

    Promotion Tab

    The promotion tab assigns promotions to a performance. You can assign whatever promotion you want to any performance. A performance could have all available promotions or only specific promotions A performance must have at least one (1) promotion in order to sell tickets to the performance. In order to do this, there must be promotions created already. For detailed information about promotions Click Here. The instructions below describe how to assign promotions to a performance as well as removing them.

    By default, ALL promotions are available to the performance when it is created.

    Adding Promotions to a Performance

    1. Open the Event Setup Window.
    2. Click on the Promotions Tab.

      A list of all the performances for the event will be displayed on the left side of the window. All the promotions currently setup will appear on the right side.

       

    3. Select the performance you want to add promotions to.

      Click a performance to select it. Only one performance may be selected since each may contain different promotion data.

    4. Select the promotions you want to use.

      Click a promotion to select / deselect it.

    5. Click the Allow Use Button.

      An green check mark to the left of the promotion description. The checked promotions will now appear in the buy window when selling tickets to that performance.

    Removing Promotions from a Performance

    1. Open the Event Setup Window.
    2. Click on the Promotions Tab

      A list of all promotions in Theatre Manager will appear on the right side of the Window.

    3. Select the performance.

      Click a performance to select it. Only one performance may be selected since each may contain different promotion data.

    4. Select the promotions you want to remove.

      Do this by highlighting the promotions you want to clear.

    5. Click the Disable Use Button.

      An red X will now appear to the left of the promotion description. The X'd promotions will now not appear in the buy window when selling tickets to that performance.

    Maps Tab

    Maps Tab

    This allows you to view the current map, with holds being used, for the performance. You can see a graphical representation of the current "House Dressing". You can also add and release holds for each performance from this tab. If you add holds in the theatre map for a performance that has already been set up, you will have to go into each performance in the event, select the Holds Tab, and check the box for "Return tickets to hold for this performance." You will then need to:

    • Open the Maps tab of the Events and Dates Window
    • Highlight each performance in turn
    • Select the Sales Map in the display options
    • Click the Holds button to activate the "All Seats on 'Return to Holds' Map popup and select that popup.
    • Parts of the Maps Tab

      Performance Information

      Performance # Unique performance number generated by Theatre Manager.
      Performance Code A quick reference for the performance.
      Performance Date Date of the performance.
      Performance Time Time of the performance.
      # Sold Number of seats currently sold for the performance.
      # Held Number of seats currently held for the performance.
      Sales Method Type of seating used for the performance, typically either Festival or Reserved.
      Play # Sequence number of the event.

      Additional Buttons

      Shows the current map as it appears in the Ticket Selection process.
      Shows the default holds map for the venue as set in Theatre Maps.
      Prints a graphical version of the "House Dressing" for the selected performance.
      Allows a seat to be released for sale for the selected performance.
      Allows a seat to be held by a letter code for the selected performance.
      Places holds based on the default hold map for the venue. Appears after "Hold" is clicked.

    Editing an Event / Play

    The following pages describe different options for editing an existing event.

    Editing Performances

    Each series of performances can be edited after being created. You may be required to change the time or date of the performance or some other attribute. There are different editing options for each of the different sales methods, however they are similar. Before details are explained about editing each performance type. It is useful to know how to access the series detail window so you can start editing.

    Accessing the Performance Detail Window

    1. Open the Event / Play Setup Window.
    2. Find the Event with the performance you wish to edit.

      Click Here to learn how to find events.

    3. Click on the Performances tab

      The Performance Tab opens.

    4. Double click on a performance to open the Performance Detail Window.

      The detail window is the same for each sales method. Depending on the sales method you may not have access to some fields. Click Here for a detailed description of this window.

    Editing Price Codes

    There are two different reasons for editing price codes: One, to initially set up the prices for the price codes. Two, to alter an all ready set up price.

    1. Open the Play Setup Window.
    2. Select the Play you want to adjust and click the Open Button.
    3. Open the Pricing Tab.

      For more detailed information about the Pricing Tab, Click Here.

    4. Select the Performance that you want to Edit Price Codes for.

      Do this by clicking on the specific performance from the performance list on the left side of the Play Setup Window. The prices for this performance will display in the price list on the right side of the Play Setup Window.

    5. Select the the Price Code you want to Edit.
    6. Click the Edit Price Button.

    7. Enter a description for the Price Code.

      Common price code descriptions are Adult, Student, Senior, etc..

    8. Enter a Base Price.

      The price that is entered here is the ticket price before taxes have been added on. If your company likes to have nice round ticket prices after taxes then you can use the Calculate Price Excluding Tax Feature. It is explained further down the page.

    9. Click Save .

      Doing this accepts the changes to the price code. Clicking Cancel would have canceled the changes.


    Calculating Prices Excluding Taxes

    1. Enter the Selling Price you want to end up with after taxes.

      In this example we will use $10.00 and a 7% tax rate.

    2. Click the Calculate Price Excluding Taxes Button.

      The selling price will now display as the price before taxes. In this example the $10.00 Price Code turned into a $9.35 Price Code. Look to the calculation to see how the tax was broken out to create $10.00 final price ticket.

    3. Click Save .

      This accepts the changes to the price code.

    Verifying Seats

    This is an internal database verification that ensures all tickets have been created and are properly setup. The verification routine has three functions:
    • Determines if there are any missing reserved seats. This should never happen - verification will detect and correct the issue.
    • recalculate performance totals based on ticket sales for the performances being verified
    • ensures that the letters displayed on the map are consistent with the settings in system preferences. If you've changed the setting in system preferences to or from 'Price Code' and 'Promotion Letter', you will need to verify future performances to change the actual letter display.
    1. Click the Event button in the Theatre Manager ribbon bar.
    2. Locate the Event with the Performances to be Verified.

    3. Open the Event by double clicking on it.

    4. Select the Performance tab.

      Single click on the performance to be verified. You can select multiple performances at a time if needed.

    5. Click the Verify Seats button.

      The Verify Seats warning dialog opens.

    6. To continue, click the Verify button.

      The progress bar at the bottom of the window will state the function and the progress.

    When the Verify process has completed, the Performances will no longer be available for sale at the Box Office. They will need to be marked as available before tickets can be sold.

    Setting Attendance

    You use setting attendance to keep track of how many patrons attended a performance versus the number of tickets sold. This feature is beneficial for deciding how much can be oversold to a festival house. You may have discovered there is a consistent 'no show' rate of 15% to 20% and can then adjust sales to match the trend. Another use for this feature is calculating royalties based on the number of patrons that actually attended the performance, not based on the number of tickets sold.


    It is important to remember that this feature only works if you have the ticket and the patron number printed on the ticket, or a bar code that contains one or both of those numbers.


    To Set the Attendance

    1. Click the button in the Theatre Manager Ribbon bar.

    2. Double click on the Play / Event to set attendance for.

    3. Click the Attendance tab.

    4. Select the performance to set attendance for.
    5. Choose the performance by clicking on the corect date in the column on the left side of the Attendance Tab.

    6. Click the button.
    7. The Set Attendance button is only accessible if the performance you have selected has already taken place or will be performed that day. The Set Attendance dialog opens.

    8. Click the All button to set the attendance flag to "Attended" for all patrons and tickets.
    9. Use this option if you are sure that all the tickets were redeemed for the performance.


    10. Click the Scan button to manually enter attendance.
    11. The 'Attendance: Patrons who came' window opens.

    12. Enter the patron number, ticket number or click in the ticket number field and scan the ticket.
    13. If you enter the patron number, all of the tickets the patron purchased will appear in the window. If you enter the ticket number or scanning the ticket, only that ticket will appear.


    14. Click the Accept button.
    15. To speed up the process, press the <RETURN> key to accept the ticket # / Patron #. If you are using a bar code scanner, set the default to include an automatic <RETURN> after each scan. If the tickets have a bar code on them, then either the patron number or the ticket number can be scanned in. It depends on what information has been encoded in the bar code.

      If too many tickets have been selected, and not all should be marked as attended, highlight those to remove and click the Clear Attend button. The tickets are removed from the list.

    16. Click the Finished button when all data has been entered .
    17. This marks all tickets entered in the list as Attended.



    To clear tickets incorrectly marked as 'Attended' from a play:

    If a mistake is made in setting attendance, attendance for the entire performance (or optionally, specific tickets) can be cleared.

    1. Click the button in the Theatre Manager Ribbon bar.


    2. Double click on the Play / Event to clear attendance for.

    3. Click the tab.

    4. Select the performance you want to Clear Attendance from.
    5. The tickets for that performance are displayed in the attendance list.


    6. If clearing attendance for a select group of tickets, highlight them in the right hand window.

    7. Click the button.


    8. Click the All button to clear the attendance flag for all patrons and tickets.

    9. Click the button to only clear attendance for the tickets selected.

    Selecting a Performance for Attendance

    You can select a performance you want to set attendance for from the Patron Attendance window.

    To Start selecting a performance, you perform the following steps:

    1. From the main menu bar, choose Accounting >> Confirm Attendance.
    2. The Patron Attendance list window will open.

    3. Enter Search Criteria.
    4. The search criteria is entered in the From and To fields and is based on the field listed in the drop down list.

    5. Click the Search Button.
    6. A list of performances opens.

    7. Double click on a performance to select it. Once selected, the performance will open.

    8. Continue at Step 8 of the Set Attended section of Setting Attendance.

    Adding a Fee to a Ticket Price

    There are times you will want to add a fee to a ticket price. For example, adding a fee when selling tickets for another group.
    The steps below outline how to add a fee to a ticket price.

    1. Add a Fee to a Sales Promotion.
      - For information on creating a sales promotion click here.
      - On the promotion Calculation tab, enter the fee you wish to charge into Ticket Fee box 1.
    2. Alter the event Account tab.
      - Select the event the fee is to be applied to. For more information on events click here.
      - Under the event Accounting tab, specify what G/L account the ticket fee should be posted to in the Ticket Fee 1 Account box under the Earned Revenue Accounts (Fees) section.
      - For more information on the accounting tab click here.
    3. Alter the event Pricing tab.
      - Under the event Pricing tab, alter the prices for performances if the fee is to be built into the price.
      - For more information on the Pricing tab click here
    4. Enable the promotion for the event performances.
      - Enable the promotion from Step 1 under the Promotions tab.
      - For more information on the Promotions tab click here.

    You have now successfully set-up the ticket fee. When the Sales Promotion you created is selected during the ticket sales process, it will add the fee on top of the base ticket price.

    Deleting a Play / Event

    Deleting a play may only be necessary if the play was entered into the database incorrectly, inadvertently, or has been canceled. You can delete a play if all tickets sold have been refunded or exchanged out of the performance and the End of Day Wizard has been completed.

    Rules for Deleting a Play:

    You can delete only if:

    • You have "Delete" user privileges the Play information under the data tab of Employee Setup.
    • All general ledger detail records have been archived that are associated with this play.
    • There are no Daily Sales Summary information associated with this play.
    • The play is not a "Control House" for any Season Subscription Package.
    • There are no Volunteer History records assigned to this play.
    • All necessary ticket based analysis reports have been been printed for this play.

      To start, you would perform the following steps:

    1. Open the Play List Window.

      Click here for more information on opening the Play list window.

    2. Open the Play to delete.

    3. Click the Delete Button in the Plays window.

      After you click the delete button the Delete Play dialog opens.

    4. Click Delete to delete the performance.

      Clicking the Cancel button cancels the deletion.

      If the Sales Method is Reserved Seating, then all tickets that were previously created for this series will also be deleted.

    Deleting a Performance

    If you chose not to put on a performance for a play, you can delete the performance. However, if you have sold tickets to the performance, you will be unable to delete it.

    Rules for Deleting a Performance:

    You can delete only if:

    • You have "Delete" user privileges the Play information under the data tab of Employee Setup.
    • The play must not be archived.
    • No tickets have been sold to the performance.
    • No transactions created for this performance.

    To start, you perform the following steps:

    1. Open the Play List Window.

      Click here for more information on opening the Play list window.

    2. Open the Play you want to remove the performance from.

    3. Review the Performance Tab to ensure that no ticket have been sold to the performance.

    4. Note the # SOLD column in the performance list. Quantity must be zero for each performance in the list.

    5. Click the Delete Button.

      The Delete Performance dialog opens.

    6. Click the Delete Button to delete the performance.

    Tabs In Events / Plays and Dates

    This section describes the various information tabs in the Events and Dates window. Tabs that are critical for event setup are described under Creating An Event / Play.

    Attendance Tab

    The Attendance Tab is used to show which patrons are attending a performance. As well you can set the attendance the day of the performance and refund tickets from this tab. Setting attendance allows you to track which patrons with tickets actually attended the performance. The refund function is for ease of use if on the day of the performance a patron decides that they would like to refund their ticket you can do so without having to change windows.

    Parts of the Attendance Tab

    Performance # Number of performance assigned in order of creation.
    Performance Code Code assigned based on the week and day of the performance.
    Performance Date The date of the performance.
    Purchase # Purchase reference number.
    First Name Patron's first name.
    Last Name Patron's last name.
    Company Company the patron works for.
    Quantity Number of admittance per ticket.
    Section Section the patron is seated in.
    Row # Row the patron is seated in.
    Seat # Seat number the patron is seated in.
    Sets the attendance for the performance. This is only available on the day of the performance or after it has taken place.
    Clears the attendance of the performance. This is only available on the day of the performance or after it has taken place.
    Print the selected tickets for this performance that are not yet printed.
    Refunds the selected ticket(s).
    Transfers the selected ticket(s) to another performance.

    Transfer Tickets to another Performance

    Occasionally, you may need to transfer all the tickets from one performance to another. Rather than doing this individually, you can transfer them in a batch by using the wizard on the Attendance tab of the Event setup. This can be helpful when:

    • You have cancelled the performance and need to re-seat patrons in another performance
    • You want to move a subscription package to another performance
    • You need to transfer people into a 'HOLD' or 'WAIT LIST' performance
    • Anytime a mass re-seating of patrons is required

    The transfer function moves all selected tickets by matching seat codes for reserved seating events (festival seating events cannot be transferred in this fashion). Tickets for festival seating events will need to be manually exchanged. Tickets are not re-priced when they are transferred and do not affect order balances.


    Tickets will not be moved if:

    • There is no corresponding seat code in the new performance
    • The Price Code is not available in the new performance
    • If some of the selected tickets in any one order cannot be moved (e.g. some tickets within the order can be transferred but others in the same order cannot - perhaps because the seat code does not exist or the seat is already booked to another patron in the new performance) the entire order will be ignored. You will then need to manually exchange all the tickets in the order.


    To transfer tickets from one performance to another:

    1. Bring up the Events List in the Setup menu, or by clicking on the icon on the main tool ribbon.

    2. Click the icon to populate the list with your events.

    3. Double click on the Event containing the performance you wish to transfer the tickets FROM.



    4. Click on the tab

    5. Highlight the performance on the left that you are transferring the tickets FROM.



    6. Highlight the ticket(s) on the right that you wish to transfer.
    7. You can select some or all of the tickets, allowing you to transfer only a sub-group of the total attendance if you wish.



    8. Click the button at the bottom of the window.


    9. Enter the performance number that you want to transfer the tickets TO.
    10. Alternatively, you can use the icon to search for the performance.


    11. Select whether you want to transfer:
      •    Only the selected ticket(s) (in this example, eight tickets), or
      •    All of the tickets within this performance

    12. Click the button.
    13. The valid tickets will be transferred to the new performance.

    Cash Flow Tab

    The Cash Flow tab displays a detailed summary of the sales analysis taken in for the event event.  Each line displays the NET number of tickets that were sold, the gross sales in dollars, the amount of markups in dollars, the amount of discounts in dollars, the price before tax, the amount of tax in dollars (each tax level is broken out separately), and the net sales. The price before tax is the gross sales + markups - discounts + 3 levels of ticket fees. The Net Sales is the price before tax + 3 levels of taxes.

    G/L Entries Tab

    The G/L Entries tab displays a detailed summary of the transactions created and journalized to the general ledger for the general ledger accounts defined for this play.

    You can adjust the summary options by choosing the drop down menu in the bottom right hand corner of the window.

    Marketing Tab

    In the Marketing tab, you can configure the Marketing notes for the play. You can also add the play to a mail list and include external and internal notes for your Box Office Staff. Information you enter on this page will appear on your page in the Ticket Trove iPhone and iPad app.

    Available Actions

    Notification The email notification that will be sent when tickets are purchased to this play. Click here for info on work flow notifications.
    Default Mail List Allows you to assign this play to a specific mail list.
    Running Time Running time of each performance in minutes. Also displays for Web Sales.
    Genre Genre is a setting for events that is common across all Theatre Manager customers. Currently, there are about 30 classifications which will be used in the iPhone/iPad app to help customers find entertainment to their liking.
    External Sales Notes Marketing notes for both your Box Office staff and for Web Sales.
    Internal Sales Notes Marketing notes that appear to you Box Office staff, but not on the Web.
    Event Icon for Web/iPhone App If there is a graphic in the event, entering it here will display the graphic for all performances of the event.

    Performance Tab

    The Performance Tab is used to create the performances that make up a play. Performance information cannot be added (and the tab will not be made available) until Play information and Accounting information have been entered and saved. If a play has already been set up you can access the Performance Tab at any time.

    Sale Settings

    At the Box Office Checking this box allows you to sell the performance at the Box Office.
    Via the Internet Checking this box allows you to sell the performance on the Internet.
    At Other Outlets Checking this box allows you to sell the performance at other outlets.
    Use In a Control House Checking this box allows the performance to be used in a Control House for subscribers.
    Prevent Overselling Checking this box prevents the performance from being oversold.
    Sell Security Allows you to control what security levels have the ability to sell this performance. Click here for more information on Sell Security.

    Performance Information

    Performance # Unique performance number generated by Theatre Manager.
    Performance Code A quick reference for the performance.
    Performance Date Date of the performance.
    Performance Time Time of the performance.
    Sales Method Type of seating used for the performance, typically either Festival or Reserved.
    # Sold Number of seats sold for this performance.
    # Held Number of seats currently held for the performance.
    # Available Number of seats currently available for purchase for this performance.
    Box Office? Whether the performance is available for sale at the Box Office.
    Web? Whether the performance is available for sale on the Internet.
    Outlet? Whether the performance is available for sale at an outlet.
    Subscription? Whether the performance is available for sale via a subscription.
    Oversell? Whether overselling is allowed for this performance.
    Play # The Play number that this performance is part of.

    Additional Buttons

    Creates a new performance and opens the Performance Setup Window. Click here for more information.
    Opens the Performance Setup Window for the selected performance.
    Deletes the selected performance. Click here for more information.
    Shows all transactions for the selected performance.
    Verifies all seats for the selected performance. It is best to do this when no other users are logged in.

    Performance Detail Window

    The performance detail window opens when you double click on an existing performance. Through this window you are able to edit performance data. Depending on which sales method is being used you may not have access to some data fields. For example if you are using the festival method you will be allowed to modify the quantity of seats you can sell whereas with reserved seating since every patron requires a seat you cannot access this field.

    • Performance Tab
    • Sales Management Tab
    • Web Sales Tab
    • Holds Tab
    • Security Tab
    • Performance Detail Window - Performance Tab

      Performance # This is the performance number assigned by Theatre Manager.
      Performance Date - Time The date and time of the performance.
      Performance Code The unique code which defines the performance.
      Default Price Code The price code that is most common should be set as default to save time at selling time.
      Alternate Theatre Map This is used if after the first run of the play you need to switch to a new venue. This may occur if you require an extra venue to run the play or if you switch the venue to a smaller establishment to better use your seats.
      Sales Method Form of seating used for the performance. This is typically either Festival or Reserved seating.
      Quantity To Sell The number of tickets available for sale.
      Quantity To Report The number of tickets to be reported.
      Held Seat Count This is the number of seats currently being held. For Festival seating you can input a new number to raise or lower the number of holds. For Reserved seating you will need to change the holds on the Venue Map.
      Internet Held Seats Additional seats that are being withheld from sale on the Internet.
      Accounting Posting - Deferred Revenue G/L If the performance has occured, then the posting account for the sales will be listed here.

      Performance Detail Window - Sales Management Tab

      Allow Tickets - At the Box Office Allows the selling of tickets at the Box Office. In the input field on the right, you can set the date and time that tickets are to be released for sale.
      Allow Tickets - Via the Internet Allows the selling of tickets via the Internet. In the input field on the right, you can set the date and time that tickets are to be released for sale.
      Allow Tickets - At Other Outlets Allows the selling of tickets at Other Outlets. In the input field on the right, you can set the date and time that tickets are to be released for sale.
      Allow Tickets - In A Subscription Allows the selling of tickets in a Subscription. In the input field on the right, you can set the maximum number of seats to hold for subscribers.
      Allow Tickets - As Pay-What-You-Can in Before-Event-Sales When using the Before-Event-Sales function, this allows tickets to be sold as Pay-What-You-Can.
      Sales Controls - Prevent Overselling This field can only be accessed if you are selling using the Festival or Inventory methods.

      Performance Detail Window - Web Settings Tab

      Performance Flag A special flag used to denote Performance. This is typically used for a plug-in for Web Sales.
      Stop Sales in Advance How many minutes to take the performance off sale on the Internet.
      Web Purchase Limit The number of tickets that a patron can buy from the Internet.
      Notification For selecting a notification to be sent when a sale occurs for this performance.
      Performance Notes Additional performance notes to be placed on the Internet for patrons to read.

      Performance Detail Window - Holds Tab

      Return tickets to hold for this performance If a ticket is refunded, the seat will return tohold status.
      Use over-ride seating map for this performance Uses custom holds from the over-ride map when the ticket is refunded.
      Use default seating map from theatre Uses the default holds on the venue map when the ticket is refunded.

      Performance Detail Window - Security Tab

      This window allows you to set permissions for the selling of tickets to this performance. Click here for more information on Security.

    Transaction List

    The following represent a list of transaction which have occurred for a selected performance. For more information on Transactions, Click here.

    You view these from the going to the Performance Tab and selecting a performance. Then click the Transactions Button at the bottom right hand side of the window.

    Play Tab

    Parts of the Play Tab

    Play Information

    Play # Unique play number generated by Theatre Manager.
    Play Code A quick reference for a play. It is recommended that play codes start with the fiscal year of the performance, followed by the play number. This allows for quickly generating reports on plays by year. If there is more than one venue or different types of series, for example a main-stage and a second stage series, a character code can be included after the year.

    09-01 - the first play of the 2009 season

    09-05 - the fifth play of the 2009 season

    09-C01 - the first play in the "C" theatre (assuming multiple theatres)

    09-J01 - the first play in the "Jazz" series

    Play Colour You can override the normal play colour displayed on the calendar by selecting a different colour from the colour palette.
    Play Title Official title of the play as it will appear on the ticket or internet.
    Season Year the play takes place. This is based on the financial year.
    Theatre Map Number of the venue map that the play will be performed in. Plays which are to be sold with reserved seats must take place in venues that have had seats created. Plays sold as general admission, Festival Sales or Traveling Troupe, may be sold to plays with or without seats created.
    Theatre map search button. This button is only available when a new play is entered. To open a list of possible theatre maps to choose from click the button. From the list double click on a map to select it.

    Additional Information

    Corporate Sponsor Name of the sponsor for the production. Additional sponsors could be entered in the notes field. This information can be printed on tickets.
    Special Note Additional information such as warnings or special messages that may be required for an play. This information can be printed on tickets.
    Director Director of the play. This information can be printed on tickets.
    Playwright Playwright of the play. This information can be printed on tickets.

    Show Status Information

    Active Status of the play for reporting purposes.
    Closed Status of the play for ticket sales and postings.
    Date Closed This field displays the date the play was set to prevent sales and financial changes.
    By This field displays the initials of the employee who closed the play.

    Web Sales Controls

    Stop Sales in Advance Number of minutes prior to the play start time that the play will be removed from web sales.
    Patron Purchase Limit Sets the maximum number of tickets to be sold in an order for this play via web sales. If the Box Office will allow a patron to have more than the allotted number of tickets, the tickets will need to be sold by a Box Office staff member and not via the internet.

    Ticket Printing Information

    Print selected ticket face Choose to print ticket for this play (is the default setting)
    Ticket Face The ticket face selected for the play. The ticket face number can be typed manually or selected.
    Click to open a list of possible ticket faces to choose from. Double click on a ticket face to select it. By leaving this field blank a built in default ticket face design will be used for printing tickets.
    Mark ticket as printed (but don't print) Will not print a ticket for the play all though when tickets are sold they will appear printed.
    Only Print Sales Promotion ticket face Prints a ticket based upon the promotion selected. For more information regarding printing tickets by promotion refer to Promotion Detail.
    Click to print a test ticket for this play.

    Revenue Tab

    This tab displays a detailed summary of the revenue taken in for each performance of an event. The Play is broken down into individual performances.

    Below is an explanation about each column on this tab.

    Performance Code This is the code used to track the performance by.
    Performance Date The date of the performance.
    Performance Time The time of the performance.
    # Sold The current number of tickets sold to the performance.
    # Report The number of tickets being used for reporting.
    Price The base price pf the ticket.
    Discount The total of all discounts.
    Gross Sales The total amount of sales minus all discounts, fees, and taxes.
    Ticket Fee 1 Total of all fees categorized to this fee.
    Ticket Fee 2 Total of all fees categorized to this fee.
    Ticket Fee 3 Total of all fees categorized to this fee.
    City Tax The total of all City taxes.
    State / PST Tax The total of all State or PST taxes.
    Federal / GST Tax The total of all Federal or GST taxes.
    Total The total of all money collected during payment. This includes fees and taxes.
    Journal No Code If the performance has occured, the G/L number that it was posted to.
    Performance # The performance number assigned by Theatre Manager based on order inputted.

    Volunteer Tab

    "Volunteer" is a broad term meaning "Personnel," "Volunteers," "Staff," or a variety of other terms. The field refers to any person assigned to an activity - whether they are paid or unpaid. you may have a mixture of paid and unpaid staff within the same event, for example Ushers (who are unpaid) and Run Crew (who are compensated). Since the name of the field is customizable, some organizations may retain the term "Volunteer," while others change it to reflect their own terminology. The nomenclature in your database may be different than "Volunteer."

    This Volunteer tab displays a list of the volunteers (personnel) assigned to each performance of the event, and what their task will be during the performance.

    Parts of the Volunteer tab

    Performance Information On the left side of the window, the listing of performances including the sequence number of the performance, series code, and performance date.
    Volunteer Information On the right side of the window, the listing of volunteers assigned to a specific performance.
    Allows you to look up and add a volunteer to the selected performance.
    Brings up the Volunteer Activity Detail window for the selected patron.
    Allows you to remove a volunteer from the selected performance.
    Show volunteer working entire event This feature is currently under development.

    Adding Volunteers to an Event

    "Volunteer" is a broad term meaning "Personnel," "Volunteers," "Staff," or a variety of other terms. The field refers to any person assigned to an activity - whether they are paid or unpaid. you may have a mixture of paid and unpaid staff within the same event, for example Ushers (who are unpaid) and Run Crew (who are compensated). Since the name of the field is customizable, some organizations may retain the term "Volunteer," while others change it to reflect their own terminology. The nomenclature in your database may be different than "Volunteer."



    Adding volunteers to an event is as easy as "drag and drop" from a contact list to the Volunteers window in Event Setup, or using the convenient button at the bottom of the Volunteers tab.

    1. Open an event through the Setup>>Events & Dates menu, or by clicking the button.

      Proceed to the tab.

    2. Highlight the performance on the left-hand side to which you want to add volunteers.

    3. Click the button at the bottom of the window.

      A contact lookup window of Active Volunteers opens.

      Patrons must be listed in their patron records as active volunteers with positions they are able to perform. For more information on setting up patrons as volunteers, click here.

    4. Highlight the volunteer in the lookup that you wish to add to the performance.

      Some patrons will appear more than once in the lookup, indicating they are capable of performing more than one position.

      Click the button.

      The patron will appear on the Volunteer tab of the event setup.

    5. Repeat to assign all volunteers

    After adding all your volunteers, you may want to edit the details of their assignments to be more specific on the task they are to perform (for example, Ushers may be assigned to "Orchestra" or "Balcony" or "Coat Check," and Run Crew may be assigned to "Fly Loft" or "Spot Operator" or "Grip").

    Editing a Volunteer Assignment

    After adding all your volunteers, you may want to edit the details of their assignments to be more specific on the task they are to perform (for example, Ushers may be assigned to "Orchestra" or "Balcony" or "Coat Check," and Run Crew may be assigned to "Fly Loft" or "Spot Operator" or "Grip").

    1. Open an event through the Setup>>Events & Dates menu, or by clicking the button.
    2. Proceed to the tab.

    3. Highlight the performance on the left-hand side to which you want to add volunteers.

    4. The list of volunteers assigned to that performance will appear.


    5. Highlight the patron for whom you wish to edit their volunteer assignment.
    6. Click the button at the bottom of the window.

    7. The Activity Detail window will appear.



      Edit the Activity Details as appropriate.

    Removing a Volunteer Assigned to an Event

    If a Volunteer is unable to perform the assignment, or you need to remove them from the Volunteers list for any reason, you may do so directly within the event setup.

    1. Open an event through the Setup>>Events & Dates menu, or by clicking the button.
    2. Proceed to the tab.

    3. Highlight the performance on the left-hand side from which you want to remove a volunteer.

    4. The list of volunteers assigned to that performance will appear.


    5. Highlight the patron for whom you wish to remove their volunteer assignment.
    6. Click the button at the bottom of the window.

    7. A confirmation window will appear.



    8. Click the button.

    Tasks Tab

    This page is under construction.

    Archiving Events / Plays

    "Closing" an event / play in the Event / Play Tab removes the ability to sell tickets or change financial information for that event. A "Closed" event can still be reported on as long as it is still marked "Active".

    An event marked "Closed" and not marked "Active" will not appear in the Play List, report or mail list selections, and cannot have further sales or changes in financial information. Key events / plays (such as your main stage series) should always remain "Active."

    In general, you should close an event / play:

    • When you are finished paying royalties
    • When you want to prevent exchanges from old events / plays (such as for subscribers)
    You should mark events / plays as Inactive:
    • When you no longer want to see them in mail list criteria and reports - perhaps after a number of years
    • If they are past rentals that are not pertinent to your general business operations.

    To Close An Event / Play

    1. Find the event / play you want to close.

      Click here to learn how to find an event / play.

    2. Open the event / play and locate the status selections in the Event / Play tab of the Events & Dates window.

    3. Check the box next to Closed. A Close the Play dialog will open, asking you to verify closing the event / play:

    4. Click the "Closed" button to mark the event / play closed.

    You can search for Closed events / plays in the Event / Play List by clicking the Closed box in the Event / Play List Window before entering search parameters. Then you can open a closed event and remove the check from the Closed Status box to re-open that event / play.

    Creating an Event for Traveling Troupe Performances

    Theatre Manager has a Performance Type/Sales Mode for Traveling Troupe performances. It is a method to record each run-out performance traveling group does, including the income from the run-out, activities of the group while they're traveling, and attendance/demographic data about the audience.


    There are a few steps to setting up a Traveling Troupe performance.

    1. Create an Event under which to add the performances. Typically, all traveling troupe performances are recorded under one Event. For step-by-step instructions on setting up events in Theatre Manager, click here.
    2. Assign a map to the event. The traveling troupe method only sells 1 "ticket" to the venue contact for the show, so it does not matter which map is assigned here. Location details are filled out on a per-performance basis, so the map location/seats/etc are truly immaterial to this particular Event.
    3. Fill out the Accounting Tab with the appropriate accounts for the income from the various run-outs.
    4. On the Performance Tab, click to Add a new performance. You can start with just one or as many as you'd like. The traveling troupe sales method allows for quick adding of performances directly from the sales window, so not all shows need be set up at once. Select "Traveling Troupe" for the performance type.

      This will "trigger" Theatre Manager to give you the traveling troupe sales window when you sell the performance. For more information about creating Performances, click here.

    5. Set up a promotion to use for traveling troupe performances. Tickets and revenue for all the performances will need to be recorded under a promotion, so it is best to set one up for the specific use. The calculation could be for $0 (a comp) because the sales process allows for an override of the cost of the performance to match the contracted amount for the show. To get instructions for creating promotions, click here.
    6. There is an option in Setup > System Tables > Code Tables that is used in the Traveling Troupe sales process to record important activities/times for the chamber group (call times, rehearsals, etc). For information about that particular option in code tables, click here. To learn how to add values to code tables, click here.
    7. Users who will be selling the traveling troupe performances will need to have their employee access settings revised to include the ability to adjust the price of the performance. Go to Setup > Users and Access > Employee List and select the employees in turn. On the Functions Tab of the access settings, make sure the employee(s) have a check next to Ticket Sales - Set the price of a traveling troupe performance during the sales process

    8. Then you sell the performance to the road venue using the primary contact at the venue as the patron to whom the performance is sold. For instructions on how to do so, click here.
    9. Note the New Performance button in the toolbar on the Performance Selection screen. Additional performances can be created for the event "on the fly" - as a performance is "sold out" once you sell it to one venue/contact. Click the New Performance button in the Sales Window to bring up the wizard which adds performances to the database.

    Merchandise Setup

    You can use Theatre Manager to sell merchandise at the Box Office and via the Web by setting up an Event for merchandise sales. To do this, you would perform the following steps:

    1. Create a new map just for merchandise sales. This will be a general admission map so only the information under the description tab will be required.
    2. Build your merchandise event using the merchandise map from above.
    3. Create a performance for each piece of merchandise.
      Take note of the performance numbers as you build. These will be used in steps below.
    4. Duplicate and edit the tmVenueDefault.html page found in the tmVenue folder.
      Change the name of the duplicated page to tmVenue**.html where ** represents the map number from Step 1.
      Edit the content of the page to advertise your merchandise.
    5. Duplicate TMticketsPrice_MapDefault.html and the TMticketsSection_MapDefaultf.html pages.
      Note the f at the end of the second page.
      Change the work Default to the Map number from Step 1.
      Alter the line for the map image within the page to reference the image for the merchandise item. By change the line as outlined before Theatre Manager will reference the image sharing the same item number as the performance number.

      Locate the following:
      F_HTML_SEATMAP&selected_only=no&img_quality=75" border="0">

      The TMticketsPrice_Map page may look like this:
      F_HTML_SEATMAP&selected_only=yes&selected_border=144&selected_color=007700&img_quality=75" border="0">
      Replace both with:
      PB_SEQ.gif" target="window_blank">
      PB_SEQ.gif" width="392" height="200" border="0">
      Click on image for larger view

    6. Save pictures of the merchandise in the order of the events. Alter the names of the pictures to say item**.gif where ** represents the performance the item will be sold as. Place these pictures in the tmGIFS folder within the web pages.

    Working with Auction Items

    A number of organizations are now using auctions as a standard fundraiser during the season. Theatre Manager supports the selling of auction items.

    Setup a Donation Campaign - Optional

    Most often items used in the auction are donated by other organizations. By setting up a donation campaign, these items can be tracked and receipts can be issued for the donation.

    1. Setup a donation campaign for the items received.

      Click here for more information on setting up a donation campaign.

    2. Enter the donations to the Patron record.

      Use the description field to describe the auction item. Using one of the donor fields, classify the gifts received. Examples of classifications are travel, gourmet, electronics, theatre, etc.

    3. Use 'Gift In-Kind' as the payment method.
    4. Print a report on the donation campaign to have a list of all auction items.

    Setting up the Event with Auction Items

    1. Create a new event called Auction with the season.

      Click here for more information on creating an event.

      An example would be Auction 2007.

    2. Create a new performance as 'Sales Method' Auction Item.

      Click here for more information on adding a performance.

      Set the 'Quantity to Sell' as the total number of Auction Items available.

    3. Create a new performance as 'Sales Method' General Admission. - Optional

      An additional performance can be used to track admission to the auction.

    The Night of the Auction

    1. All running bids for auctions will be tracked separately at the tables.
    2. At the end of the auction, pull all the auction tracking forms.
    3. Find the winning patron in the database and sell a ticket to the auction item performance.

      The ticket order window will have additional information for handling auction items.

    4. Enter the price and description of the item.
    5. Go to the Payment window and place the order 'On Account.'
    6. Repeat Steps 3-5 for each additional auction item.

      If a patron has won more than one auction item, make sure to add the items to one order.

    7. When the patron comes to the Box Office to pay, go to the order in their Patron record.

      Orders are stored on the Order tab of the Patron record.

    8. Select the order and then click on the Payment button.

      A receipt can be printed so the patron has payment verification when they pick up their item from the table.

    Ticket Faces

    With Theatre Manager you can customize ticket faces when printing on BOCA or Practical Automation compatible printers. You can:

    • Select the information to be printed on a ticket
    • Where it is printed on the ticket
    • Determine the size of the fonts printed on the ticket.
    • Assign different ticket faces to different plays.

    The process of creating a customized ticket face does involve some trial and error to align information and font sizes exactly as required. To access the Ticket faces window you:

    1. Choose Setup >> Ticket Faces from the Main Menu.

      The Ticket Face List window opens.

    2. Click here for more information on the Ticket Face List window.

    Ticket Face List Window

    Parts of the Ticket Face List Window

    Inserts a new ticket face. For more information on creating new ticket faces click here.
    Opens the selected ticket face for editing. For more information on editing ticket faces click here.
    Creates a duplicate copy of the current ticket face.
    Deletes the selected ticket face. For more information on deleting ticket faces click here.
    Generates a report of all listed ticket faces to the screen or default print location.
    Imports a tmf format ticket face into Theatre Manager.
    Exports a ticket face out of Theatre Manager in a tmf format.
    Description Search option for the ticket face. Select a search parameter that best suits the ticket face to be located.
    From Starting range of the ticket face search.
    To Ending range of the ticket face search.
    Search button to execute the search.
    Ticket# Unique number assigned by Theatre Manager to track the ticket face.
    Description Name of the ticket face.
    Outlet-Owner Outlet responsible for the ticket face.
    File Name Data the ticket face is composed of.

    Ticket Face Detail Window

    Parts of the Ticket Face Detail Window

    Inserts a new ticket face. For more information on creating new ticket faces click here.
    Saves changes made to the current ticket face.
    Creates a duplicate copy of the current ticket face.
    Reverts changes made to the ticket face back to the last saved point.
    Deletes the selected ticket face. For more information on deleting ticket faces click here.
    Generates a report of the ticket faces to the screen or default print location.
    Ticket Face# Unique number given to the ticket face by Theatre Manager
    Outlet Outlet responsible for the ticket face.
    Description Name of the ticket face, if it is for a ticket, receipt, renewal notice etc.
    Code used to create the ticket face. For more information on the ticket face code tab click here.
    Equations calculated prior to printing the ticket. For more information on the constants tab click here.
    Additional options for ticket printing. For more information on the options tab click here.
    Adds a line to the bottom of the ticket parameters and opens the Ticket Face Detail window. For more information on the Ticket Face Detail window click here.
    Removes the currently selected lines from the ticket face.
    Ticket DPI Conversion Allows the conversion of the row and column information to a different DPI.
    Enables printing of a sample ticket to the printer. Ensure the printer is correctly set up in the options tab. This is designed to print a sample ticket with sample information. To see an actual ticket with correct information the ticket face number must be entered into the Plays and Dates information for a particular play. Sell tickets to a test patron account and print them as a final test of the ticket design.

    Ticket Face Code Tab

    Parts of the Ticket Face Code Tab

    Row Row to which the calculation is applied
    Column The column to which the calculation is applied
    Rotation The rotation of the data
    Font The font to be used to display the data
    Height The height of the characters
    Width The width of the characters
    Calculation Exports the ticket calculations
    Add a line to the ticket face calculations. For more information on calculations click here.
    Remove a line from the ticket face calculations.
    Ticket DPI Conversion Allows the conversion of the row and column information to a different DPI.
    Enables printing of a sample ticket to the printer. Ensure the printer is correctly set up in the options tab. This is designed to print a sample ticket with sample information. To see an actual ticket with correct information the ticket face number must be entered into the Plays and Dates information for a particular play. Sell tickets to a test patron account and print them as a final test of the ticket design.

    Calculation Commands

    Quick reference information for Calculation Commands

    Cheatsheet

    The third line of the sample screen C_HOME_PHONE has no formatting in the fieldcalculation. This instructs the printer to left justify the home phone of the patron starting in row 15 and column 1040. To justify the phone number place the field in brackets and prefix it with the letters 'jst'. Follow the field (inside the bracket) with a comma and a single quote to start the formatting instructions, enter the formatting instructions, and close with a single quote. For example, jst(C_HOME_PHONE,'-8') formats the field calculation to allocate 8 spaces for the home phone number and to right justify when printing.

    String Justification

    String Description Example
    jst ()

    jst(<i>string1,number1,&#91;string2,number2&#93;...</i>) Returns a string containing the specified <i>string</i> left or tight justified with sufficient spaces added to make a total length specified by <i>number</i>.

    The jst() function also includes concatenation. If <i>number</i> is negative the resulting <i>string</i> is right justified, if the <i>number</i> is positive the <i>string</i> is left justified; number must be in the range of 1 to 999.

    • jst('This is left justified',30) gives |This is left justified   |
    • jst('This is right justified',-30) gives |  This is right justified|
    ^n (caret) Causes the data to be centered in the field <i>n</i> characters wide.
    • jst('This is centered',^30) gives | This is centered |
    -n (minus) Causes the data to be right justified in a field <i>n</i> characters wide.
    • jst('This is Right',-20) gives |*******This is Right|where * represents spaces
    $ Places a $ sign in front of the data.
    • jst(PS_TOTAL_PAID,'$' gives $12.00 if the ticket price paid was 12.00
    Pc Causes the part of the field not filled by the data to be filled by character c.
    • jst(PS_TOTAL_PAID,'-7P*' gives '**12.00' if the ticket price paid was 12.00
    X Causes the data to be truncated if its length exceeds the field length. The default is not to truncate.
    • jst('abcdef','4') gives 'abcdef
    • jst('abcdef','4X') gives 'abcd'
    U Causes the data to be converted to upper case.
    • jst('this IS upper Case','U' gives 'THIS IS UPPER CASE'
    L Causes the data to be converted to lower case.
    • jst('this IS lower Case','L' gives 'this is lower case'
    C Causes the data to be capitalized.
    • jst('this IS Capitalized','C' gives 'This Is Capitalized'
    Nnn Causes the data to be treated as a fixed decimal number with nn decimal places.
    • jst(0.235,'N') gives '0.235'
    • jst(0.235,'N2') gives '0.24'
    E Applies to numbers only and displays a blank when the number is zero.
    • jst(0,'N2') gives '0.00'
    • jst(0,'N2E') gives ' '
    , Applies to numbers only and adds commas as number separators.
    • jst(1234,'N2') gives '1234.00'
    • jst(1234,'N2,') gives '1,234.00'

    String Functions

    String Description Example
    cap()

    Returns the capitalized representation of a string, that is, the first letter of each and every word in the string is capitalized.

    • cap('tHeATre MANAGER') returns 'Theatre Manager'
    con(string1,string2[,string3]...)

    Returns a string concatenating or combining two or more string values.

     

    Theatre Manager will build concatenations. Simply select more than one field from the available fields list when editing the field calculation. To format the concatenation simply treat the concatenation as one field calculation.

    • con(C_FIRST_NAME,'/',C_ADDRESS1,'/',C_POSTAL_CODE).

    First name, address, and postal code information together on the same line and places a slash between each item. Formatting is limited to the group of fields linked together.

    • jst(con(MS_SECTION,', Row ',MS_ROW_NUMBER,', Seat ',MS_SEAT_NUMBER),'^38x').

    Centers section, row, and seat number in a space 38 characters wide. A comma and row precede the row number and separate it from the actual number. A comma and seat precede the seat number and separate it from the actual number.

    • jst(con(dtw(PB_PERFORM_DATE),', ',dtm(PB_PERFORM_DATE),dtd(PB_PERFORM_DATE),dtcy(PB_PERFORM_DATE),' Time: ', jst(PB_PERFORM_TIME,'T:h:N A')),'^50')

    Prints 'Saturday, December 21 1998 Time: 8:00 PM'. The printing would be centered in a 50 character space.

    len() Returns the length of the string, that is, number of characters.
    • len('abcd') returns '4'
    • len('abcd') + 15 returns '19'
    low() Returns the lower case representation of a string. Any non-alphabetic characters in the strings are unaffected by low().
    • low('tHeATre MANAGER') returns 'theatre manager'
    • low('1234') returns '1234'
    mid(string,position,length) Returns a substring of a specified length, starting at a specified position, from a larger string. If position is less than 1 it is taken as 1, that is the first character; if it is greater than the length of the string, an empty string is returned. If length is greater than the maximum length of any substring of string starting at position, then the returned substring will be the remainder of string starting at position..
    • mid('Theatre Manager',9,3) returns 'Man'
    • mid('Theatre Manager',9,24) returns 'Manager'
    pos(substring,string) Returns the position of a substring within a larger string. The substring must be contained within string in its entirety for the returned value to be non-zero.
    • pos(' ',J. Smith') returns 2 (the position of the space character)
    • pos('Mouse','Mickey Mouse') returns 8
    • pos('mouse','Mickey Mouse') returns 0 - note the case of the substring
    upp() Returns the upper case representation of a string. Any non-alphabetic characters in the strings are unaffected by low().
    • upp('tHeATre MANAGER') returns 'THEATRE MANAGER'
    • upp('1234') returns '1234'
    • upp(mid(dtw(PB_PERFORM_DATE),1,3)) returns 'MON'

    Date/Time Functions

    The date/time functions operate on a datestring to return date values or strings representing some part of a date/time. A datestring is a string recognizable as a date using a date format.

    String Description Example
    dat(datestring|number[,dateformat])

    Converts a datestring or number to a date value using a second optional argument, a dateformat string. The date formatting string can be composed of the following symbols:

    • Y Year 98 (no century)
    • y Year 1998 (with century)
    • C Century 19
    • m Month short form (JUN)
    • M Month number (06)
    • n Month long form (June)
    • D Day of month (12)
    • d Day of month (12th)
    • W Day of week (5)
    • w Day of week long form (Friday)
    • V Day of week short form (FRI)
    • E Day of year (between 1 and 366)
    • G Week of Year (between 1 and 52)
    • F Week of Month (between 1 and 6)
    • dat('Dec 21 11','MDY') returns '122111'
    • dat('Dec 21 11','D m Y') returns '21 DEC 11'
    • dat('Dec 21 11','w, d n, y') returns 'Wednesday, 21st December, 1911'
    • dat('Dec 21 98','V m D Y') returns 'WED DEC 21 98'
    dim(datestring,number)

    Increments a datestring by a number of months. Months containing different numbers of days are accounted for.

    Jan 31 96 increased by one month gives Feb 29 96, but beware, Feb 29 96 decreased by one month (using a negative number) returns Jan 29 96, not Jan 31 96.

    • dim(dat('Dec 21 98',3)) returns 'Mar 21 99'
    dtcy(datestring)

    Returns the year and century of a datestring as a string.

    • dtcy(dat('Dec 21 98')) returns '1998'
    dtd(datestring) Returns the day part of a datestring unless it is part of a calculation when it is returns as a number.
    • dtcy(dat('Dec 21 98')) returns '21st'
    • dtcy(dat('Dec 21 98')) + 0 returns '21'
    • dtcy(dat('Dec 21 98')) + 1 returns '22'
    dtm(datestring) Returns the month part of a datestring.
    • dtm(dat('Dec 21 98')) returns 'December'
    dtw(datestring) Returns the week part of a datestring.
    • dtw(dat('Dec 21 98')) returns 'Monday'
    • upp(mid(dtw(PB_PERFORM_DATE),1,3)) returns 'MON'
    dty(datestring) Returns the year part of a datestring.
    • dtcy(dat('Dec 21 98')) returns '98'
    >tim(timestring[,timeformat])

    Converts a timestring to a time value using a second optional argument, a timeformat string. The time formattinG string can be composed of the following symbols:

    • H Hour (between 0 and 23)
    • h Hour (between 1 and 12)
    • N Minutes
    • S Seconds
    • s Hundredths
    • A AM/PM
    • tim('13:25:57','h:N A')) returns '1:15 PM'
    • tim('13:25:57','h:N.S A')) returns '1:15.57 PM'

    Lookup Functions

    The lookup functions provide a method for selecting items from a list of values.

    String Description Example
    max(value1[,value2]...)

     Returns the maximum value from the list of values. The values should all be numbers when numeric comparison is used or all strings when string comparison is used.

    • max(3,6,2,7) returns '7'
    • max('dagger','dog','digger') returns 'dog'
    min(value1[,value2]...) Returns the minimum value from the list of values. The values should all be numbers when numeric comparison is used or all strings when string comparison is used.
    • min(3,6,2,7) returns '2'
    • min('dagger','dog','digger') returns 'dagger'
     pick(number,value0,value1,[value2]...)

    Selects an item from a list of string or numeric values. The number argument is rounded to an integer and used to select the item. value0 is returned if the result is 0, value1 if the result is 1, value2 if the result is 2, and so on. If the number is less than zero or greater than the number of values in the list, then an empty value is returned. The list of values can be a mixture of string and numeric values.

    • pick(2,'A','B','C','D') returns 'C'
    • pick(2>4,'A','B','C','D') returns 'A', as 2 is not greater than 4, thus it is False, where False equals 0.
    • pick(2<4,'A','B','C','D') returns 'B', as 2 is less than 4, thus it is True, where True equals 1.
    • pick(pos('A','DEF')>0,'Price Not Found','Price Found') returns 'Price Not Found'
    • pick(pos('A','ABC'),'Price Not Found','Price A','Price B','Price C') returns 'Price A'

    Number Functions

    String Description Example
    abs(number)

    Returns the magnitude of a real number ignoring its positive or negative sign.

    • abs(1002) returns '1002'
    • abs('-203.45') returns '203.45'
    • abs('12ABC') returns '0'
    int(number)

     Returns the integer part of a number; it does not round to the nearest integer.

    • int(23.1056) returns '23'
    • int('-2.66') returns '-2'
    • abs(int('-2.66')) returns '2'
    mod(number1,number2) Returns the remainder of a number division, that is, when number1 is divided by number1 to produce a remainder; it is a true modulus function.
    • mod(6,4) returns '2'
    • mod(6,4) returns '2'
    • mod(9,1.5) returns '0'
    rnd(number,dp) 

    Rounds a number to a specified number of decimal places by dp .

    • rnd(2.105693,2) returns '2.11'
    • rnd(0.5,0) returns '1'

    Labels

    Entering a label, or string of characters that will be the same on every ticket, is accomplished by placing the label in single quotes.

    Constants Tab

    You use constants to add to ticket face equations. Constants replace long lines of equation that need to be repeated or in conjunction with pick statements. A pick statement may read if the constant is not met to print one thing on the ticket but if the constant is met to print something completely different. Constants allow for more editing options and can be used as many times as is needed in the ticket face.

    Parts of the Constants Tab

    Constant #1 First constant equation.
    Constant #2 Second constant equation.
    Constant #3 Third constant equation.
    Constant #4 Fourth constant equation.
    Opens the constant equation window. For more information on creating constants click here.
    Print Ticket Depending on Value of Constant #4 If the value of constant #4 equals zero the ticket face will not print.

    Ticket Face Constants

    You use constants to add to ticket face equations. Constants replace long lines of equation that need to be repeated or in conjunction with pick statements. A pick statement may read if the constant is not met to print one thing on the ticket but if the constant is met to print something completely different. Constants allow for more editing options and can be used as many times as is needed in the ticket face.

    An example of a constant value is:

    • CON(PATRON_FIRST_NAME,' ',PATRON_LAST_NAME).
    • This statement says:

    • Print the patron's first name, a space and the patron's last name.

    Rather then having to type this information several times, CONSTANT1 can be typed to generate the patron's name. A more complicated constant may be used within the ticket face when something other then the regular ticket information is to be printer.

    In addition to acting as a constant, line #4 can be set to require a value equaling something other then zero. If the value of the equation is zero, a ticket will not print. This feature can be used when a ticket is not required if a patron meets specified conditions.

    Adding a Constant

    1. Open the Ticket Face List window.

      Click here to learn how to access this window.

    2. Select the ticket face you are adding a constant to.

      Single click on a ticket face to select it.

    3. Click the Open button.
    4. Click the Constants tab.

    5. Click the Lookup button.

      The Constants Detail window will open.

    6. Enter the Constant equation.

      To enter information under 'Calculation', click on 'Category' drop-down list. Once you have selected an option, click the 'Available Fields' drop-down list.

      This pop-up menu has two columns.

      The left column is the fields to be entered and the right column is the sample information. Select a field (for example - company name). The information that appears in the field calculation (D_COMPANY) instructs the printer to put the company name (found in Company Preferences) in this location on the ticket.

      You can type this information into the field calculation, however, if all event data is typed onto the ticket face, this prevents the tickets from being able to be used for other events. Click here for more information on Calculations.

    7. Click the Save button.

      The Constant has now been added to the ticket face and can be used in conjunction with other equations.

    Options Tab

    Parts of the Options Tab

    Print to Port

    Printer #1 Option 1 for ticket printing. Select this option if the ticket printer is connected to this port.
    Printer #2 Option 2 for ticket printing. Select this option if the ticket printer is connected to this port.

    Dual Path Printer

    Ticket Printer Path #1 Port 1 on the ticket printer. Select this option if the ticket should print to this port.
    Ticket Printer Path #2 Port 2 on the ticket printer. Select this option if the ticket should print to this port.
    PCX Logo File File name of the logo to be printed on the ticket
    Search button to locate the logo file.
    Opens the logo in it's designated program for viewing.
    Opens the folder the logo resides in.

    Creating a Ticket Face

    1. Open the Ticket Face List window.

      Click here to learn how to access the Ticket Face List window.

    2. Click the New button.

      An empty Ticket Face Detail window will open.

    3. Enter the name for the ticket face in the description field.
    4. Click the Save button.
    5. Click the Add button.

      The Ticket Face Detail window will open.

      For more information on the Ticket Face Detail window click here.

    6. Enter a Calculation.

      To enter information under 'Calculation', click on 'Category' drop-down list. Select an option and click the 'Available Fields' drop-down. The left column of this pop-up contains the fields to be entered and the right column shows sample information. Select a field (for example, company name). The information that appears in the field calculation (D_COMPANY) instructs the printer to put the company name (found in Company Preferences) in this location on the ticket.

      You can type information directly into the field calculation, however, if all event data is typed onto the ticket face, it can not be used for other events.Click here for more information on Calculations.

    7. Click the Save button.

      The equation is added to the ticket face.

    8. Click the Constants tab.
    9. Enter constants as needed.

      For more information on adding constants click here.

    10. Click the Options tab.
    11. Select the default printer settings for this ticket face.

      For more information on the Options tab click here.

    12. Click the Ticket Face Code tab.
    13. Click the Save button.

      The changes to the ticket face have now been saved. Click the Test Ticket button to preview the ticket.

    Editing Ticket Faces

    1. Open the Ticket Face List window.

      Click here to learn how to access the Ticket Face List window

    2. Select the search option.

      Choose from the drop down the most effective search option.

    3. Enter the From and To range.

    4. Click the Search button.

      A list of ticket faces meeting the search criteria will appear.

    5. Select the ticket face to make changes to.

      Single click on a ticket face to select it.

    6. Click the Open button.

      The Ticket Face Detail window will open.

    7. Make changes to the ticket face as needed.

      For more information on editing lines in a ticket face click here.

    8. Click the Save button.

      The changes to the ticket face have now been saved. Use the Revert to undo changes to the last saved point.

    Formatting Ticket Faces

    When you are formatting ticket faces, you need to think in Rows and Columns.

    Row

    The number of rows on a ticket face is dependent on the resolution of the ticket printer in dots per inch (DPI). The total number of rows is equal to the total number of dots that could be printed in the height of the ticket. To calculate the total number of rows available, multiply the DPI of the ticket printer, times the height of the ticket. For example:

    • If a printer has 200 DPI resolution, it prints 200 dots per inch. A two inch high ticket will have 400 dots or rows.

      By entering 300 into the row perimeter, you instruct the printer to start printing the information at the 300th dot, or 1.5 inches from the top of the ticket.

    • If the printer is 100 DPI there are 200 dots in the height.

      By entering 150 in the row perimeter, you instruct the printer to start printing the information at the 150th dot or 1.5 inches from the top of the ticket.

    The best way to determine the effect of changing row placements is to print tickets changing the row parameter. To edit the row parameter you perform the following steps:

    1. Double click on a line to open up the Ticket Face Detail window.

    2. Change the row parameter.
    3. Click the Save button.

      The changes have now been accepted for this line.

    4. Click the Test Ticket button.

      A sample ticket will print for review.

    Column

    The number of columns is also dependent on the resolution of the ticket printer in dots per inch (DPI). The total number of columns is equal to the total number of dots that could be printed in the width of the ticket. To calculate the total number of columns available multiply the DPI of the ticket printer times the width of the ticket.

    • If the printer has 200 DPI resolution, it prints 200 dots per inch. A 5 inch wide ticket will have 1000 dots or columns.

      By entering 300 into the column parameter, you instruct the printer to start printing the information 1.5 inches from the left edge of the ticket.

    • If the printer is 100 DPI there are 500 dots in the width.

      By entering 150 in the column parameter you instruct the printer to start printing the information 1.5 inches from the left edge of the ticket.

    The best way to determine the effect of changing column placements is to print tickets changing the column parameter.

    1. Double click on a line to open up the Ticket Face Detail window.

    2. Change the column parameter.
    3. Click the Save button.

      Any changes you make are accepteed for the ticket line.

    4. Click the Test Ticket button.

      A sample ticket will print from review.

    Height

    Height allows you to customize the font height. For example, if the font selected is (5 x 7) and the height set at 2, the size of the font will change. The height of the font will be multiplied by 2 and print at 14 instead of 7.

    Width

    Width allows you to customize the font width. For example, if the font selected is (5 x 7) and the width set at 2, the size of the font will change. The width of the font will be multiplied by 2 and print at 10 instead of 5.

    Rotation

    Rotation allows you to print information both horizontally and vertically on the ticket.

    NR (No Rotation) means no rotation and information is printed horizontally.

    RL (Rotate 90+) means rotate left and print top to bottom.

    RR (Rotate 90-) means rotate right and print bottom to top.

    RU (Rotate 180) means print upside down.

    Font

    The fonts you can use are dependent on those available in the printer.

    The number bracketed after each font refers to the number of dots in each character. A (5 x 7) font means that the font will print each character 5 dots wide and 7 dots high.

    Calculation

    There are two ways to enter information into the field calculation area of a ticket. You can type the information directly into the field calculation area or select from available fields. Both methods will be used to build a ticket. Available fields are divided into several groups.

    Default Data Enables the placement of information about the company contained in the Company Preferences setup. For example, the company name, address, and telephone numbers.
    Theatre Information Enables the placement of information about the Theatre Map associated with the play. For example, the theatre name, address, and the section/row/seat names.
    Play Information Enables the placement of information about the Plays and Dates associated with the ticket. For example, the play title, play date and time, and play sponsor.
    Ticket Information Enables the placement of information about the ticket sold to the patron. For example, the price paid, price discounts, and the ticket serial number. The ticket serial number is a unique number generated by Theatre Manager for each ticket.
    Member Data Enables the placement of information about the membership sold to the patron. For example, purchase date, expiry date, member type, and the control number. The control number is a unique number generated by Theatre Manager for each membership used for tracking purposes.
    Order Information Enables the placement of information about the order created when the ticket was sold to the patron. For example, the order date and total order dollar amount outstanding.
    Payment Information Enables the placement of information about the payment made by the patron. For example, payment type, total payment value, and the credit card number.
    Patron Information Enables the placement of information about the patron. For example, the patron name, address, and telephone numbers.
    Donation Information Enables the placement of information about the donation made by the patron. For example, the campaign, donation date, and the total donation amount outstanding.
    Donation Receipt Data Enables the placement of information about the donation receipt as it pertains to donation of a patron. For example, the receipt number, date the receipt was issued and the value of the receipt.
    Miscellaneous Information Enables the placement of printer created information. For example, drawing boxes, drawing lines, and printing the internal ticket printing counter. The internal ticket printer number is a number generated by the printer every time a ticket is printed. If the same ticket is printed 4 times, each ticket will have an unique number.

    Adding Accented Letters to a Ticket Face

    In some instances, a Play or Event title or other piece of information you need to print on a ticket face, includes an accented letter. The following instructions will allow you to make that edit.

    To print accented letters you are limited to using Font F13. This means for any field that has an accented letter within it, the line must use font F13 (other lines of coding can be any other font you wish). This is the only available font within the default language for the ticket printer that uses the extended ASCII character set.

    1. Chose Setup > Ticket Faces to open the Ticket Face List Window.

      For more information on the click here.

    2. Select the ticket face to edit from the list.

      For information about editing ticket faces, click here.

    3. Double-click the line of ticket face code to edit to include the accented text.

      This opens the Ticket Face Detail window for that line of code.

      For information about formatting ticket faces, click here.

    4. Select Font F13 from the Font Drop Down Menu. .

      Selection of any font, other than F13, will print "?" for the character. Any other fonts available do not reference the extended ASCII character set.

    5. You must enter the extended ASCII character within the field to print, as a WIN character instead of a DOS character. You achieve this by holding down the key while typing "0" then the decimal number on the keyboard keypad. (The decimal number must be preceded by a leading zero). For example:

      For an è hold down ALT and type 0138

      For an à hold down ALT and type 0133

      For an É hold down ALT and type 0144

      For an å hold down ALT and type 0134

    6. On the screen (we'll use è as an example) the character appears as the WIN representation , a funny looking "S", but when you print the ticket, it will print out as the DOS ASCII character of è .
    7. You will end up with a line that looks like this:
    8. Following is a table of DOS vs WIN characters:

    Importing Ticket Faces

    To import existing ticket faces, you would perform the following steps:

    1. Open the Ticket Faces List window

      Click here to learn how to access this window.

      Click here for a detailed description of this window and it's functions.

    2. Click the Import button.

      The Import Ticket Face Window opens.

    3. Browse to the location the file is located and selected it.

      Ticket faces with a .tmf file extention can be imported into Theatre Manager.

    4. Click the Open button.

      The selected ticket face is imported. It can now be selected from the Ticket Face List window and edited. For more information on editing ticket faces click here.

    Exporting Ticket Faces

    1. Open the Ticket Faces List window.

      Click here to learn how to access this window.

      Click here for a detailed description of this window and it's functions.

    2. Select the ticket face to be exported.

      Single click on a ticket face to select it.

    3. Click the Export button.

      The Export Ticket Face Window opens.

    4. Browse to the location to save the file.
    5. Give the file a unique name the file.
    6. Click the Save button.

      The ticket face will be exported as a .tmf file to the specified location.

    Deleting a Ticket Face

    CAUTION:Once a ticket face has been deleted, it is gone. If a particular ticket face is not useful at present, you can mark it inactive by removing the check from the Active box on the Ticket Face Detail Window for that ticket face.

    To delete a ticket face, you perform the following steps:

    1. Open the Ticket Faces List window.

      Click here to learn how to access this window.

      Click here for a detailed description of this window and it's functions.

    2. Select the ticket face to delete.

      Single click on a ticket to select it.

    3. Click the Delete button.

      The delete confirmation dialog opens.

    4. Click the Delete button.

      The ticket face is removed from Theatre Manager.

    Accented Characters and Ticket Faces

    Tickets, whether they are being printed to a Practical Automation, BOCA, Datamax or other printer, utilize a programming language known as FGL (Friendly Ghost Language).

    FGL will print accented characters, however, it will only print in Font F13. Since Font F13 is impractical for text usage on an entire ticket face, and to allow clients to use the entire range of fonts provided by Practical Automation/BOCA printers, Theatre Manager strips accents before it sends the ticket data to the ticket printer.

    In order to have accented characters appear on a ticket face, you will need to HARD CODE the accent onto the ticket face. For Example, to have Théatre appear on a ticket face,

  14. Start by creating a new ticket face, or a duplicate of an exiting ticket face. This will allow you to continue using the original ticket face for your events that do not require any accented characters. For more information on designing ticket faces, please click here.
  15. Make a line that says "Theatre" on the ticket face.
  16. And a second line that says "`" (that's an accent).
  17. Place the accent appropriately on the face so it appears over the e.
  18. This will work for hard coded words, but not for database generated fields such as names.

    So while Theatre Manager can print the accented é to a regular printer (for reports and such), it will not print to a ticket printer because of the print language used by the printer.

    For Macintosh alternate keys (for non-ticket printing usage) click here.

    For PC alternate keys (for non-ticket printing usage) click here.

    Mail Lists Setup

    Although Mail Lists does technically fall under System Setup, the category itself is so big and so often used by clients, it has it's own place in Theatre Manager's Online Help. Click here to access Mail Lists help.

    System Tables

    Many setup items fall under the System Tables category. Most of the customizable or drop-down fields that must be populated in Theatre Manager fall under System Tables. Please find links to all of these items below.

    Code Tables

    Code Tables are used to control the values selected in user defined fields. The values entered for each Code Table category appear in a Drop Down, Pop Up field, or Calculated fields. You can add new values to the Code Tables, when nessesary, and you create as many values for the Code Tables your company requires.

    You access the Code Tables through the Setup >> System Tables >> Code Tables Menu.

    Inserting Values

    To insert a value into an existing code table, you perform the following steps:

    1. In the left column of the Code Tables Data window, highlight the table you want to insert a new value.
    2. Click the New button in the Code Tables Data window ribbon bar.

      The Code entry dialog opens.

    3. Enter the new code.
    4. Set the status of the new code.

      When inserting, the default is always "Active".

    5. Click the Save button.

      The new code is now saved and added to the code table.

    Editing Values in a Code Table

    You can edit the value of a entry in a code table but by changing it you will be changing all records which used the previous value.

    1. Double Click the value you would like to edit.

    2. Change the value as needed and click the Save button.

      The value will be changed in the code table and on all records which contained that value.

    Changing Value Status

    Changing the status of a code table value is a good way to remove a value from use temporarily.

    To change the status of a Code Table value, you perform the following steps:
    1. Select the Code Table and Table Etrey value you would like to change the status of.

    2. Click either the Activate or Inactivate Buttons depending on which status you would like to change the value of.

    Setting or Removing a Default Value

    Some code tables allow setting up a default value to be used when inserting a new record into Theatre Manager. For example, if the salutation code table had a default value of "Mr. and Mrs." This feature reduces the amount of time it takes to input information into Theatre Manager. Values that do not change each time a new record is inserted can be predefined.

    Setting a Default

    1. Select the value from the appropriate code table.

      Single click the value to highlight it.

    2. Click the Set Default button.

      A bullet should now appear beside the value, signifing the default code table value.

    Removing a Default

    1. Select the default value from the appropriate code table

      Single clicking the value to highlight it. This will be the value that is marked by the bullet.

    2. Click the Remove Default Button

      The default should now be removed. If the bullet has disappeared the process was successful. There is no longer a default value.

    Merging Code Table Values

    Merging Code Table Values can take some time as it depends on how many values you are merging and the number of times they have been merged. Make a backup of your database before you perform a merge on code table data. Click Here to learn how.

    1. Select the values that you would like to merge.

    2. Click the Merge button.

      The Duplicate Search Options Window will open.

    3. Select the value you would like to merge all data into then click Merge

      A Warning Window will open asking you to confirm the merge.

    4. Click Yes to continue with the merge.

    Deleting Values

    To determine if you can delete data from a code table, check the Delete Button. If the button is inaccessable (greyed out) no data can be removed from the table. Once a code has been assigned to a record it cannot be deleted. If you want to prevent further use of an value, and you can not delete it, disable it. Click here for more information in changing the status of a vaule.

    1. Choose the code value to be deleted

      Do this by single clicking the value.

    2. Click the Delete button.

      The Delete a Record confirmation dialog opens.

    3. Click the Delete button to complete the deletion

      The Value is now be deleted and has been removed from the table.

    Reloading Table Values

    When you launch Theatre Manager, the current values from the Code Tables are loaded into memory. Adding new values or editing existing values does not reload the values stored in memory for other employees currently logged onto Theatre Manager. To see any changes made, all users need to re-launch Theatre Manager to see all changes made by other users updated in memory.

    To reload all the changes made to the code tables, you need to perform the following steps:

    1. Close Theatre Manager.
    2. Start Theatre Manager.

      Any changes made to the code tables will be visible and available.

    Code Table Options

    The pages that follow provide specific details about the various options available inside Code Tables.

    Country

    The Countries found in the code table list are those that appear in the Country drop down list in the Patron window, Default Data, Maps, Web Sales, and other places using the Country drop down list throughout Theatre Manager.

    You can shorten the list by setting countries to inactivate, or if a country is not a 'System' country, it can be deleted from the code table. If a country is not in the Code Table, it can be added.

    For 'system' countries Theatre Manager has built in controls for phone numbers, postal codes, and more. Currently these are:

    • Canada
    • USA
    • Australia
    • New Zealand
    • Depending on the region, a default can be set. For more information on setting a Country default in the Company Defaults, click here.

      For more information on how to access the Country table click here.

      For information about editing values in Code Tables, click here.

    Course Attendance Reasons

    Course Attendance Reasons must be setup in Setup > >System Tables >> Code Tables before they can be used in Courses.

    For information about editing values in Code Tables, click here.

    To see where and how Course Attendance Reason is used in Courses, click here.

    Course Level

    Course Levels must be set up in Setup> > System Tables >>Code Tables before they can be used in Courses and Report Cards.

    For information about editing values in Code Tables, click here.

    Course Report Card Categories

    Report Card Categories also have to be setup before Report Cards can be used. Go to Setup>>System Tables>>Code Tables to find Report Card Categories and assign values to it.

    For information about editing values in Code Tables, click here.

    Course Report Card Ratings

    Just like Categories, Report Card Ratings have to be defined in Code Tables before they can be used. Go to Setup>>System Tables>>Code Tables to find Report Card Ratings and assign values to it.

    For instructions on assigning values to Code Tables, click here.

    Default Posting Accounts

    Specific general ledger asset and income accounts are required to be defined prior to Creating Sales Entries and performing Deposits.

    Refer to the section General Ledger Accounts to create the account information. Click here for more information.

    For information about editing values in Code Tables, click here.

    Because these code table values are defaulted, you may not insert a new default account or delete an existing account, however, you can edit an existing account. The result values are the types of default accounts that must be set up in Theatre Manager.

    You must assign a General Ledger Account number to each of the defaulted values. The general ledger accounts you use must be created to carry out the sole purpose of the default value.

    For example: Once you have an accounts receivable account, that account will only be used as an accounts receivable account.

    Editing a Default Account

    The default accounts should not need to be edited or changed very often. There may be times which you need to.

    For example: When upgrading Theatre Manager, sometimes new default accounts are added, or you may desire to change the account numbers on a yearly basis. Before editing a default account ensure that there is a general ledger account number that is set up.

    Refer to Creating General Ledger Accounts for more information.

    1. Double click on the account to be edited.

      The Entry of Account Description Window opens.

    2. Enter the G/L account number.

      If you do not already have a general ledger account number setup in G/L accounts do so now. Entering a G/L Account number here, will assign a general ledger account to the default account in code tables.

      For example: The default account "Exchange Fees" is assigned the G/L Account # 4 - 2000 - 200. Therefore all revenue generated from exchange fees will be posted to that account number.
    3. Enter an account purpose (or description).

      This field should be already filled in. You may change the name if you like, but it is not recommended.

    4. Click Save

      The changes have now been saved.

    Donor Giving Capacity

    The Donor Giving Capacity values are displayed on the Donor Tab on the Patron Window. Click here for more information on the Donor Tab.

    For information about editing values in Code Tables, click here.

    Donor Moves Management

    The Code Table Moves Management is used to track interactions with Donors and Potential Donors. Moves Management can be used to track Patrons as relationships are built, donations given and contributions increase. Click here for more information on the Donor Tab.

    For information about editing values in Code Tables, click here.

    Donor#1

    The Donor 1,2,3 pop-up code tables represent the values under the Notes Tab of Donation Details.

    These fields can be made manditory fields through the Mandatory Data Tab in Company Preferences. You can also change their names in the Appearance Tab of Company Preferences. This way you to customize Theatre Manager to your venue's requirements.

    For information about editing values in Code Tables, click here.

    Donor#2

    The Donor 1,2,3 pop-up code tables represent the values under the Notes Tab of Donation Details.

    These fields can be made manditory fields through the Mandatory Data Tab in Company Preferences. You can also change their names in the Appearance Tab of Company Preferences. This way you to customize Theatre Manager to your venue's requirements.

    For information about editing values in Code Tables, click here.

    Donor#3

    The Donor 1,2,3 pop-up code tables represent the values under the Notes Tab of Donation Details. They can also be made manditory fields through the Mandatory Data Tab in Company Preferences and their names can be changed in the Appearance Tab of Company Preferences. This allows you to customize Theatre Manager to your venue's requirements.

    For information about editing values in Code Tables, click here.

    Facility Calendar Types

    Calendar Types are set in new Tasks as they are inserted into the Calendar in Facility Managment. There are "permanent" system Calendar Types built into Theatre Manager.

    For information about editing values in Code Tables, click here.

    Facility Pricing Levels

    More information coming.

    For information about editing values in Code Tables, click here.

    Facility Project Types

    More information coming.

    For information about editing values in Code Tables, click here.

    Facility Resource Groups

    Resource Groups are categories for different types of Resources in Theatre Manager's Facility Management module.

    For more information about Resources, click here. The default setting in Theatre Manager is the Generic group. Other groups can be added as needed.

    For information about editing values in Code Tables, click here.

    Facility Task Types

    The Facility Task Types are those that appear in the Task Information Window, Task Type drop down.

    For information about editing values in Code Tables, click here.

    Letter Folder Names

    The Code Table Letter Folder Name is used to categorize and organize Folders within Theatre Manager. These Folders can be found when saving Form Letters.

    For information about editing values in Code Tables, click here.

    Letter Types

    Letter types are displayed in the Form Letters Window accessable through the Letters Tab.

    Types allow you classify the types of letters that can be created and sent to patrons

    For information about editing values in Code Tables, click here.

    Media Types

    The Media Types are used to maintain the type of press for members of the media.

    Click Here to view the help on Media Management.

    For information about editing values in Code Tables, click here.

    Mktg Field #6

    The Marketing Code Table values are displayed in the Marketing Tab on the Patron Window. They can also be made manditory fields through the Mandatory Data Tab and their names can be changed in the Appearance Tab of Company Preferences. This allows you to customize Theatre Manager to your own venue's requirements.

    For information about editing values in Code Tables, click here.

    Mktg Field #7

    The Marketing Code Table values are displayed in the Marketing Tab on the Patron Window. They can also be made manditory fields through the Mandatory Data Tab and their names can be changed in the Appearance Tab of Company Preferences. This allows you to customize Theatre Manager to your own venue's requirements.

    For information about editing values in Code Tables, click here.

    Mktg Field #8

    The Marketing Code Table values are displayed in the Marketing Tab on the Patron Window. They can also be made manditory fields through the Mandatory Data Tab and their names can be changed in the Appearance Tab of Company Preferences. This allows you to customize Theatre Manager to your own venue's requirements.

    For information about editing values in Code Tables, click here.

    Order Reasons to Buy

    The Reasons to Buy code table is used to maintain what made the patron purchase tickets. This code table is used on the payment window. This can be used for determining the effectiveness of the marketing tools your company is using. It is recommended that this code table be very specific in listing all possible reasons for why patrons buy tickets.

    For information about editing values in Code Tables, click here.

    Pass/G.C. - Member Card Status

    The member card status codes are displayed on the Member Card Window. They are used as a reference as to the status of the card.

    Click here for more information on the Member Card window.

    For information about editing values in Code Tables, click here.

    Patron Age Codes

    The Code Table Age Codes is used to categorize personnel and/or volunteers into particular age ranges. If the age is unknown, then an age code Unknown may be useful. Age codes could also be specific birth years if required.

    For information about editing values in Code Tables, click here.

    Patron Location

    The Code Table Patron Location is used to categorize phone numbers, addresses, e-mail adresses and internet options into particular locations. These fields can be found through out patron data.

    For information about editing values in Code Tables, click here.

    Patron Name Suffixes

    Name Suffixes are chosen from the Patron Window. These can be included when sending letters to patrons.

    For information about editing values in Code Tables, click here.

    Patron Relationships

    The Relationship code table contains a list of types of relationships between patrons that you wish to track at your venue. The list below shows some examples of relationships.

    Each entry in the code table contains two pairs of phrases to represent the terminology for both sides of the relationship. Using the example of Parent/Child, one patron would be the 'Parent' of the second patron. Viewing the same relationship from the second patron, you would see that they are the 'Child' for the first patron. Using the terminology pairs allows you to easily distinguish more about the relationship.

    For information about editing values in Code Tables, click here.

    Patron Salutations

    The Patron Salutations code table is used to maintain the salutations on the patron and employee windows.

    For information about editing values in Code Tables, click here.

    Setting Patron Salutation As Mandatory On Patron Insert

    To make the salutation a mandatory field whenever a new patron record is created:
    1. Go to Setup >> System Tables >> Code Tables.
    2. Scroll to Patron Salutation.

      A blank salutation is set as a default by Theatre Manager. The default value in a code table is marked with a dot to the left of the entry.

    3. Highlight that blank salutation and click the Remove Default button.

      This removes the blank default salutation.

    4. Remove the blank salutation using the Delete button.

      If it has been used in a patron record, you will ot be able to remove it. Mark it inactive.

    5. To mark a value inactive, follow instructions found here.

    Patron Type

    The Code Table Patron Type is used to sort patrons records into categories. This information is used for Patron Records.

    For information about editing values in Code Tables, click here.

    Payment Methods

    The Payment Methods Code Table is used for setting up various forms of payment types. Such as credit cards, cash, debit, cheque, other, etc. The result value is the full description of the payment type. The lookup value is the abbreviated form that is found throughout Theatre Manager. The account column displays the GL accounts that revenue for a particular membership is sent to. The description column describes the GL account.

    The result values of American Express, Diners Card, MasterCard, Discover Card, and Visa Card should be associated with the corresponding lookup values of AMEX, DINER, MCARD, DISCR, and VISA. This will ensure that Theatre Manager validates for the required number of numbers, and have the correct numeric algorithm. An error message is displayed if the numbers are not entered correctly, as this will assist in payments entered incorrectly. If the lookup values for these card types are changed, this verification does not occur. Other card types do not have automated edits.

    For information on how to access the payment method table click here.

    For information about editing values in Code Tables, click here.

    Inserting a New Payment Type

    Inserting a New Payment Type is used to add options to the Payment Methods category.

    1. Create a general ledger account number.

      Entering a new payment type in Code Tables requires entering a General Ledger Account number for the card type in the Chart of Accounts.

    2. Open Code Tables.

      Click Here to learn how to access the Code Tables Window.

    3. Click on Payment Method.

      As seen at top of page.

    4. Click the New button.

      The Payment Methods Insert Window will open.

    5. Enter the payment code.

      This is the short form of the payment description. This text appears as the code table lookup value.

    6. Enter the payment description.

      This is the full description of the type of payment that you are creating. This text appears as the code table result value.

    7. Enter the GL account number.

      This is the GL number that you created in step one. Type in the full 8 digit account number or use the drop down list on the right side of this field to manually select the account number.

    8. Select the payment type.

      Click on the radio button that best describes the type of payment method you are inserting. If you have selected card then continue at step 10. If you selected Other then continue at step 12.

    9. Select mandatory fields.

      If a customer is paying via credit card, you must decide which credit card fields must be entered before payment can be accepted. The fields you may make mandatory are credit card number, credit card expiry date, credit card authorization number, and process card via credit card server. The last selection is available using Theatre Manager's Credit Card Authorization. Selecting yes for any of these fields makes them mandatory fields. Go to step 11.

    10. Select the Merchant Charges tab.

      For Credit Card processing a Merchant #, Service Charge G/L Account Number and Percent of Dollar Value or Dollar Charge Per Transaction are required.

    11. Click the Save button.

      The new payment type has now been created and is ready for use.

    Deleting a Payment Type

    If a payment type has been used, it cannot be deleted.

    If you wish to discontinue a payment type, disable it. Click Here to learn how.

    To delete an unused payment type:

    1. Select the payment type that will be deleted.
    2. Click the Delete button.
    3. The Delete a Record warning opens.

    4. Click the Delete button.

      The payment type is now deleted. Clicking the Cancel button will abort the deletion.

    Perf Type

    More information to come.

    For information about editing values in code tables, click here.

    Performance Field #1

    Whatever your organization decides to use for Performance Field #1, the value options in the drop-down must be set in Setup > System Tables > Code Tables before the Field can be used for Courses. In the example, the Field has been renamed "Course Type".

    In your code tables, you'll have to look for the name you assign to the field in order to edit the values.

    For information about editing values in code tables, click here. For a detailed description of how to use Performance Fiels #1 in Courses Click here.

    Play / Event Genre

    Genre is a setting for events that is common across all Theatre Manager customers. Currently, there are about 30 classifications which will be used in the iPhone/iPad app to help customers find entertainment to their liking.

    For Example: Customers can look for drama, hockey games, musicals, symphonies, ballet, etc.

    Specifying a genre for an event is required.

    You will need to update the genre setting for each future event on the Events and Dates Marketing tab to help users search for specific types of events in their interest area.

    Click here for more information on the Events and Dates Marketing tab.

    For information about editing values in Code Tables, click here.

    Promotion Sales Groups

    Sales Promotions are able to be grouped into letter codes to help make them easier to read on a report. By assigning a letter to a group of Sales Promotions, you can categorize them in a report by their similarities. For example, you can use the letter 'S' to indicate all the Season Sales Promotions (Early Bird, Season, Flex Season) into one category. Then when running reports, you can run them based on Report Subtotal Group 'S', rather than selecting the promotions one by one. In addition, when running full reports on an event, you can subtotal all your

    A - Single Ticket Sales (regular, 2 for 1, General Admission).

    D - Special Benefit Promotions (Dinner, Opening Gala, Development Events).

    G - Group Tickets (Senior homes, Brownies).

    M - Media Tickets (Critics, Editors).

    S - Season Tickets (Earlybird, Season).

    Z - Comp Tickets (Listed with a 'Z' so they appear last in reports)

    Or any categorization you choose.

    You can set names for these categories so they are more meaningful to your organization in the Code Table setup for Promotion Sales Group.

    For information about editing values in code tables, click here.

    Province/State Code

    The Province/State Code Table is a list of Provinces and States in North America and recognized American states throughout the world. This list is primarily used for Web Sales.

    The name Province can be changed to State (and vice versa) in the Appearance tab of Company Preferences. For more information on changing the title click here. Altering the Sort Value allows you to determine whether Provinces or States appear at the top of the list. They are assigned to Groups which sorted alphabetically. Each Province/State is then sorted numerically within the group.

    For example, Provinces might be in Group 'A', and States in group 'B'. Within the Group, you would assign the Provinces A01, A02, A03, etc. The States would be given Sort Values of B01, B02, B03, etc. Since A comes before B, the Provinces would come above the States in the list. American users would do the opposite.

    Depending on the region a default can be set. For more information on setting a Province or State as default click here.

    For information about editing values in Code Tables, click here.

    Subscription Date Change

    The values from this table are displayed on the Season Subscription Detail Window. They reflect if a patron changed the date which they were attending plays for their subscription. They also allow for better marketing records to be kept and provide another value which can be used in reports and form letters.

    For information about editing values in Code Tables, click here.

    Subscription Location Change

    The values from this table are displayed on the Season Subscription Detail Window. When the patron is renewing, you can record if they changed their season seats and where in the theatre they moved to.

    This means better marketing records can be kept and provide another value which can be used in reports and form letters.

    For information about editing values in Code Tables, click here.

    Subscription Renewal Status

    The values from this table are displayed on the Season Subscription Detail Window. They allow for better marketing records to be kept and provide another value which can be used in reports and form letters.

    For information about editing values in Code Tables, click here.

    Transaction Source

    Allows for reporting on the appropriate sales source.

    For information about editing values in Code Tables, click here.

    Transaction Types

    The Transaction Types Code Table is a system table and cannot be changed. The values found here are a list of all the possible types of transactions that can be created and found in Theatre Manager. The result value is the actual transaction name, while the lookup value is a short form that is usually found on transaction reports, or inside the patron transaction tab. If you come across a transaction lookup value that you don't recognize, visit this code table to find its definition.

    For information about editing values in Code Tables, click here.

    Traveling Troupe

    The Traveling Troupe code table affects the traveling troupe buy window. The result values are listed on the troupe buy window in the order you would like them to be displayed (Lookup Value). The Result values are important "times" for the traveling troupe. A call time is assigned to each value in the buy window. This is so a troupe manager can print a daily report of the troupes activities for the members of its troupe.

    For information about editing values in Code Tables, click here.

    Units of Measure

    This is a listing of the various units of measure recognized by the program. They are "permanent" system values built into Theatre Manager and cannot be edited or amended.

    For information about editing values in Code Tables, click here.

    Volunteer Activity

    The types of activities your organization's volunteers engage in can be set up, assigned and tracked inside Theatre Manager. This page shows you how to set up those activity types. For more information on volunteer management inside Theatre Manager click here.

    Click here, for more information on setting up Volunteer Activities.

    Adding Volunteer Activities

    To set up volunteer activities, you perform the following steps:

    1. Go to Setup >> System Tables >> Code Tables and scroll down to select Volunteer Activity.

    2. Click the New button to open the Volunteer Activity Insert window.

    3. Give the new activity a specific name so anyone will be able to decipher its purpose.
    4. Enter the number of hours before and after the event / play when this activity is expected to be there.
    5. Enter the number of hours the volunteer will be credited for this activity.
    6. If you want this activity to have special colouring on the calendar, select a color other than black.
    7. On the Duties tab, enter any default duties for this position.
    8. On the Status tab, mark the activity Active by checking the Active box.
    9. On the Status tab, select the areas you'd like this volunteer activity to be available for (Box Office, Development, and/or via the Internet) by checking the appropriate box or boxes.

    10. On the Security tab, change any security settings for this activity.

    11. If you have the Facility Management module, on the Facility tab, enter the Default billing rate, Default hourly cost, Sales Tax Code, Income Account, Cost Account, and Liability Account for the activity.

      To see current billing rates for anyone already associated with this activity, click the Review Rates button. The same window will pop up if you change the default billing rate, giving you an opportunity to change or leave alone the billing rate for anyone associated with the activity.

    12. Click the Save button to add it to the list of Volunteer Activities.

    Volunteer Awards

    Personalizing your volunteer recognition component of your program is the best form of showing appreciation for the contribution of volunteers. In this code table, you add the details for your awards.

    For information about editing values in Code Tables, click here.

    Volunteer Custom Field 1

    The Custom Volunteer Field 1 field can be customized to suit client needs. The field can be renamed and drop down options edited to reflect client needs. This drop down field is found in Patron Records and Personnel Management.

    For information about editing values in Code Tables, click here.

    Volunteer Custom Field 2

    The Custom Volunteer Field 2 field can be customized to suit client needs. The field can be renamed and drop down options edited to reflect client needs. This drop down field is found in Patron Records and Personnel Management.

    For information about editing values in Code Tables, click here.

    Volunteer Custom Field 3

    The Custom Volunteer Field 3 can be customized to suit client needs. The field can be renamed and drop down options edited to reflect client needs. This drop down field is found in Patron Records and Personnel Management.

    Workflow Notifications

    The Workflow tab allows you to create and manage different notification types for Internet and Box Office Sales.

    Click here for more information on WorkFlow Notifications.

    For information about editing values in Code Tables, click here.

    Sales Promotions

    Sales promotions are used during the ticket purchase process to indicate how the base ticket price is to be altered to arrive at the final ticket price. A sales promotion is a discount, a markup, or a combination of both that is added to a ticket at the time of purchase. A ticket sold at "full" price has a sales promotion that has a no markup and no discount.

    Markups and discounts can be percentages or fixed amounts.

    For Example:
    A half price sales promotion has a 50% discount.
    A group discount could be $4.00 off the regular price.
    A special promotion that includes a reception, may have a markup of $4.00 added to the regular price.

    A sales promotion can combine a discount and a markup.

    For Example:
    You could have a special seniors price which is always $7.00 that combines a 100% discount with a $7.00 markup.

    Ticket prices before tax are calculated as:

    Ticket Price = Ticket Base price - Sales Promotion Discount + Sales Promotion Markup.

    Sales Promotions Codes are accessed through the Setup >> System Tables >> Sales Promotions Menu.

    The Sales Promotions Window will open.

    Click here for a detailed description of this window and it's functions.

    Sales Promotions List Window

    Sales promotions are used during the ticket purchase process to indicate how the base ticket price is to be altered to arrive at the final ticket price. A sales promotion is a discount, a markup, or a combination of both that is added to a ticket at the time of purchase. A ticket sold at "full" price has a sales promotion that has a no markup and no discount.

    Markups and discounts can be percentages or fixed amounts.

    For Example:
    A half price sales promotion has a 50% discount.
    A group discount could be $4.00 off the regular price.
    A special promotion that includes a reception, may have a markup of $4.00 added to the regular price.

    A sales promotion can combine a discount and a markup.

    For Example:
    You could have a special seniors price which is always $7.00 that combines a 100% discount with a $7.00 markup.

    Ticket prices before tax are calculated as:

    Ticket Price = Ticket Base price - Sales Promotion Discount + Sales Promotion Markup.

    Sales Promotions Codes are accessed through the Setup >> System Tables >> Sales Promotions Menu.

    Parts of the Sales Promotions Window

    Inserts a New promotion. For more information on inserting new sales promotions click here.
    Opens the edit window for the selected promotion. For more information on editing sales promotions click here.
    Creates a copy of the sales promotion.
    Deletes the selected promotion. For more information on deleting sales promotions click here.
    Generates a report of the listed sales promotions to the screen or default print location.
    Exports out the listed sales promotions in a tab-delimited format.
    Sets the selected promotion as the default.
    Enables the selected promotion.
    Disables the selected promotion.
    Promotion Search option for sales promotions
    From Starting point for search
    To Ending point for search
    The type of promotions you wish to view: All, Active, Inactive
    Promotion The descriptive name of the promotion.
    Desc (External) The external description of the sales promotion to be printed on a ticket or displayed on the internet.
    Group Group letter the promotion belongs to.
    Map Letter Letter that will appear on the map for this promotion.
    Coupon A coupon is required for this promotion.
    Discount $ The dollar discount for the promotion.
    Discount % The discount percentage for the promotion.
    Markup $ The dollar markup for the promotion.
    Markup % The markup percentage for the promotion.
    Ticket Fee 1 Ticket Fee 1 value.

    Sales Promotion Code Window and Detail Tab

    The Sales Promotion Code window can be broken into 3 parts:

    1. The ribbon bar / toolbar. Click here, for more information on the buttons and what they do.
    2. The Name and Status of the current promotion.
    3. The Tabs. These are:
    • Description - As Described on this page.
    • Calculation - Click here for a description of this tab.
    • Edits - Click here for a description of this tab.
    • Plug In - Click here for a description of this tab.
    • Performances - Click here for a description of this tab.
    • Transactions - Click here for a description of this tab.
    • Parts of the Detail Tab

      External Description The descriptive name of the promotion.
      Exclude Price Codes The price codes which the promotion cannot be used with.
      Report Subtotal Group Select from the drop down list, the appropriate grouping to use to subtotal similar promotions together on reports. You can add more groups is the Promotions Sales Groups. Click here for more information.
      Map Display Letter The letter to display on a graphical map when a ticket is sold using this promotion.
      Subscription Hold Letter The hold letter to display on a reserved seating map in a control house, when a ticket is held for a subscriber using this promotion as past of the subscription process.
      Ticket Type for G/L Posting The ticket type to which the promotion applies. Availble are:
      • Regular
      • Season
      Ticket Face # Sales promotions can print an extra ticket under certain conditions, for example a restaurant voucher of it is a Dinner and Show promotions.

    Calculation Tab

    This is a very powerful tool to help you figure out ticket pricing if you are applying fees, discounts and commissions.

    This window is broken into four columns:

    • Ticket Pricing Options
    • Tax Rate
    • Calculation Options
    • Sample Price Calculator

    Parts of the Calculation Tab

    Ticket Pricing Options   Tax Rate

    Calculation Options

    Enable or disable

    Sample Price Calculator
    Price

    =Base Price for Ticket Price Code

    - Discount

    Used to decrease the base ticket price by a fixed dolar amount OR by a percentage Choose the tax to apply from the Drop Down List

    Apply the Dollar Discount First

    Displays what the values you have entered do to change the price.
    +Markup Used to increase the base ticket price by a fixed dolar amount OR by a percentage

    Apply the Dollar Markup First

    Always add the Markup

    and round to the nearest Indicates if the base price is to be rounded before adding fees and taxes.
    • 0=No
    • other values will indicate to the nearest $ or $.50
    +Ticket Fee 1 A ticket fee added to the base ticket price by a fixed dolar amount OR by a percentage Choose the tax to apply from the Drop Down List Always Add Fees
    +Ticket Fee 2 A ticket fee added to the base ticket price by a fixed dolar amount OR by a percentage Choose the tax to apply from the Drop Down List
    +Ticket Fee 3 A ticket fee added to the base ticket price by a fixed dolar amount OR by a percentage Choose the tax to apply from the Drop Down List
    and round to the nearest Indicates if the base price is to be rounded before adding fees and taxes.
    • 0=No
    • other values will indicate to the nearest $ or $.50
    Commission Table Opens the Commisions Setup Lookup to apply a commission

    Edits Tab

    Parts of the Edits Tab

    Use For Sales Enable the appropriate check boxes for this promotion:
    • Via the Box Office
    • Via the Internet
    • At Another Outlet
    • Include in Patron Statistics
    Can be sold between Enter the dates for when the tickets can be sold From and Through
    Can be used

    Enable the appropriate check boxes for this promotion

    • For tickets sold before the date of performance
    • On the day of sale of the performance
    Base Price The Lowest and the Highest price of the ticket the promotion can be appied to
    Maximun Use The maximum number of time a promotion can be used
    For Example: the first 50 tickets get a discounted rate
    Special Handling

    Enable the appropriate check boxes for this promotion

    • Promotion requires coupon
    Notifications If necessary, select the appropriate notification from the drop down list

    Pug In Tab

    Plug-Ins are special code segments designed specifically for your Theatre that affect how the sales process works. For example, a sales promotion plug in might look at the number of tickets and change regular sales to group sales of tickets automatically.

    Click the Plug In button to open the the Plug In List Window.

    Performances Tab

    The Performances tab, allows you to veiw indepth information about the Plays / Events / Performances you want to apply the promotions to.

    Parts of the tab

    Opens the highlighted Performance in the Performance Detail window for editting. Click here for more information on editing a performance.
    Disables the current sales promotion from the selected performance(s). To enable the sales performance again, you will need to edit each performance or mass enable from the sales promotion list.
    Clicking the Transactions button, opens the transactions list window to show the transactions related to the selectd performance.
    Allows you to find specific performances to select from by selecting an option.
    From / To You can further refine the displayed list by entering from or to information related to your selection in the drop down list.
    Click the Search button to find the performances that match your search critera.

    Transactions Tab

    This tab allows you to view all the transaction related to Plays / Events / Performances. You can further refine the results of your search through making a selection in the drop down list box, or by enabling or disabling the checkboxes. Once you have the list of transactions you can use:
    Allows you to insert a new transaction record.
    Opens the Transaction Detail window for the selected transaction record.
    Deletes the selected transaction record.

    Sales Promotion Toolbar / Ribbon Bar

    The functions available are:

    Help - opens the appropriate page in the online help.
    New Adds a new record.
    Save - Saves the current entry.
    Duplicate - Duplicates the current entry as a new record.
    Revert - reverts the current entry back to the last time it was saved.
    Delete - removes the current entry from the listing.
    Print - prints the current record to the default printer.
    Spell - Checks the spelling in the appropriate fields.

    Default Promotion

    One promotion is set as the default promotion. This is the promotion that is initially displayed in the promotion portion of the sales window when selling tickets. The name of the default promotion is listed beside the set default button on the lower left portion of the promotion window.

    If no default exists, then the words "No Default" will appear beside the button.

    To mark a promotion as the default, you perform the following steps:

    1. Choose Setup>>System Tables>>Sales Promotions.

      The Sales Prootion List window opens.

    2. Select the promotion to become the default.

      Single click on a promotion to select it.

    3. Click the Set button.

      The status bar displays the name of the default sales Promotion.

    Removing the Default Setting

    Just as a default promotion can be set, it can also be removed. To remove the default setting from a promotion follow the steps outlined below. If you just want to change the default promotion, you do not have to remove the current default. You can just set the new default the same way that was described in the section "Setting a Default Promotion".

    1. Select the promotion currently set to default.

      Single click on a sales promotion to select it.

    2. Click the Clear button.

      The bar at the bottom of the window now states No Default Sales Promotion had been selected.

    Adding a Promotion

    To Add a new promotion, you perform the following steps:

    1. Open the Sales Promotions window by clickinging Setup>>System Tables>>Sales Promotions.

      The Sales Promotions list window opens.

    2. Click the New button.

      The Promotion Detail Window opens.

    3. Enter Sales promotion Name.

      Try to give the promotion a name that is relatively self explanatory.

      For example: If the promotion is a buy one get one free type of admission, name the promotion 2 for 1. Refer to Promotion Ideas Page for more promotion description examples.

    4. Enter the dates that the Promotion will be active.

      The effective date is the date that the promotion takes effect, the thru date is the date that the promotion is good until. If the promotion does not have time constraints leave the date boxes empty.

    5. Enter Price Codes to be Excluded.

      Excluded Price Codes are Price Codes that should not be effected by this Sales Promotion

    6. Assign the Promotion to a Report Subtotal Group.

      Report Groups are a single letter or number that are used to group similar promotions together on reports. A subtotal will be printed for each group on reports. Classification of promotion codes make revenue reports more meaningful. Eg. The following groups could be used to classify your promotions:

      A - Single Ticket Sales (regular, 2 for 1, General Admission).

      D - Special Benefit Promotions (Dinner, Opening Gala, Development Events).

      G - Group Tickets (Senior homes, Brownies).

      M - Media Tickets (Critics, Editors).

      S - Season Tickets (Earlybird, Season).

      Z - Comp Tickets (Listed with a 'Z' so they appear last in reports)

      These letters can be further defined in Code Table data.

    7. Select a Map Display Letter.

      This is the letter that will appear on the seat in the Map

    8. Select the Per Ticket Fees.

      This is where the user can setup three levels of ticket fees. The user can also decide which taxes will be applicable to those order fees. Once again clicking on the check box for that tax desired. Refer to Promotion Example Page for examples of Per Ticket Fees.

    9. Set Promotion Type.

      Similar to the report groups, they are used to classify similar sales promotions together. There are four possible selections to choose from. Regular Admission, Season Ticket, and three user defined fields. These promotion types are used in the same manner as the report groups.

    10. Click on the Calculation tab.
    11. Enter the Base Price Calculation.

      This is where the user enters a markup and, or discount for the promotion. The user can create a discount or markup that is based on dollars or percentage. Example: A user could create a discount of $10.00 or 25 % off of a given ticket price. The user could also create a markup of $5.00 or 15 % on a given ticket price. The user may also use the markups and discounts in conjunction with each other. Create a promotion that has a discount of 100 % with a markup of $7.00. This promotion used on any ticket will yield a ticket with price of $7.00. The user may also decide which taxes are applicable to the promotion. Click on the check box for the taxes that should be included.

    12. Click Save .

      Doing this will finish of the process and save the promotion. Refer to the section on Selling Tickets for details on how to apply the promotion during a ticket sale.

    Editing Promotions

    Over time, promotions can change and will need to be updated.

    To update a Promotion, you perform the following steps:

    1. Open the Sales Promotions window by clickinging Setup>>System Tables>>Sales Promotions.

      The Sales Promotions list window opens. Enter any search parameters and click the Search button to display a list of promotions that match your criteria.

    2. Click on the promotion you want to edit.
    3. Click the Open Button.

      The Promotion Code Detail Window will open with the data for the selected promotion.

    4. Change data as needed.
    5. Click the Save Button.

      This saves all the data you have changed. The new data will be displayed in the Sales Promotions Window.

    Exclude Price Codes

     

    The Exclude Price Codes field can be used to prevent a Sales Promotion from having access to the specified prices. It's designed increase the efficiency of a Sales Promotion and prevent a ticket from being sold at the wrong price point.
      1. Open the Sales Promotions window by clickinging Setup>>System Tables>>Sales Promotions.

        The Sales Promotions list window opens. Enter any search parameters and click the Search button to display a list of promotions that match your criteria.

      2. Click on the promotion you want to edit.
      3. Click the Open Button.

        The Promotion Code Detail Window will open with the data for the selected promotion.

      4. Locate the Exclude Price Codes fields under the External Discription field.

      5. Enter the Price Codes to be excluded for this Promotion.
      6. Click the Save button.
      7. Close the Promotion Detail window.

    Enable/Disable Sales Promotions

    Sales promotions can be enabled or disabled in a batch mode using the 'Enable' and 'Disable' menu items on the sales promotion list window.

    You will be asked to provide some criteria that will be used to selected performances -- to which the promotions will be enabled or disabled.

    Deleting Promotions

    If a promotion has been setup incorrectly or expired you can delete it. You cannot delete a promotion which is being used on current tickets or transactions.

    To delete a promotion, you perfrom the following steps:

    1. Open the Sales Promotions window by clickinging Setup>>System Tables>>Sales Promotions.

      The Sales Promotions list window opens. Enter any search parameters and click the Search button to display a list of promotions that match your criteria.

    2. Click on the promotion you want to delete.
    3. Click the Delete button.

      Clicking the delete button opens one of the two following dialogue boxes:

      This dialogue box opens when you try to delete a promotion code that has been used to sell tickets for an event that has not been archived, or patron transactions have not been archived.
      To delete a promotion, all events that have tickets sold with that promotion must be archived. For further information about Archiving an Event click here.
      Click OK to close the dialogue box. The promotion will remain in the database.

      This Dialogue box opens when you are deleting a promotion that has never been used or no longer has tickets or transactions referenced to it.
    4. Click the delete button.

      The promotion will then be deleted and removed from the Sales Promotions Window.

      To cancel the deletion of the selected promotion, click the Cancel button.

    Promotional Ideas

    This page is intended to provide you with some examples and ideas for promotions, ticket fees, report groups and order fees.

    The following examples are some ideas and suggestions, they do not have to be implemented.

    Possible Promotions

    Single Ticket Promotions (Promotion Group R)
    • 2 for 1
    • Regular
    • General Admission
    • Senior Special
    • Member Discount
    • Sponsor Discount
    • Rush seating

    Complimentary Ticket Promotions (Promotion Group C)

    • Staff
    • Promotional
    • Media
    • Volunteer
    • Artist
    • President
    • Other

    Season Ticket Promotions (Promotion Group S)

    • 5 play
    • 3 play
    • Season Early
    • Season Regular
    • Flex Pass

    Group Ticket Promotions (Promotion Group G)

    • Group 10 +
    • Group 20 + 

    Possible Ticket Fees

    • Asset Replacement Fund
    • Ticket Handling Charge

    Order Fees

    • Order Handling Charge
    • Phone Order Fee
    • Credit Card Order Fee
    • Mailing Ticket Fee

    Sales Rules

    This page is under construction

    Donation Giving Levels

    Donation Giving Levels

    Donation Giving Levels are setup to allow for donations from patrons to be tracked using a giving level matrix.

    The matrixes are setup through the Donation Giving Levels Window which can be accessed through the Setup >> System Tables >> Donation Giving Levels.

    The Donation Giving Levels Window will open displaying all current Giving Level Matrixes.

    Donation Giving Levels

    Parts of the Donation Giving Level Window

    Inserts a new giving level through the Giving Level Detail Window.For more information on inserting giving levels click here.
    Opens a window to edit a giving level through the Giving Level Detail Window.For more information on editing giving levels click here.
    Creates a copy of the selected giving level.
    Deletes a giving level.For more information on deleting giving levels click here.
    Generates a report of the giving levels to the screen or default print location.
    Exports the giving level list in a tab-delimited format.
    Giving Level The name of the level.
    Outlet-Owner The Outlet associated with the campaign.
    Pledged The pledged goal.
    Actual The total dollars raised to date.
    Count The number of pledges associated with the giving level.
    Soft Credit Soft Credits associated with this campaign.
    Matching Gift The total dollars raised as Matching Gifts.
    Match Count The total number of Matching Gifts.
    Balance The total dollars needed to meet the pledged goal.

    Creating Giving Levels

    1. Open the Donation Giving Levels window.

      Click here to learn how to access this window.

    2. Click the New button.

      The Giving Level Detail window will open.

    3. Enter a name for the Giving Level.
    4. Click the Save button.
    5. Click the the Add button.

      The button will become accessible once you have entered a matrix name.

      The Giving Level window will open.

    6. Enter the name of the giving level.

      i.e. Bronze

    7. Enter the lower limit of the giving level.

      i.e. 1

    8. Enter the upper level of the giving level.

      i.e. 99

    9. Enter the benefit amount.
    10. Enter a description of the giving level.
    11. Click the Save to save the giving level.
    12. Repeat this procedure to add the different giving levels

      Example Matrix:

      • Bronze $ 1 - 99
      • Silver $ 100 - 499
      • Gold $ 500 - 999
      • Platinum $ 1000 - 1000000

    Editing a Donation Giving Level Matrix

    1. Open the Donation Giving Level window.

      Click here to learn how to access this window.

    2. Click on the Giving Level Matrix you wish to edit.
    3. Click the Open button.

      This will open the Giving Level Detail window.

    4. Click on the level to be edited and select the Detail button.

    5. Change the required data.
    6. Click the OK button.

      The changes will be saved and the new data will be displayed in the Giving Level Detail Window.

    Deleting Giving Levels

    Giving levels are contained in matrix. Giving levels cab be deleted as the entire matrix or a single level in a matrix. A giving level or matrix used by a donation campaign can not be deleted.

    Deleting a Giving Level Matrix

    1. Open the Donation Giving Levels window.

      Click here to learn how to access this window.

    2. Select the giving level matrix.

      Single click on a matrix to select it.

    3. Click the Delete button.

      The following warning window will appear.

    4. Click the Delete button to delete the selected giving level matrix

    Deleting a Giving Level from a Matrix

    1. Open the Donation Giving Levels window.

      Click here to learn how to access this window.

    2. Select the giving level matrix.

      Do this by single clicking the value.

    3. Click the Open button.

      The giving level detail window will open.

    4. Select the level to be deleted.

      Single click on a level to select it.

    5. Click the Delete button.

      The following warning window will appear.

    6. Click the Delete button to delete the giving level.

    Donation Campaigns

    Donation Campaigns are setup to track to what campaign received donations from patrons.

    The campaigns are setup through the Donation Campaign Window which can be accessed through the Setup >> System Tables >> Donation Campaigns Menu.

    The Donation Campaigns Window will open displaying all current campaigns.

    Donation Campaign List Window

    Parts of the Donation Campaign Window

    Accesses the Help section for this window.
    Inserts a New campaign through the Campaign Detail Window. For more information on inserting campaigns click here.
    Opens a window to edit a campaign through the Campaign Detail window. For more information on editing campaigns click here.
    Deletes a campaign. For more information on deleting campaigns click here.
    Generates a report of donation campaigns to the screen or default print location.
    Exports out a donation campaign list in a tab-delimited format.
    Opens the Donation Giving Levels Window.For more information on giving levels click here.
    Merges two campaigns.For more information on merging campaigns click here.
    Campaign The name of the donation campaign.
    Actual Dollar value the donation campaign has collected to date.
    Solicitor The main solicitor for this campaign.
    Notification Message sent to inform user of activity to this campaign.
    Pledged The total pledges to date.
    Soft Soft Credits associated with this campaign.
    Outlet-Owner The Outlet associated with the campaign.
    Count The number of pledges to date.
    Giving Level The giving level matrix that is being used by the donation campaign. Click here to learn how to set up a giving level matrix.
    Campaign Flag Include the campaign in Annual Patron Statistics

    Campaign Detail Window

    Parts of the Description Tab

    Campaign Name The name of the donation campaign.
    External Name Name to be displayed on the internet.
    Campaign Starts Ends The time period that the campaign is running.
    Default Solicitor The primary solicitor for the campaign.
    Ticket Face The ticket face to be printed for a donation receipt. This function can only be utilized by thermal ticket printers.
    Notification The notification type that you would like to be sent out for this campaign. Click here for more information on setting up Workflow Notifications.

    Accounting Tab

    Parts of the Accounting Tab

    Restricted Campaign Generally funds are deposited to the Operating Account as setup in your Default Posting Accounts. If you are using another account for this campaign, check the Restricted Campaign box and enter the correct Bank Account below.
    Bank Account Bank account for this campaign.
    Income "Prior Year in blue" and earlier Prior fiscal year account for this campaign.
    Income for "Current Year in blue" Current fiscal year account for this campaign.
    Deferred Revenue for "Next Year in blue" and Later Future fiscal year account for this campaign.
    Patron is allowed to receive a benefit when giving to the campaign Applies the benefit matrix from the giving level matrix to this campaign. Click here for more information on setting up benefits for donations.
    Can be changed from the default for the giving level Allows the value of the benefit to be edited during a donation.
    Benefit Account Benefit general ledger account for this campaign.

    Edits Tab

    Parts of the Edits Tab

    Accept Donation at

    Via the Donor Tab Allow the campaign to be displayed when a donation is being entered through the donor button.
    In conjunction with a Ticket Sale Allow the campaign to be displayed when a donation is being given through a ticket sale.
    Taken during a Ticket Return Allow the campaign to be displayed when a ticket is being refunded / returned.
    Accepted on the Internet Allow the campaign to be accessed via the Internet and donations made Online.

    Print Controls On Receipts

    Print receipts for this Campaign Allows receipts to be printed for this campaign and you may set a minimum amount if desired for receipt printing.

    Include in Patron Statistics

    Include in Annual Statistics Donation values will appear in Annual Statistic Report.

    Giving Level Matrix

    Giving Level The giving level matrix that will be used for the campaign. For information on setting up a Giving Level Matrix for use here, click here.

    Statistics Tab

    Parts of the Statistics Tab

    Total Target Goal for the campaign.
    Prospects The total value of prospect donations for the campaign.
    Soft Pledges The total value of soft pledge donations for the campaign.
    Soft Credits Total value of soft credits allocated for the campaign.

    Actual

    Total amount received.
    Total Donations Total number of donations for the campaign.
    Hard Pledges The total pledged amount for the campaign.
    Matching Gifts The amount of matching gifts for the campaign.
    # Gifts Matched The number of matching gift donations for the campaign.
    Written Off The total value of donations written off against this campaign.
    Balance Owing Total balance owing on donations for this campaign.

    Notes Tab

    Parts of the Notes Tab

    Notes Enter any notes about the campaign.

    G/L Entries Tab

    Parts of the G/L Entries Tab

    View Selection Drop-down (set to All G/L Entries in the example) Choose which entries you want to see in the list and then click the lookup button to view the list. The default is All G/L Entries.
    Journal # The unique Journal # for the entry
    Description The type of journal entry it is (ie. Sales Posting)
    Date The posting date for the entry.
    Debit The Debit amount of the entry (if applicable)
    Credit The Credit amount for the entry.
    Not available.
    Opens the selected entry for viewing/editing.
    Not available.

    Creating a New Donation Campaign

    To review Quick Reference information on Creating a Donation Campaign, choose from the following:

    For the Cheatsheet

    or the Screencast

    Creating a Donation Campaign

    To Create a new donation campaign, you perform the following steps:

    1. Open the Donation Campaign window.

      Click here to learn how to access this window.

      Click here for a detailed description of this window.

    2. Click the New button.

      This will open the Campaign Detail window.

      Click here for a detailed description of this window.

    3. Enter the name of the campaign.
    4. Enter the time period of the campaign.
    5. Enter the solicitor for this campaign.

      This field is defaulted to the current user. The Employee Lookup button can be used to display a list of all current Employees.

    6. Select a ticket face.

      This prints an extra ticket for a donation and can only be used by thermal printers.

    7. Select the Notification type.

      This will send an email to whomever has been setup to receive emails based on type of notification. To setup a Notification click here.

    8. Click the Accounting tab.

    9. Enter in the Accounting information for this campaign.

      If this is a Restricted Campaign (one which deposits to a bank account OTHER THAN the Operating Account, check the Restricted Campaign box and fill in the appropriate Bank account.

      Different G/L Accounts can be selected for prior fiscal years, current fiscal year, and future fiscal years. For more information on creating G/L accounts click here.

    10. Select the Edits tab.

    11. Select the giving level matrix to use for the campaign.

      Click here to learn how to setup giving levels.

    12. Select the access to be given to the campaign.
    13. Determine if a receipts should be printed for this campaign.
    14. Select the edit controls on the benefit amount.
    15. Click the Statistics tab.

    16. Enter the target amount for the campaign.
    17. Click the Save button.
    18. Close the Campaign Detail window.

      The campaign will be saved and displayed on the Donation Campaign window.

    Delete a Campaign

    1. Open the Donation Campaign window.

      Click here to learn how to access this window.

    2. Click on the campaign you wish to delete.

      The campaign must not be tied to any transactions in order to be deleted.

    3. Click the Delete button.

      The following warning window will appear.

    4. Click the Delete button.

      The donation campaign has now been deleted.

    Editing a Donation Campaign

    1. Open the Donation Campaign window.

      Click here to learn how to access this window.

    2. Select the campaign you wish to edit.

      Single click on a campaign to select it.

    3. Click the Open button.

      This will open the Campaign Detail window.

    4. Change the required data.
    5. Click the Save button.

      The changes will be saved and the new data will be displayed in the Donation Campaign Window.

    Merging Donation Campaigns

    1. Open the Donation Campaigns window.

      Click here to learn how to access this window.

    2. Select the campaigns you would like to merge.

      Do this by holding <CTRL> (Windows) or <OPTION> (Mac) as you click the campaigns.

    3. Click the Merge button.
    4. Click the Merge button to complete the merge.

      The campaigns will be merged and displayed in the Donation Campaigns Window as the campaign you chose to merge the files into.

    Member Types

    Memberships, Gift Certificates and Passes are all classified in Theatre Manager as Memberships. Memberships are bought by a patron and may (depending on your company) entitle them to a monthly newsletter, advanced ticket purchases, or discounts on ticket sales. Memberships can also be setup to allow a set number of free admissions with purchase. Gift Certificates are purchased for a dollar denomination and then given to another patron who can use the gift certificate as cash to purchase tickets for a performance. Passes can be setup to provide free admissions to a predefined number of performances; as well passes can be setup as "Average cost per Admission" the pass is purchased for a set price and allows x number of admissions. when the pass is redeemed Theatre Manager will override the price code and change the price to the denomination of the pass.

    Setting up Memberships is performed throughout the Member Types Window. The window can be accessed through the Setup >> System Tables >> Member Types Menu

    The Member Types Window will open.

    Click here for a detailed description of this window.

    Finding a Membership Type

    1. Click Setup.
    2. Click System Tables.
    3. Click Member Types.

    4. Enter the search From and To fields.

      Or leave blank for a complete list of Memberships.

    5. Click the Search button.

      The results which fit your parameters will be displayed.

      To access a membership double-click it.

    Member Types List Window

    Through this window you can add, edit, delete, view the details and verify member types.

    Parts of the Member Types List Window

    Accesses the Help section for this window.
    Inserts new member type. For more information on inserting member types click here.
    Edits the selected member type. For more information on editing member types click here.
    Copies the selected member type.
    Deletes the selected member type Click Here to learn how to delete member types.
    Generates a report of the member types to the screen or default print location.
    Exports a list of member types.
    Verifies the selected member type. For more information on verifying member types click here.
    Description Description of the member type which will be displayed in all membership pull down menus.

    Purchase $

    Dollar value of the member type at time of purchase.

    Redeem $

    Dollar value representing how much of the membership has been redeemed/used (or the value of items for which it has been used)
    Issue Qty Number of this member type to be sold.
    Redemption Method Method of redemption for the selected member type. For more on the redemption methods, click here.

    Creating a Membership

    "Membership" is a broad term meaning "Gift Certificates," "Flex Passes," "Vouchers," "Other Income" or a variety of other forms. Since the name of the field is customizable, some organizations may retain the term "Membership," while others change it to reflect their own terminology such as "GC/Pass," "Gift Certs." or even "Other Income." The nomenclature in your database may be different than "memberships."
    Theatre Manager sells three things: Tickets, Donations and Memberships. While "tickets" allow admission to an event and "donations" are gifts from patrons for which a tax is receipt is usually printed, "memberships" can take on a variety of formats.

    Memberships are often seen as a payment method, as in a Gift Certificate or Flex Pass. They are used to exchange value from the membership to a ticket purchase. For example, a Gift Certificate can be purchased, and exchanged at a later date (used as a payment method) for tickets or other items for sale. Similarly, a Flex Pass is purchased, and exchanged for tickets at a later date.

    Memberships can also denote affiliation with a group, such as a Symphony League, Actors Club.

    And finally, Memberships can also be a methodology for getting payments for non-ticket/non-donation items into Theatre Manager such as rental income, playbill advertising, and concession income.

    For more information on determining the membership type that best suits your needs click here.

    Creating a Membership


    1. Go to the Setup Menu >> System Tables >> Member Types (remember, yours may be called "Pass," "GC/Pass," "Gift Certificates" or some other name).



    2. The Member Detail window will open allowing you to create a new Membership.



    3. Give the Membership an INTERNAL name that you will know the membership by within your organization. You will have an opportunity to change the EXTERNAL name (the name by which your patrons will know this membership) on the Description tab.



    4. Proceed to each tab in the Membership Setup.

    Description tab

    The Description tab is the first of the setup tabs in a new membership. Many of the fields in this tab are optional.



    Parts of the Description tab

    External Name

    Name by which the patrons will know this membership (this name appears on the web).

    *Available From

    Date the membership will be available for sale.

    *Available Till

    Date the membership will no longer be available for sale. This does not mean "redeemable" until.

    *Ticket Face

    The ticket face that will be used for this membership. If a ticket is to be printed for this membership, then the ticket coding must be based on Member Data.

    *Exclude Price Codes

    If, during the redemption of this membership, any specific Price Codes in the Event Setup are to be unable to be used by this Membership, then those Price Codes need to be listed here.

    *Notification

    If an internal email notification is to be sent when this particular membership is sold, it must be indicated here. For more information on Work Flow Notifications click here.

    * indicates an optional field

    Type Tab

    There are 5 different types of Memberships that can be created in Theatre Manager. Each one serves a specific purpose, yet remains flexible in the parameters you determine. The 5 types are:

    1. Free Admission
    2. Dollar Value
    3. Average Dollar Per Admission
    4. Can't Buy A Thing, and
    5. Use Promotion

    1. Free Admission

    A Free Admission is simply that - a "free admission." If you are giving away a ticket to an event in a radio giveaway or an auction, you can create a Free Admission pass. This allows the recipient to exchange the free admission pass for an admission ticket to any event. You can limit the events applicable to the pass in the "Valid Plays" tab of the Membership setup.

    Special Considerations:
    • The number of free admissions can be controlled by changing the # of Passes issued on the right side of the screen.
    • If the passes are going to be free, then the "Can be sold for a zero value" on the EDITS tab must be selected.

    2. Dollar Value

    A Dollar Value pass is essentially a Gift Certificate. If the patron gives you $50 to use at a later date, then redeems the pass to purchase tickets, it should be set up as a Dollar Value.

    Special Considerations:
    • Typically, the "# of Passes Issued" is set to 0, and the "Purchase Amount" is set to $0. Then on the EDITS tab, the "Value Can Be Changed During Purchase" option is selected so Gift Certificates can be sold in any amount.
    • In most U.S. States, and all of Canada, Gift Certificates never expire and should be set as such in this window.
    • The General Ledger accounts for "Dollar Value" and "Average Dollar Per Admission" are typically liability accounts as they start out as a credit to the patron and then are used as a reduction of that credit.

    3. Average Dollar Per Admission

    This is more typically known as a "Flex Pass" where a patron purchases a pack of "x" admissions for "y" price. The Flex Pass is then redeemed for tickets on whatever schedule the patron wishes. The parameters can be set such that the patron can use one, some or all admissions on the same performance. Average $ per Admission passes (or better known as "Flex Passes") are rapidly becoming more popular than the traditional "all-in" subscriptions.
    Special Considerations:
    • The values for "# Passes Issued" and "Purchase Amount" must be set for an Average Dollar Per Admission type.
    • Theatre Manager will split the Purchase Amount equally across all available redemptions. So if the Flex Pass is $100 for 5 admissions, regardless of the actual price of the ticket, Theatre Manager will attribute $20 ($100/5) to each event where the pass is redeemed.
    • You may set a "Maximum per admission" to limit the value to which the pass can be applied. Using the above example, you set a Maximum per admission of $25. If the recipient attempts to redeem the pass on an event where the ticket price is $30, Theatre Manager will apply $25 from the pass to the ticket, and leave a balance owing of $5 to be paid in some other form.

    4. Can't Buy A Thing

    Can't Buy A Thing is used to enter funds into Theatre Manager that are not either tickets or donations. Typically this is merchandise, concessions, advertising sales, rental fees or some other form of income. Alternatively, it is used as a true membership such as a Symphony League, Community Players, or other membership group.
    Special Considerations:
    • Can't Buy A Thing and Use Promotion are the only two membership types where "Grace period before approval needed to renew expired memberships" (on the EDITS tab) can be employed. This is because these are the only two true membership types, whereas the previous three are based on admissions.
    • 5. Use Promotion

      This membership type is designed to allow pass holders special access to specific Sales Promotions. When this pass is used, the Sales Promotion of the selected tickets changes from their original promotion to the one listed here in the setup.
      Special Considerations:
      • Examples of this membership type are Alumni who receive a "2 for 1" discount on tickets, Musicians who receive a dollar discount on tickets purchased, or patrons who belong to an elite club within your organization who, as a benefit of membership, receive a set discount on tickets.

    Edits tab

    The Edits tab is the third - and possibly most important - of the setup tabs in a new membership. You must carefully consider each of the check boxes and options in this tab as your selections control how the membership can be sold and redeemed.



    Parts of the Edits tab


    Edit controls on membership

    Value can be changed during purchase

    Allows the employee selling this membership to change the value (set in the Type tab on the right-hand side) during the sale. This is important if you have set your Gift Certificates to sell for an unspecified dollar amount. You will need to change the $0 amount to the amount the patron wished to purchase the gift certificate for.

    Sell in even multiples of original value

    If the membership has a specified value, checking this option allows the membership to be sold only in even multiples (1, 2, 3...) of the original value. When an employee purchases multiples of the member type it will increase the quantity of memberships by the number of multiples purchased. The number of admissions will also be increased by the same number of multiples purchased. A Flex Pass, for example, may cost $30 for 2 admissions. By selecting this option, you can sell 4 admissions for $60, or 6 for $90, but not 3 for $30 or 2 for $25.

    Can be sold for a zero value

    If the membership is to be given away or "comped" (for example a "free admission" or a Radio Giveaway Voucher), then this option must be selected.

    Can be renewed after expiry date

    Only available for "Can't Buy a Thing" and "Use Sales Promotion" as they are the only true membership types (as opposed to admission based memberships). This option allows the membership to be renewed after the expiration date defined when the membership was sold.

    Future memberships can be redeemed now

    If a membership is Season Year specific (i.e. a patron purchases a Flex Pass for the 20xx season), this option allows the redemption of this pass prior to the start of the season.

    Entry scan creates festival (General Admission) seating tix

    If your site employs ticket scanners for audience entry control, scanning this membership card will create a festival (General Admission) ticket. There is no need for the bearer of this kind of membership to stop by the box office. They only have their membership scanned during their entry to a festival or General Admission event, and Theatre Manager will register a sale to that membership.


    Allow membership to be purchased

    Via member tab on the patron screen

    This option allows the membership to be sold using the BUY button on the patron record on the MEMBER tab.

    In conjunction with a ticket sale

    This option allows sales staff to sell the membership using the Member tab on the left-hand side of the Order Window during the ticket sale process.

    As a ticket refund ("store credit")

    This would be selected if the membership is a voucher that is issued to a patron to rectify customer service situations. Instead of issuing a cash refund, a voucher/pass/gift certificate may be issued for a future ticket purchase.

    Via the internet

    This option allows the membership to be sold online.


    Defaulting the Control Number
    A Control Number is a number associated with a membership that Theatre Manager uses to identify and track the specific membership within the system. ONE of the following options must be selected for the membership.

    Defined at time of purchase

    This option allows the seller to manually define the Control Number used for the membership. This is typically employed when there are pre-printed membership cards or magnetically encoded gift cards that already have a Control Number on them.

    Theatre Manager Defined

    Theatre Manager will assign the next number in sequence to the membership. This option must be used if the membership is to be sold online.

    Next available # starting at

    This option allows your organization to serialize the Control Number. For example, you can indicate that all Gift Certificates start at 100,000, while 2011 Flex Passes start at 11,000. This allows for easy recognition by sales staff as to the original purpose of the membership


    Include in Annual Statistics
    Checking this option will include sales of this membership when generating annual patron statistics reports.


    Defaulting the Expiration Date
    An expiration date indicates when the membership will no longer be redeemable. ONE of the following options must be selected for the membership.

    Never Expires

    Indicates that the membership will never expire. In most U.S. states and all of Canada, Gift Certificates must be set to "Never Expire." Please contact your local revenue agency for laws governing your Province/state.

    Expires in xx Months

    This allows the membership to be used on a "rolling" basis. It will expire xx months from the purchase date.

    Expires on Date

    This option allows the membership to expire on a specific date, such as the end of the season year. Popular for Flex Passes, it prevents the previous year's unused admission from being carried over to the current year.


    Other fields on the Type tab

    Number of Access Cards assigned to membership

    Like a hotel asking how many room keys you want, Access Cards can be assigned to a specific membership allowing more than one patron to use the membership. For more information on Access cards click here. Leaving the values at 0 allows one card to be issues for a membership.

    Grace period before approval needed to renew expired membership

    If the membership is renewable ("Can't Buy a Thing" or "Use Sales Promotion" only) then you may indicate the number of months after expiry where the membership can be renewed without a Master User override. If engaged, this is typically set to 1 or 2 months. For example, if you plan to increase the membership price from one year to the next, you may wish to offer a grace period for the old price to those who have recently expired memberships.

    Maximum # of tickets redeemable per performance

    Indicates the maximum number of times this membership can be used within a single performance. For example, if the membership is a flex pass for 5 admissions, how many admissions can be used in a single performance? In order to encourage diversity of attendance, some organizations choose 1 performance, while others are happy for patrons to attend a single event, using all 5 admissions at once. Note: this is a per performance setting, not a per event.


    Accounting tab

    The Accounting tab determines where the funds go to during a sale, and are drawn from during the redemption.



    Parts of the Accounting tab


    Tax Rate

    A drop down to select the tax rate applied to this membership. If there is no tax rate for this membership, then select "None."

    Income for FY20xx and Earlier

    For many membership types (Free Admission, Dollar Value, Average Dollar Per Admission), the income account is normally a liability account. As the membership is sold, the liability goes up. As the membership is redeemed, the liability goes down.

    Deferred Revenue FY20xx and Later

    Similar to the above cell, but used for memberships where the usable period falls within the upcoming year, rather than the current fiscal period.

    Redemption/Expense Account

    If there is a difference between the sale amount of the membership, and its redeemable value, then enter the GL account to which the difference should be applied. For example, if you have a holiday Gift Certificate promotion where if you buy a Gift Certificate for $100, but receive a redeemable value of $110, you may want to attribute the $10 expense to the marketing GL line. Use of this membership benefit amount ties back to the Redeemable Amount on the Type tab.

    Unearned Income Write-Off Account

    If the membership expires (as set in the Edits tab), then any unearned income will be moved to the GL account indicated here upon its expiration.


    Valid Plays tab

    The Valid Plays tab allows you to indicate which events the membership is able to be redeemed for. You can restrict the use of the membership to specific events simply by adding them here. An unrestricted membership would have no events listed.



    To Add an Event to the list, you would perform the following steps:

    1. Click the button.

    2. The Event List (lookup) opens.

    3. Click the icon to generate a list of events.


    4. Highlight the events you want to allow for this membership.

    5. Click the button.

    6. Continue adding events as appropriate.


    7. Parts of the Valid Plays tab


      Play #

      Sequence number of the event within Theatre Manager.

      Year

      Season year of the event.

      Play Code

      The Event Code as defined in the Event Setup.

      Play Title

      The title of the event as defined in the Event Setup.

      # Perf.

      Total number of performances for this event.


    Notes tab

    The Notes tab allows you to write a brief marketing piece about this specific membership. If you are using the Theatre Manager template web pages, then the information you enter here can be seen by patrons online.



    Statistics tab

    The Statistics tab displays a listing, year by year of the number of passes issues and redeemed and their value. This is a helpful "at-a-glance way of seeing what your organization has in terms of membership liability..



    G/L Entries tab

    The GL tab lists the general ledger entries associated with this membership.



    Parts of the G/L Entries tab

    Journal #

    The specific journal number associated with the G/L entry.

    Description

    Whether the entry is a Sales Posting, Deposit Posting, or manual G/L entry

    Date

    Date the G/L entry took place

    Debit

    The debit amount associated with the G/L entry.

    Credit

    The credit amount associated with the G/L entry.

    Memo

    A single memo line, generated by Theatre Manager to indicate in the ledger the purpose of the entry.

    Date Posted

    The date the entry was posted to the G/L.

    Editing Memberships

    1. Open the Member Types window.

      Click here to learn how to access this window.

    2. Click the Open button.

      This will open the Member Detail window.

      Click here for a detailed description of this window.

    3. Edit the data as needed.
    4. Click the Save button once changes are complete.

      The changes will be saved. Clicking the Revert button will abort any changes you made to the member type.

    Verifying Membership

    Verifying Memberships is used to change the setting on sold memberships to the new settings of that membership type. This function should be used only on the recommendation of a support technician in proper authority.

    1. Open the Membership Types window.

      Click here to learn how to access this window.

    2. Select the member type to verify.

      Single click a member type to select it.

    3. Click the Verify button.

      The following confirmation window will open.

    4. Click the Yes button to continue.

      The Member type has now been verified.

    Deleting Membership Types

    Membership types can only be deleted if they have not been bought by a patron or used.

    1. Open the Member Types Window.

      Click here to learn how to access this window.

    2. Select the Member Type to be deleted.

      Single click on a Member Type to select it.

    3. Click the Delete button.

      If the record cannot be deleted the following window will appear.

      The following confirmation window will appear if you are able to delete the member type.

    4. Click the Delete to confirm the deletion.

      The type will be removed from the Member Types Window.

    N/A To Be Deleted

    Pages in this section are redundant/outdated

    Creating a Membership Type

    1. Open the Member Types window.

      Click here to learn how to access this window.

    2. Click the New button.

      This will open the Member Detail Window.

      Click here for a detailed description of this window.

    3. Enter the member type.

      This title should be descriptive to allow for easy recognition by other users.

    4. Enter the time period which the membership can be purchased.
    5. Select the ticket face to be printed for the membership.

      This function is only supported by Thermal Printers.

    6. Set any price codes to be exempt from this membership type.

      For example a child's price code my be setup under the letter C. If the membership were created for adult use only the letter C would be entered as an excluded price code.

    7. Select the Notification Type for this membership.

      Enter information as required into the Detail, Type,Edits, Accounting,Valid Plays,Notes, and Stats Tabs.

    Type Tab

    1. Select the Method of Redemption.
    2. Set the number of passes that will be issued.
    3. Enter the price of the membership.
    4. Enter the value the membership can be redeemed for.

    Edits Tab

    1. Select the edit controls you would like available for the membership.
    2. Select how you would like the membership to be used.
    3. Add shows if this membership is only going to be allowed to be used on certain shows.
    4. Select an expiration type.
    5. Select how you would like the control number to be set.

    Accounting Tab

    1. Select the tax rate you would like to be applied to the membership
    2. Select the general ledger accounts you would like the membership sales to be posted to

    Valid Plays Tab

    1. Enter the plays associated with the membership.

    Notes Tab

    1. Enter any addition notes you would like to be associated with the membership.

    Stats Tab

    Resources

    Tasks are a major feature of Theatre Manager's newest versions and the Facility Management module. For more information about the Facility Management module click here. To read more specifically about tasks and their place within Facility Management, click here.

    This section shows how to set up an organization's resources for use within tasks. A resource can be anything from a consumable item (like paper cups or candy bars for concession), to reusable items like tables and chairs, to rooms for rent, or even employees or volunteers whose time can be considered a resource for a task (and billed to clients using the Facility Management billing/invoicing feature). Resources can be as broadly or narrowly defined as you decide you need them to be.

    To open the Tast Resource setup, you perform the following steps:

    1. Choose Setup >> System Tables >> Resources.

      The Resource List window opens to the All resources tab.

    For more information about the List window for Resources, click here.

    Resources List Window

    Function Definitions

    Click on a link to learn more about the features.

    Accesses the Help section for this window.
    Inserts new Resource. For more information on inserting resources click here.
    Edits the selected Resource. For more information on editing resources click here.
    Copies the selected Resource.
    Deletes the selected Resource. Click Here to learn how to delete resources.
    Generates a report of the resources to the screen or default print location.
    Exports a list of resources.
    Click to add inventory for the selected Resource. Opens the Pricing and Inventory Tab.
    Description The name of the Resource as setup in the Description Tab.
    Active/Inactive Checkboxes When checked, will pull a list of either Active or Inactive Resources (or both).
    Shows a list of All Resources.
    Shows a list of Resources that have been designated Generic Resources.
    Custom tabs are added in the System table Facility Resource Groups, Click here to go to the Resource Groups help page. Resource Groups are categories for different types of Resources. The default setting in Theatre Manager is the Generic group. Other groups can be added as needed.
    Table Columns
    Resource # The unique number in the database assigned to that particular resource.
    Code The unique Resource Code assigned to the particular resource.
    Description The name of the resource.
    Quantity The quantity of the specific resource listed in the database.
    Internal Description The internal description for the resource (shows only inside the Theatre Manager application).

    Generic Tab

    Resources can be grouped under different headings. The default heading in Theatre Manager is the Generic Resource.

    Additional groups can be added in Setup >> System Tables >> Code Tables >> Facility Resource Groups. Click here for more information about adding a group in the Facility Resource code table.

    Custom Tabs

    Setting up different Facility Resource Groups in the System Code tables creates new tabs in the Resource List window. This allows you to group resources under different headings.

    Resources can be grouped under different headings. The default heading in Theatre Manager is the Generic Resource.

    Additional groups can be added in Setup >> System Tables >> Code Tables >> Facility Resource Groups. Click here for more information about adding a group in the Facility Resource code table.

    Resource List Window Toolbar / Ribbon Bar

    Functions

    Opens the Help file for the Resource List window. Click here to view the Help page.
    Creates a new resource. Click here to learn more about adding resouces.
    Opens the Resource Detail window. Click here for more information on Editing a Resource.
    Copies the highlighted resource into a new resource. It can then be opened and edited.
    Deletes the highlighted resource. Click here for more information on deleting a resource.
    Prints a list of the resources (as shown).

    Exports the list of resources in the following formats:

    • Text, tab delimited (.txt)
    • Text, comma delimited (.csv)
    • Excel 97-2004 Workbook (.xls)
    • Excel 2008 Workbook (.xlsx)
    If inventory has been enabled for this resource, Clicking this button opens the Inventory Management dialog.

    Resource Detail Window

    The Resource Detail Window is where all of the specific information about a resource and it's usage is put into the Theatre Manager database.

    The following pages describe in detail the different tabs of the Resource Detail Window.

    Description Tab

    Parts of the Description Tab

    Accesses the Help section for this window.
    Inserts a new Resource. For more information on inserting resources click here.
    Saves changes made to the selected Resource
    Copies the selected Resource.
    Undoes changes to the last saved point.
    Deletes the selected Resource. Click Here to learn how to delete resources.
    Generates a report of the resources to the screen or default print location.
    Does a spell check of the record.
    Click to add inventory for the selected Resource. Opens the Pricing and Inventory Tab.
    Resource Code A unique code assigned to the specific Resource (similar to an Event Code, for example).
    Outlet The outlet to which a Resource belongs (for organizations using Outlet Edition of Theatre Manager).
    Resource Description The internal name of the Resource that will show in the Resource List Window and elsewhere in Theatre Manager.
    Status Box When checked, the Resource will be marked as an Active resource in lists.
    Resource Group The Resource Group to which a resource belongs. Theatre Manager's default Resource Group is "Generic." If you wish to add another group or groups, do so in the Code Tables as described here.
    External Description the name of the resource that is viewable by the general public.
    Unit The unit of measure for the resource for use in inventory management.
    Owner If the resource is owned (or managed), you can include that person by using the patron lookup button and searching for the owner/manager in the database.
    Vendor The preferred Vendor from whom to obtain the resource (if applicable)
    Special Instructions Include any special or important information about the resource in the Special Instructions field.
    Notification Notifications can be set to alert employees about usage of resources if desired. For more information about setting up workflow notifications, click here.
    Item Colour, Size and Picture Item colour and size description may also be included. You may also drag a picture into the picture field if you'd like.

    Accounting Tab

    Parts of the Accounting Tab

    Cost of Goods An expense (or liability) account as set up in the Chart of Accounts to be used with this resource when it it purchased for later sale.
    Purchase Tax Code The tax rate that applies to the purchase of the resource.
    Income Account The income account (from the Chart of Accounts) to be used when this resource is sold or rented.
    Sales Tax Code The sales tax rate used when selling/renting the resource.

    Pricing and Inventory Tab

    Parts of the Pricing and Inventory Tab

    Sales Method The three options are:
    • Component Only - the resource is intended only as part of a larger resource and is not used on its own (for example, a mic cable as part of a PA package).
    • Facility - the resource is rented or used over and over again without need of replenishment (for example, the PA package).
    • For Sale - the resource will need to be replenished as it is used (for example, paper cups).
    Resource Cost The replacement cost per unit of the resource (unit is set up on the Description Tab).
    Resource Pricing The suggested amount is how much should be charged per use of the resource. Usage is defined by the lookup button to the right of the entry field (in the example, it's set to Per Day).
    Customizable checkbox When checked, the Suggested Price can be changed when the resource is used.
    Inventory Management
    Enable Inventory Tracking checkbox Sets up the inventory management for this rental resource. If inventory tracking is enabled, then Theatre Manager will ensure that no more than the available quantity is rented at any given time.

    Click here to see how to Add Inventory Tracking.

    Enabling Inventory Tracking

    Tracking inventory allows you to specify the number of units available. If tracking is not on, Theatre Manager assumes the number of units available are unlimited. To start tracking inventory for the selected resource, you perform the following steps:

    1. In the Pricing and Inventory window, click to enable Inventory Tracking.

      If required, enter Notes about the inventory modification.

      Optionally - You can enter the number of units to track.

    2. To start inventory tracking, click the Start button.

      The inventory number appears on the Pricing and Inventory tab and in the Resource List.

    Removing Inventory Tracking

    You can disable the tracing of a particular resource. To remove tracking for the selected resource, you perform the following steps:

    1. In the Pricing and Inventory window, click the check box to disable Inventory Tracking.

      If required, enter Notes, such as a reason the tracking was disabled (for example, the particular unit has been replaced).

    2. Click the Stop button.

    Components Tab

    The Components Tab can be used for those resources which may require the use of various components (a PA System in the example). It is not a required tab for resource setup.

    Parts of the Pricing and Inventory Tab

    Components List Add or remove components to/from a resource here using the Add or Remove buttons at left under the list.
    Component Detail This section on the right side applies to the currently selected component resource on the component list on the left. In the example, the selected component is Speaker Cables, so the items under Component Detail apply to Speaker Cables as they are being used as a component of the PA System (the current selected Recourse)
    Component The currently selected component resource.
    Component Type Component resources are either a Standard part of the current Resource, or an Optional part of the Resource as designated here.
    Amount Used Set here how many units of the selected component resource are to be used in the instance of the current Resource.

    Notes Tab

    Notes

    • An area for any internal notes about this particular resource.
    • The Notes Tab is not a mandatory field to fill out when setting up a Resource.

    Tasks Tab

    The Tasks Tab will show a list of all the current Tasks to which the current Resource has been assigned. For more about creating a Task, click here. For specifics about assigning a resource to a task, click here.

    Parts of the Tasks Tab

    Task # The unique number in the database assigned to the particular task.
    Begin Date The start date for the task.
    Date End The ending date for the task.
    Description The name or description of the task form the task setup as it appears on the calendar.
    Quantity How many of the current resource are set for use by the task.
    Notes The notes from the Notes Tab of the current resource.
    The New Button is grayed out on this tab as it is not possible to add a Task to a Resource. It is possible to add a resource to a task.
    Opens the selected Task Resource Detail window in order to edit the resource details as they pertain to that task.
    Deletes the resource from the Task.
    Opens the selected Task for editing.
    Drop-down that allows searching the Task list for All Resources, by Task Description, or by Task Begin Date.

    G/L Entries and Transactions

    G/L Entries

  19. The G/L Entries tab shows all G/L entries associated with the specific resource.
  20. Transactions

  21. The Transactions tab shows each transaction associated with the resource. This tab and the G/L Entries tab will be populated as you use the resource and has no set up requirements.
  22. Adding a Resource

    To add a resource to the database, you perform the following steps:

    1. Click Setup >> System Tables >> Resources.

      The Resource List window opens.Cick here for more information on this window.

    2. Click the New button.

      A blank Resource Detail Window opens. Click here for a detailed description of this window and its tabs.

    3. Enter a Resource Code.
    4. Enter a Resource Description that will show on lists in Theatre Manager of resources (the name of the resource).
    5. Select a Resource Group.

      For more information on Resource Groups, click here.

    6. Enter an External Description for the resource

      This is a name for the resource that could be published online.

    7. If you like, you can add a Picture of the Resource by dragging and dropping.

    8. Click the Accounting tab and enter an expense or liability account in the Cost of Goods line and an income account in the Income Account line.

      For a complete description of this tab, Click here.

    As required, you can enter other information in the:

    Editing a Resource

    1. Click Setup >> System Tables >> Resources

      The Resource List Window will appear.

    2. Highlight a Resource from the list by single-clicking on it.
    3. Click the Open button.

      The Resource Detail Window will open for the selected Resource.

    4. Edit the information for the Resource as required.
    5. Click the Save button.

    Delete a Resource

    1. Click Setup >> System Tables >> Resources

      The Resource List Window will appear.

    2. Highlight a Resource from the list by single-clicking on it.
    3. Click the Delete button.
    4. A new window will appear.

    5. Click the Delete button.

    Tax Tables

    The Tax Rates Window can be accessed through the Setup >> System Tables >> Tax Tables Menu. The tax table displays all current taxes which have been setup for use with Theatre Manager. From the window you can also insert, edit and delete taxes.

    The Tax Rates List Window will open.

    Click here for more information on the Tax Rates List.

    Tax Rate List

    Parts of the Tax Rate List Window

    Accesses the Help section for this window.
    Inserts new Tax Rate. For more information on inserting tax rates click here.
    Edits the selected Tax Rate. For more information on editing tax rates click here.
    Copies the selected tax rate.
    Deletes the selected Tax Rate. Click Here to learn how to delete tax rates.
    Generates a report of the tax rates to the screen or default print location.
    Exports a list of tax rates in a tab-delimited format.
    Tax The name of the tax.
    Active Will show either Yes the tax rate is active for use or No it is not Active for use.
    City Rate The portion of the tax rate that applies to City or municipality tax.
    State/PST Rate The percentage rate of the tax that applies to State or Provincial taxes.
    GST/Federal Rate The portion of the tax rate that applies to Federal or GST taxes.

    Tax Rate Detail Window

    Parts of the Tax Rate Detail Window

    Inserts new Tax Rate. For more information on inserting tax rates click here.
    Saves changes made to the selected Tax Rate.
    Duplicates the selected Tax Rate.
    Undoes changes to the last saved point.
    Deletes the selected Tax Rate. For more information on deleting tax rates click here.
    Tax Code Name of the tax rate.
    Setup for the City or Municipal portion of the tax code. For more information on this tab, click here.
    Setup for the State or Provincial portion of the tax code. For more information on this tab, click here.
    Setup for the Federal or GST portion of the tax code. For more information on this tab, click here.
    List of the G/L journal entries for each instance of the tax code's usage. For more information on this tab, click here.

    The names for the City, State/PST, and Federal/GST tabs can be set in Setup > System Preferences > Appearance Tab to reflect whichever is the suitable option. Our examples here show both names - but depending on your location, you may set them appropriately. More information can be found here.

    City Tax Tab

    Parts of the City Tax Tab

    Tax Number Your organization's tax ID number for City taxes.
    Tax Rate The percentage of the tax rate that applies to City taxes.
    Deferred Tax Account Deferral account number from your Chart of Accounts for the City tax. For more information about the Chart of Accounts in Theatre Manager, click here.
    Tax Payable Account Liability account from your Chart of Accounts for the City tax.

    State/PST Tax Tab

    Parts of the State/PST Tax Tab

    Tax Number Your organization's tax ID number.
    Tax Rate The percentage of the tax rate that applies to State or PST taxes.
    Deferred Tax Account Deferral account number from your Chart of Accounts for the State/PST tax. For more information about the Chart of Accounts in Theatre Manager, click here.
    Tax Payable Account Liability account from your Chart of Accounts for the State/PST tax.
    Apply To Base Sale Price Only When selected, this option will apply the percentage set above to only the base price of the ticket or pass (parallel method).
    Apply To Base + City When selected, this option will apply the percentage set above to the base price plus the City price set in the City Tab(cumulative method).
    Apply To Base + Federal/GST When selected, this option will apply the percentage set above to the base price plus the Federal/GST tax set in the Federal/GST Tab(cumulative method).
    Apply To Base + City + Federal/GST When selected, this option will apply the percentage set above to the base price plus the City tax and plus the Federal/GST tax (cumulative method).

    Federal/GST Tax Tab

    Parts of the Federal/GST Tax Tab

    Tax Number Your organization's tax ID number.
    Tax Rate The percentage of the tax rate that applies to Federal or GST taxes.
    Deferred Tax Account Deferral account number from your Chart of Accounts for the Federal/GST tax. For more information about the Chart of Accounts in Theatre Manager, click here.
    Tax Payable Account Liability account from your Chart of Accounts for the Federal/GST tax.
    Apply To Base Sale Price Only When selected, this option will apply the percentage set above to only the base price of the ticket or pass (parallel method).
    Apply To Base + City When selected, this option will apply the percentage set above to the base price plus the City price set in the City Tab(cumulative method).
    Apply To Base + State/PST When selected, this option will apply the percentage set above to the base price plus the State/PST tax set in the State/PST Tab(cumulative method).
    Apply To Base + City + State/PST When selected, this option will apply the percentage set above to the base price plus the City tax and plus the State/PST tax (cumulative method).

    G/L Entries Tab

    Parts of the G/L Entries Tab

    View Selection Drop-down (set to All G/L Entries in the example) Choose which entries you want to see in the list and then click the lookup button to view the list. The default is All G/L Entries.
    Journal # The unique Journal # for the entry
    Description The type of journal entry it is (ie. Sales Posting)
    Date The posting date for the entry.
    Debit The Debit amount of the entry (if applicable)
    Credit The Credit amount for the entry.
    Not available.
    Opens the selected entry for viewing/editing.
    Not available.

    Inserting a Tax Code

     

    1. Click Setup >> System Tables >> Tax Tables.
    2.  

    3. The Tax Rates List window will appear.

       

       

      Click Here for a detailed description of this window.

    4.  

    5. Click the New button.

       

      The Tax Rate Detail Window will open.

       

       

      Click Here for a detailed description of this window.

    6.  

    7. Enter the Tax Code name.

       

      This is the name that will be displayed anywhere the Tax Code can be selected.

    8.  

    9. Enter the tax number in the City tab.
    10.  

    11. Enter the Tax Rate percentage that applies to City taxes for the overall rate.
    12.  

    13. Click the Lookup button next to the Deferred Tax Account field.
    14.  

    15. Select the G/L account the city tax should be applied to.
    16.  

    17. Click the Lookup button next to the Tax Payable Account field.
    18.  

    19. Select the G/L account the city tax should be applied to.
    20.  

    21. Select the State/PST tab.
    22.  

    23. Enter the tax number in the State/PST tab.
    24.  

    25. Enter the Tax Rate percentage.
    26.  

    27. Click the Lookup button next to the Deferred Tax Account field.
    28.  

    29. Select the G/L account the city tax should be applied to.
    30.  

    31. Click the Lookup button next to the Tax Payable Account field.
    32.  

    33. Select the Federal/GST tab.
    34.  

    35. Enter the tax number in the Federal/GST tab.
    36.  

    37. Enter the Tax Rate percentage.
    38.  

    39. Click the Lookup button next to the Deferred Tax Account field.
    40.  

    41. Select the G/L account the city tax should be applied to.
    42.  

    43. Click the Lookup button next to the Tax Payable Account field.
    44.  

    45. Select the G/L account the Federal/GST tax should be applied to.
    46.  

    47. Click the Save button to save the tax.

     

    Editing Tax Codes

    1. Open the Tax Rates window.

      Click here to learn how to access this window.

    2. Select the tax code you wish to edit.

      Do this by single clicking on the value.

    3. Click the Open button.

      The tax rate detail window will open with the data for the selected tax code.

    4. Change data as required.
    5. Click the Save button.

    Deleting a Tax Code

    Tax Codes can only be deleted if they have not been used for any transactions in Theatre Manager.

    1. Open the Tax Rates window.

      Click here to learn how to access this window.

    2. Select the tax code to delete.

      Do this by single clicking on the value.

    3. Click the Delete button.
    4. A new window will appear.

    5. Click the Delete button.

    Fee Tables

    The Fee Type window is opened through the Setup >> System Tables >> Fee Tables. From this window you add, remove and edit Fee Tables.

    The Fee Table window opens.

    Fee Type Detail Window

    Parts of the Fee Type Window

    Accesses the Help section for this window.
    Inserts a new fee. For more information on inserting fees click here.
    Saves changes made to the fee.
    Creates a copy of the current fee.
    Undoes changes to the last saved point.
    Deletes the current fee. For more information about deleting fees, click here.
    Not yet available in this window.
    Checks the spelling of fields that can be typed in.
    Description Name given to the fee.
    Outlet Outlet responsible for the fee.
    Status When checked the fee is active and can be used.
    Details about the fee. For more information on the description tab click here.
    Calculations for the fee. For more information on the calculation tab click here.
    Rules of the fee. For more information on the edits tab click here.
    An optional list of performances to which the fee can be applied. For more information on the performances tab click here.
    Sales notes about the fee. For more information about the notes tab click here.
    G/L entries for the fee. For more information on the G/L entries tab click here.

    Description Tab

    Parts of the Description Tab

    External Name Name of the fee as it will appear on the internet or a ticket face.
    Effective Starting date the fee can be applied.
    Accesses a calendar to select dates.
    Thru Ending date the fee can be applied.
    G/L Account General ledger account to apply this fee to.
    Search button to access a list of G/L accounts.
    Statistics Fee will be included in the patron statistics.
    Automatic Fee will be added to the order automatically based on the edit controls in the edits tab.

    Calculation Tab

    Parts of the Calculation Tab

    Default Fee Amount -

    Default Amount Value of the fee prior to tax calculations.
    Per Order Fee is applied once to the order.
    Per Item Charge the fee in a multiple of the number of items purchased.
    Percentage Set a percentage for the fee of either the total order or the items in the order, based on the radio button choice above, rather than a flat dollar amount.
    To Maximum Maximum amount to be charged for this.
    Allow fee to be changed Fee can be edited at the time of purchase.

    Tax Setting -

    Tax Rate Tax rate to be applied to this fee.

    Sample Price Calculator -

    Effect on fee of A temporary value entered to view the effect of the calculation.
    City Value of the city tax based on the tax rate and Effect on fee of.
    State/PST Value of the State/PST tax based on the tax rate and Effect on fee of.
    Federal/GST Value of the Federal/GST tax based on the tax rate and Effect on fee of.
    Net Price If selected mailing fees will be refunded
    Subtracts the tax from the Effect on fee of value based on the tax rate.

    Edits Tab

    Parts of the Edits Tab

    Allow fee to be used during -

    Coupon Code Fee is tied to the use of a coupon code at checkout.
    New Sale Applies during a new order.
    Modify Applies to orders being edited.
    Exchange Applies to orders where items are being exchanged.
    Exchange Tickets Applies fee to only exchanged tickets.
    Purchase Tickets Applies fee to exchanged and newly purchased tickets.

    Allow fee to be used when entering by -

    Box Office Fee is applied to box office sales items.
    Before Event/Pay What You Can Fee is applied during Before Event Sales and Pay What You Can mode of sale.
    Development Fee is applied to development sales items.
    Internet/Web Sales Fees is applied to internet sales items.

    Only apply fee to -

    Tickets Applies fee when ever a ticket is sold.
    Regular Admission Fee is applied to any tickets sold using regular admission accounting.
    Season Ticket Fee is applied to any tickets sold using season ticket accounting.

    Other-Type 1

    Fee is applied to any tickets sold using other-type 1 accounting.

    Other-Type 2

    Fee is applied to any tickets sold using other-type 2 accounting.
    Other-Type 3 Fee is applied to any tickets sold using other-type 3 accounting.
    Membership Applies fee when ever a membership is purchased.
    Donation Applies fee when ever a donation is made.
    Payments Applies fee to all payments when a condition below is selected.
    Internet/Web Sales Fee is applied to orders when the order is made over the internet.
    Telephone Order Fee is applied to orders when the telephone option is checked in the payment window.
    Mail Order Fee is applied to orders when the mail order option is checked in the payment window.
    Patron Present Fee is applied to orders when the patron present option is checked in the payment window.
    Mail to Patron Applies the fee when the mail to patron option is selected in the payment window.

    Performances Tab

    Parts of the Performances Tab


    Leaving this list blank will default to the fee being applicable to all performances.

    Exclude Selected Performances When selected, the fee will be excluded from the performances listed.
    Apply to Selected Performances When selected, the fee will apply to only the performances listed.
    Play The Seq # of the event(s) in the list.
    Performance The performance(s) code for the events in the list
    Date The date of the performance(s).
    Time The time of the performance(s).
    Play Title The full title of the event(s)
    Year The fiscal year of the play(s)
    Theatre Name The name of the theatre that the coupon can be used for.
    Opens the performance lookup list window to allow the selection of performances.
    Delete the current selected performance from the list.

    Notes Tab


    Enter notes in this tab that pertain to the usage of this particular fee. Notes are for internal use only.

    G/L Entries Tab


    As journal entries are created and posted, each instance of the fee's usage will be recorded in the G/L Entries Tab for your reference.

    Creating a New Fee

    1. Open the Fee Types List.

      Click here to learn how to access the Fee Types List.

    2. Click the New button.

      The Fee Type Detail window will appear.

    3. Enter the Fee Type Description.
    4. Enter the description details as needed.

      For more information on the description tab click here.

    5. Click the Calculation tab.
    6. Enter the calculation information as needed.

      For more information on the calculation tab click here.

    7. Click the Edits tab.
    8. Enter the edit preferences as needed.

      For more information on the edits tab click here.

    9. Click the Performances tab.
    10. Enter the edit preferences as needed.

      For more information on the performances tab click here.

    11. Click the Notes tab.
    12. Enter notes as needed.

      For more information on the notes tab click here.

    13. Click the Save button.

      The fee is now saved and to be applied to future orders.

    Editing a Fee Type

    1. Open the Fee Types List window.

      Click here to learn how to access the Fee Types List.

    2. Select the Fee to be edited.

      Single click on a fee to select it.

    3. Click the Edit button.

      The Fee Type Detail window will appear.

    4. Make changes as needed.
    5. Click the Save button.

      The changes are now saved.

    Deleting a Fee Type

    1. Open the Fee Types List window.

      Click here to learn how to access the Fee Types List.

    2. Select the Fee to be deleted.

      Single click on a fee to select it.

    3. Click the Delete button.

      The Delete Record confirmation window will appear.

    4. Click the Delete button.

      The fee is now deleted.

    Coupon and Pre-Access Codes

    The Coupon Codes window is opened through Setup >> System Tables >> Coupon Codes. From this window you can add, remove and edit Coupon Codes.

    The Coupon Codes List window opens.

    Coupon Codes List Window

    Parts of the Coupon Code List Window

    Inserts a new coupon code. For more information on inserting coupon codes click here.
    Opens the selected coupon code for editing. For more information on editing coupon codes click here.
    Creates a copy of the current coupon code.
    Deletes the current coupon code. For more information on deleting coupon codes click here.
    Generates a report of the coupon codes to the screen or default print location.
    Exports out a list of the coupon codes in a tab-delimited format.
    Options to search for coupon codes by.
    From Starting point for the search.
    To Ending point for the search.
    Coupon Name Name of the coupon code.
    Coupon Code Name of the verbal code used to enact coupon as payment.
    Outlet-Owner Outlet responsible for the fee.
    Start Date Date that the coupon is available for use.
    End Date Date that the coupon is unavailable for use.
    Max. Uses Maximum number of times that the coupon may be used before becoming inactive.
    Current Uses Current number of times that the coupon has been used.
    Discount Total amount of discount given by coupon code.

    Coupon Codes Discount Detail Window

    Parts of the Coupon Code Discount Detail Window

    Accesses the Help section for this window.
    Inserts a new coupon code.
    For more information on creating coupon codes for discounts click here.
    For more information on creating coupon codes for order fees click here.
    For more information on creating coupon codes for presale access click here.
    Saves changes made to the coupon code.
    Creates a copy of the current coupon code.
    Undoes changes to the last saved point.
    Deletes the current coupon code. For more information on deleting coupon codes click here.
    Checks the spelling of fields that can be typed in.
    Internal Description Internal name given to the coupon code.
    External Description External name given to the coupon code to be displayed on web.
    Coupon Code Verbal code used by patrons to enact coupon code as a form of payment.
    Status When checked the coupon is active and can be used.
    Details about the coupon code. For more infomation on the Availability Tab click here.
    Promotions for the coupon type. For more information on the Promotions Tab click here.
    Applicable performances for the coupon. For more information on the Performances Tab click here.
    List window of patrons and orders that have used the coupon code. For more information on the Redemptions Tab click here.

    Availability Tab

    Parts of the Availability Tab

    Redemption Details

    Redeemable From Date that the coupon is available for use.
    Redeemable Until Date that the coupon is no longer available for use.
    Accesses a calendar to select dates.
    Restricted to Mail List Coupon is only available to members of selected mail list.
    Accesses the Mail List Lookup window to select Mail List.
    Enable Coupon Discounts to be applied when used - check this for coupon codes that are to apply a discount.
    Presale access via internet - check this for coupon codes that allow patrons to purchase tickets before they are available to the general public.

    One-Time Order Discount

    Associated Order Fee Order Fee that is applied when this coupon is used.
    Search button to access the Fee Lookup List.

    Usage Limits

    Coupons available The number of times that this coupon can be used before it becomes inactive. Leave blank to disable this feature.
    Used Coupons The current number of times that this coupon has been used.
    Coupons in web carts The number of coupons currently in shopping carts.

    Redeemable At

    Internet Sales Check this box if this coupon can be used in conjunction with a Web Sale.
    Box Office Check this box if this coupon can be used in conjunction with a sale at the Box Office.

    Promotions Tab

    Parts of the Promotions Tab

    Pc From Promotion that will be converted when this coupon is used.
    Original Promotion
    Pc To Promotion that will be used when this coupon is used.
    Promotion
    Max Use Maximum number of tickets per order that this coupon can be used to receive a discount.
    Current Use Current number of tickets that this coupon has been used to receive a discount.
    Date Updated Last date that this coupon was edited or changed.
    Opens the window allowing for the creation of a new promotion conversion. Click here for more information on this feature.
    Opens the currently selected promotion conversion.
    Deletes the currently selected promotion conversion.

    Promotions Conversion Pop-up

    Parts of the Promotions Conversion Window

    Accesses the Help section for this window.
    Inserts a new promotion conversion for the coupon code. For more information on inserting coupon codes click here.
    Saves changes made to the coupon code promotion conversion.
    Creates a copy of the current promotion conversion for this coupon code.
    Undoes changes to the last saved point.
    Deletes the current promotion conversion. For more information on deleting coupon codes click here.
    Checks the spelling of fields that can be typed in.

    Convert From Price Code/Promotion

    Price Code Price code that will be changed when this coupon is used. Leave blank to allow for all price codes.
    Promotion Promotion that will be changed when this coupon is used.
    Opens the promotions list window in order to search for a promotion.

    Convert To Price Code/Promotion

    Price Code Price code that will be effective when this coupon is used. Leave blank to not change the price code.
    Promotion Promotion that will be effective when this coupon is used.
    Opens the promotion list window in order to search for a promotion.
    Maximum Uses The maximum number of uses this conversion can be used for.
    Current Uses The current number of total tickets that this coupon has been used for.
    Coupon in Carts The count of tickets in shopping carts pending usage.

    Performance Tab

    Parts of the Performance Tab

    Event # The # of the event(s) the coupon can be used for.
    Event The name of the event(s) that the coupon can be used for.
    Performance The performance(s) that the coupon can be used for.
    Date The date of the performance(s).
    Time The time of the performance(s).
    Event Title The full title of the event(s) that the coupon can be used for.
    Year The fiscal year of the play(s) that the coupon can be used for.
    Theatre Name The name of the theatre that the coupon can be used for.
    Perf # The performance number.
    Opens the performance lookup list window to allow the selection of performances that the coupon is valid for.
    Delete the current selected performance from the list of valid performances for the coupon.

    Redemptions Tab

    The redemptions tab displays a list of every instance when the coupon was redeemed. The table below indicates the default columns on the list, but they can be changed to suit your needs. For more information on changing your column preferences, click here.

    Seq #
    Trans Date
    Journal No
    Code
    Transaction Desc
    Order #
    Event
    Performance
    Type
    Description of Entry
    Debit
    Credit
    User
    Qty
    Total
    Trans Year-Annual Stats Year
    First Name
    Last Name
    Company
    Patron #
    Patron #
    Campaign Name (Internal)
    Description
    Promotion
    Group
    Merchant
    Patron #
    Event Title
    Event Code
    Company Owner
    Company Other
    GL #
    Fee

    Implementing Coupon Codes

    The following topics indicate how to implement coupon codes for redemption and/or presales access within Theatre Manager

    Creating a Coupon Code for Ticket Discounts

    Using Theatre Manager, you can create Ticket Discount coupon codes.
    You can create coupon codes for both ticket discounts and presale access. For more information on creating coupons for presale access, click here.

    To create a Coupon Code for Ticket Discounts, you perform the following steps:

    1. Open the Coupon Codes List window.

      Click here to learn how to access the Coupon Codes List window.

    2. Click the New button.

      The Coupon Code Discount Detail window will appear.

    3. Enter the Coupon Code Description.
      The internal description will only be displayed in Theatre Manager and the external description will be displayed for web sales.
    4. Enter the code that the Patron will use to receive the coupon discount in the Coupon Code box.
    5. Enter the availability tab details as needed.

      For more information on the availability tab click here.

    6. Click the Save button.

      The promotion, performance and redemption tabs will now become available.

    7. Click the Promotions tab
      For more information on the promotions tab click here.
    8. Click on the New button at the bottom of the window and create a promotion conversion.
      For more information on promotion conversions click here.
    9. Click the Performance tab.
    10. Click on the New button at the bottom of the window.

      For more information on the performance tab click here.

      The Performance List Lookup window will open.

    11. Select the performance(s) that the coupon will be used for.

      To select multiple performances, use the CTRL key (Windows) or the OPTION key (Mac).

    12. Press the Select button.
    13. Click the Save button.

      The Coupon Code has now been created. Click here for more information on editing a Coupon Code or click here for more information on deleting a Coupon Code.

    Creating a Coupon to Add/Remove an Order Fee

    Coupon codes are useful to add fees to or remove fees from an order.

    You can create coupon codes for both order fees and presale access. For more information on creating coupons for presale access, click here.

    1. Create the order fee.
      Click here for more information on creating fees.
    2. Ensure the fee you create has the option checked to be allowed to be used during coupon code.

    3. Open the Coupon Codes List window.

      Click here to learn how to access the Coupon Codes List window.

    4. Click the New button.

      The Coupon Code Discount Detail window opens.

    5. Enter the Coupon Code Description.
      The internal description is displayed in Theatre Manager and the external description is displayed for web sales.
    6. Enter the code the Patron will use to receive the coupon discount in the Coupon Code box.
    7. Check the Discounts to be applied when use box.
    8. Enter the order fee number in the One-Time Order Discount - Associated Order Fee box.
      You can search for the order fee by pressing the Search button.


      The fields described above, are the only fields required to be filled out on the Availability tab for the order fee coupon to work. The other fields do not apply, or are optional. For more information on the Availability tab click here.
    9. Click the Save button.

      The promotion, performance and redemption tabs are now available.

    10. Click the Performance tab.
    11. Click the New button at the bottom of the window.

      For more information on the Performance tab click here.

      The Performance List Lookup window opens.

    12. Select the performance(s) the coupon will be used for.

      To select multiple performances, use the CTRL key (Windows) or the OPTION key (Mac).

    13. Press the Select button.
    14. Click the Save button.

      The Coupon Code has now been created. Click here for more information on editing a Coupon Code or click here for more information on deleting a Coupon Code.

    Creating a Coupon for Presale Access

    You can set-up coupons to allow patrons to have presale access to buy tickets online before they go on sale to the general public.

    You can set-up coupons to be used both presale access, as well as ticket discounts or order fees. For more information on creating coupons for ticket discounts, click here. For more information on creating coupons for order fees, click here.

    1. Ensure the performance has a future onsale date.
      - Go to Events/Plays
      - Select the Event/Play
      - Click on the Performances tab
      - Double-click on the performance
      - Click on the Sales Management tab
      - Input future on sale dates for the internet/box office
      - Save
      Click here for more information on Events/Plays and Performances.
    2. Open the Coupon Codes List window.

      Click here to learn how to access the Coupon Codes List window.

    3. Click the New button.

      The Coupon Code Discount Detail window will appear.

    4. Enter the Coupon Code Description.
      The internal description will only be displayed in Theatre Manager and the external description will be displayed for web sales.
    5. Enter the code that the Patron will use to receive the coupon discount in the Coupon Code box.
    6. Enter the availability Redeemable dates.
      The dates you enter will be before the future onsale date you entered in Step 1.
    7. Click the Save button.

      The Presale access via internet field, promotion, performance and redemption tabs will now become available.

    8. If using, enter a mail list number in the Restricted to Mail List field.

      This is not required but it will allow only patrons on the mail list to use the presale access coupon.

    9. Place a check in the Presale access via internet box.
    10. Place a check in the Redeemable at Sales Source - Internet Sales box.
      The fields described above are the fields required to be filled out on the Availability tab in order for the presale coupon to work. The others do not apply or are optional. For more information on the availability tab click here.
    11. Click the Performance tab.
    12. Click on the New button at the bottom of the window.

      For more information on the performance tab click here.

      The Performance List Lookup window will open.

    13. Select the performance(s) that the coupon will be used for.

      To select multiple performances, use the CTRL key (Windows) or the OPTION key (Mac). The selected performances will need to have the future onsale date set as in Step 1.

      If a performance does not have a check in "Allow Selling - Via The Internet" under Event >> Performance Tab, if it is added to the Coupon Code Performance Tab, online ticket selling will still be available. Online selling will only be available until the future onsale date, when tickets go on sale to the public.

    14. Press the Select button.
    15. Click the Save button.

      The Coupon Code for Presale Access has now been created and can be used online.

    Enabling Coupon as a Payment Method

    If you do not see Coupon listed as a payment method type on the payment method drop down, it will need to be activated.

    1. Go to Setup >> System Tables >> Code tables to access the code table window.
      For more detailed information on accessing the Code Table window, click here.
    2. Select Payment Methods in the Code Table list.

      For more information on Code Table Payment Methods, click here.
    3. Double-click on Coupon in the Code Table Entries list.
    4. Set the coupon to be Active.
    5. Select the coupon availability.
      Select whether the coupon payment method will be available as a payment method at the Box Office, Internet Sales, Development or a combination of the three.
    6. Click the Save button.
    7. Close the detail and code table list window.
      Coupon will now be available as a payment method.

    Using Coupons at the Box Office

    Coupon codes can be redeemed at the box office provided box office is selected under the coupon code's availability tab. For more information on the Availability Tab, click here.

    1. Access the Payments window during the order before the payment is to be made.
      For more information on accessing the payment window, click here.
    2. Select Coupon as the Payment Method.
      Coupon # and Coupon Quantity Boxes will now be displayed.
      If coupon is not an entry in the drop down list of payment methods, it will need to be enabled. For more information on enabling coupon as a payment method, click here.
    3. Type the coupon code in the Coupon # box.
      Alternatively you may wish to look-up the coupon code by using the Search button. This button will open the Coupon Code List window. For more information on the Coupon Code list, click here.
    4. Type in the quantity of coupons to be applied to the order in the Coupon Quantity box.
    5. Click the Accept Payment button.
      You will receive a message indicating the coupon was accepted if the coupon was applicable to the order. The coupon will have been applied to the order and the order total will change.

      If the coupon is not accepted, make sure the coupon code is set-up to allow the selected performance, price code and promotion.
    6. Choose another payment method to finish processing the order.
      For more information on creating payments, click here.

    Editing a Coupon Code

    1. Open the Coupon Codes List window.

      Click here to learn how to access the Coupon Codes List.

    2. Select the Coupon Code to be edited.

      Single click on a fee to select it.

    3. Click the Open button.

      The Coupon Code Discount Detail window will appear.

    4. Make changes as needed.
    5. Click the Save button.

      The changes are now saved and the window can be closed.

    Deleting a Coupon Code

    1. Open the Coupon Codes List window.

      Click here to learn how to access the Coupon Codes List.

    2. Select the Coupon Code to be deleted.

      Single click on a Coupon Code to select it.

    3. Click the Delete button.

      The Delete Record confirmation window will appear as long as the Coupon Code has not been used in any transactions.

    4. Click the Delete button.

      The Coupon Code is now deleted.

    Report Card Templates

    A report card template can be assigned to a specific course to evaluate Patrons/students enrolled in that course. The report card allows a standardized grading system to be used for all students, and the template can be used across multiple classes as a "base" form.

    For more information about report cards, click here. For more about how to set up and utilize courses within Theatre Manager, click here.

    The Report Card Template List Window

    To access templates for Report Cards, go to Setup > System Tables > Report Card Templates:

    Parts of the Report Card List Window

    Inserts a new report card template For more information on inserting report card templates click here.
    Opens the selected report card template for editing. For more information on editing report card templates click here.
    Creates a copy of the current template.
    Deletes the current report card template. For more information on deleting report card templates click here.
    Generates a report of the list of report card templates to the screen or default print location.
    Exports out a list of the report card templates in a tab-delimited format.
    Template drop-down Options to search the report card template list.
    From Starting point for the search.
    To Ending range for your search.
    Template # The unique number for that report card template in the database.
    Template The name assigned to the report card template.
    Entered The date that report card template was entered into the database.
    Updated The date the report card template was updated.
    Active Indicates if report card template is marked Active.

    Adding a Report Card Template

    Categories must be set up before adding Report Cards. Click here for more information on setting up Report Card Categories.

    To create a template for Report Cards, you perform the following steps:

    1. Select Setup >> System Tables >> Report Card Templates.

      The Report Card Template List window opens.

    2. Click the New button.

      The Report Card Template Insert Window opens.

    3. Enter a descriptive name for the new template.
    4. Click the Add Categories button.

      The Categories list populate from the Report Card Category code tables. Click here for more information on setting up Report Card Categories.

    5. Click on each Category in turn, and enter specific items for Ratings in the fields on the right.

      For example, under Contribution, one item might be Class Participation and another might be Peer Feedback.

      These are the items for which students will be given Ratings. For information about setting up Report Card Ratings, click here.

      Continue entering Descriptions.

    6. When you have completed entered Categories and Items in each Category for Ratings, click the Save button.

      The Usage Tab in the Report Card Template displays the instances of the Template's use in Courses. You can also add report cards to or delete report cards from a Course from the Usage Tab.

      For more information about assigning Report Cards, click here.

    Editing a Report Card Template

    To edit an existing Report Card Template, you perform the following steps:

    1. Open the Report Card Template List window.

      Click here to learn how to access this window.

    2. Choose the template edit.

      Single click on a template to select it.

    3. Click the Open button.

      The Report Card Template Insert window will open.

    4. Change any data as necessary..
    5. When you have completed makeing your changes, click the Save button.

    Deleting a Report Card Template

    To permanently remove a Report Card template, you perform the following steps:
    1. Open the Report Card Template List window.

      Click here to learn how to access the Report Card Template List.

    2. Select the report card template you are deleting.

      Single click on a template to select it.

    3. Click the Delete button.

      The Delete Record confirmation window opens.

    4. Click the Delete button.

      The template is now deleted.

    City Lookup Table

    The City Lookup Table allows for automated insertion of the City, Province / State, Country when a specified Postal / Zip Code is entered.

    The City Lookup Table Window can be accessed through the Setup >> System Tables >> City Lookup Table Menus. If you already have a large database of patrons, Theatre Manager can automatically create a lookup list. Depending on the size of your database this process may take upwards of one hour.

    The City / Postal Code Window will open.

    Click here for a detailed description of this window and it's functions.

    List Window



    Parts of the City / Postal Code Lookup Window

    Postal Code / Zip Code The range of the postal / zip code which applies to the location.
    City The city with which the range is associated.
    County The range of the Counties (US) which apply to the location.
    Province / State The province / state with which the range is associated.
    Country Country of the entry as it appears in the Country table of Theatre Manager.
    Area Code Telephone area code for the entry.
    Time Zone Time zone the entry falls in.
    Inserts a New lookup value.
    Edits the selected value.
    Duplicates the selected value.
    Deletes the selected value
    Imports a list of predefined codes.
    Exports the lookup list.

    Lookup Detail Window

    The Lookup Detail Window allows you to enter additional values, or edit and existing value on a one-by-one basis. This can be useful if there are specific towns that are included in a particular postal/zip code that do not already exist on the list.



    For more information about the tab, click here.

    For more information about the tab, click here.

    Postal Code Tab



    Parts of the City / Postal Code Lookup Detail Window
    Postal Code Tab

    Postal Code Postal or zip code for the entry.
    City or Town City with which the range is associated.
    County County with which the range is associated
    Province Province or state with which the range is associated.
    Country Country of the entry as it appears in the Country table of Theatre Manager.
    Area Code Telephone area code for the entry.
    Time Zone Time zone the entry falls in.
    Observe Daylite Savings Time Indicate if the entry observes daylite savings by checking this option.
    Creates a new item in the lookup list.
    Saves changes made to a code.
    Copies an existing Code.
    Removes changes made to the Code up to the last save point.
    Deletes the selected value.

    Geographical Info Tab



    Parts of the City / Postal Code Lookup Detail Window
    Geographical Info Tab

    Latitude The accepted "center" (North/South) of the postal / zip code area.
    Longitude The accepted "center" (East/West) of the postal / zip code area.
    US FIPS55 Code Used for US zip codes, this is a specific categorization by the Geographic Names Information System. For more information, click here.

    Inserting a Lookup Value

    1. Open the City/Postal Code Lookup List Window.

      Click here to learn how to access this window.

    2. Click the New button.

      This will open the Postal Code Lookup Window.

    3. Enter the range of the postal / zip code
    4. Enter the city or town to which the entered range applies
    5. Enter the county to which the entered range applies.
    6. Enter the province/state to which the entered range applies.
    7. Use the drop down to select the Country to which the range applies.
    8. Enter the Area Code to which the range applies.
    9. Use the drop down to select the Time Zone to which the range applies.
    10. Check the box if this postal code participates in the Daylight Savings Time program.
    11. On the Geographical Info tab, enter the Latitude, Longitude, and (optionally) the USGS FIPS 55 Code.
    12. Click the Save button to save the changes.

      To cancel the insert, click the Revert button.

    Editing a Lookup Value

    1. Open the City/Postal Code Lookup List window.

      Click here to learn how to access this window.

    2. Select the lookup value you wish to edit.

      Do this by single clicking on the value to highlight it.

    3. Click the Open button.

      The Postal Code lookup for Window will open with the data for the selected value.

    4. Modify the details as needed.
    5. Click the Save button to save the changes.

      To cancel the edit click the Revert button.

    Deleting Existing Lookup

    1. Open the City/Postal Code Lookup List window.

      Click here to learn how to access this window.

    2. Select the lookup value you wish to delete.

      Single click on a value to select it.

    3. Click the Delete button.

      The following warning window will appear.

    4. Click the Delete button to continue with the deletion.

      Clicking the Cancel button will abort the deletion.

      The deletion will be confirmed with the following message at the top of the City / Postal Code Lookup List Window.

    Importing Values

    You can import your own list of values from a tab or comma delimited file into your database using the steps below.

    1. Open the City/Postal Code Lookup List window.

      Click here to learn how to access this window.

    2. Click the Import button

      The Import Data window will open.

    3. Click the Select button.
    4. Select the file you wish to import.

      Do this by single clicking the value.

    5. Click the Open button.

    Exporting a City Lookup Table

    1. Open the City/Postal Code Lookup List Window

      Click here to learn how to access this window.

    2. Click the Export button.

      The Select Postal Code Export File will open.

    3. Browse to where the file will be saved and name the file.
    4. Click the Save button.
    5. The table will be exported to the location using the file name assigned.

    Volunteer Signup Templates

    Added in Version 9.12

    Invoice Comments

    Invoice Comments are printed at the bottom of invoices for statements, payment reminders, and confirmation notices.

    The Invoice Comments Window is accessed through the Setup>>System Tables>>Invoice Comments Menu.

    This will open the Invoice Comments Window.

    Invoice Comments List Window

    Inserts a New comment through the Comment Detail Window. For more information on inserting comments click here.
    Opens a window to edit a comment through the Comment Detail Window. For more information on editing comments click here.
    Deletes a comment. For more information on deleting comments click here.
    Generates a report displaying the list of comments to the screen or default print location.
    Exports the selected invoice comments in text tab-delimited format.
    Description Search options for locating comments.
    From Starting range to search by.
    To Ending range to search by.
    Description Description of the comment.
    Minutes Prior Time prior to the event to arrive.
    Outlet Owner Outlet responsible for the comment.
    Changed By User initials of the last employee to edit the comment.

    Invoice Comments Detail Window

    Insert a New comment through the Comment Detail Window. For more information on inserting comments click here .
    Saves comments when edited in the Comment Detail Window. For more information on editing comments click here.
    Creates a copy of the current comment.
    Undoes changes to the last saved point.
    Deletes a comment. For more information on deleting comments click here.
    Checks the comment for spelling errors.
    Description Brief description of the nature of the comment.
    Comment The comments.
    Arrival Time before an event to arrive.

    Adding Invoice Comments

    1. Open the Invoice Comments window.

      Click here to learn how to access this window.

    2. Click the New button.

      The Invoice Comment Detail Window will open.

    3. Enter a name for your comment in the description field.

    4. Enter the details of the comment.

    5. If applicable enter the number of minutes the patron should arrive prior to the performance.

      If not applicable enter zero.

    6. Click the Save button to save the comment.

      The comment will be saved and added to the Invoice Comment window.

    Editing Invoice Comments

    1. Open the Invoice Comments window.

      Click here to learn how to access this window.

    2. Select the comment you wish to edit.

      Single click on a comment to select it.

    3. Click the Open button.

      The Invoice Comment Detail window will open.

    4. Change data as needed.
    5. Click the Save button to save the changes.

    Deleting Invoice Comments

    1. Open the Invoice Comments window.

      Click here to learn how to access this window.

    2. Select the comment you wish to delete.

      Single click on a comment to select it.

    3. Click the Delete button.

      A Confirmation Window will open.

    4. Click the Delete button.

    Plug-in Modules

    Plug-in's are special code segments that can be custom written for your venue. Their purpose is to enforce site specific rules during the sales process. For example, plug-ins could achieve the following kinds of special rules:

    • if more than 10 tickets are purchased, automatically change them to a group sale
    • provide preferred seating areas to donors of a certain level
    • limit ticket sales to certain events at certain times of the year to people who buy subscriptions
    • automatically convert ticket sales from single tickets to subscriptions if the customers buys a certain number of tickets.
    • automatically give subscribers (or frequent buyers) discounts on subsequent tickets.
    • prevent a sale for next season unless a donation is received.

    Plug-ins may be associated with specific sales promotions and also when checking out an order.

    If you want a plug-in, you must contact Arts Management and speak with someone in Software Development department. As Sales Plug-Ins are customized code, our standard custom programming rate per hour will apply.

    Purchasing a Plug-In

    If you want a plug-in, you must contact Arts Management and speak with someone in Software Development department. As Sales Plug-Ins are customized code, our standard custom programming rate per hour will apply.

    Plug-in List Window

    For information about how to access the Plug-in List Window, click here.

    Inserts a New Plug-in through the Plug-in Detail Window. For more information on inserting plug-ins click here.
    Opens the selected Plug-in Detail Window for editing. For more information on editing Plug-ins click here.
    Duplicates the selected Plug-in.
    Deletes a Plug-in. For more information on deleting Plug-ins click here.
    Generates a report displaying the list of Plug-ins to the screen or default print location.
    Exports the selected invoice comments in text tab-delimited format.

    Plug-in Detail Window

    Access the Plug-in Detail window by going to Setup > System Tables>Plug-in Modules and selecting the plug-in from the list of plug-ins. For more information on how to access the Plug-in List Window, click here.

    Insert a New Plug-in through the Plug-in Detail Window. For more information on inserting Plug-ins click here .
    Saves Plug-ins when added or edited in the Plug-in Detail Window. For more information on editing Plug-ins click here.
    Creates a copy of the current Plug-in.
    Undoes changes to the last saved point.
    Deletes a Plug-in. For more information on deleting Plug-ins click here.
    Checks the Plug-in for spelling errors.
    Exports the selected Plug-in.
    Imports a new Plug-in.

    Inserting a Plug-in Purchased from AMS

    1. Open the Plug-in List Window.

      For information on how to access the Plug-in List Window, click here.

    2. Click the New button to open a new Plug-in Detail Window.
    3. Enter a Name for the Plug-in in the Name Field.
    4. Drag-and-drop the .TM2 file containing the Plug-in Code provided by AMS into the PlugIn Code field.
    5. Click the Save button to save the new Plug-in record.

    Editing a Plug-in

    1. Open the Plug-in List window.

      Click here to learn how to access this window.

    2. Select the Plug-in you wish to edit.

      Single click on a Plug-in to select it.

    3. Click the Open button.

      The Plug-in Detail window will open.

    4. Change data as needed. Do not edit the Plug-in Code without first contacting Arts Management Systems.
    5. Click the Save button to save the changes.

    Deleting a Plug-in

    1. Open the Plug-in List window.

      Click here to learn how to access the Plug-in List.

    2. Select the Plug-in to be deleted.

      Single click on a Plug-in to select it.

    3. Click the Delete button.

      The Delete Record confirmation window will appear.

    4. Click the Delete button.

      The Plug-in is now deleted.

    Merchant Accounts

    Merchant Accounts provides Theatre Manager with details to communicate with the credit card processing software. Merchant Accounts can be access be clicking Setup >> System Tables >> Merchant Accounts.

    The Merchant Account List window will open.

    For more information on the Merchant Account List window click here.

    Merchant Account List Window

    Parts of the Merchant Account List Window

    Inserts a new merchant account. For more information on inserting merchant accounts click here.
    Opens the selected merchant account for editing. For more information on editing merchant accounts click here.
    Creates a copy of the current merchant account.
    Deletes the current merchant account. For more information on deleting merchant accounts click here.
    Generates a report of the merchant accounts to the screen or default print location.
    Exports out a list of merchant accounts in a tab-delimited format.
    Merch # Unique number used to define the merchant account.
    Merchant Description Name of the merchant account.

    Active

    Active status of the merchant account.
    Provider Name of the Merchant Provider contracted to authorize cards
    Description Card Server Description
    Outler-Owner Outlet responsible for the merchant account.

    Merchant Account Detail Window

    Parts of the Merchant Account Detail Window

    Inserts a new merchant account. For more information on inserting merchant accounts click here.
    Saves changes made to the currency merchant account.
    Creates a copy of the current merchant account.
    Undoes changes to the last saved point.
    Deletes the current Merchant Account. For more information on deleting merchant accounts click here.
    Checks the spelling of text fields within the merchant account detail window.
    Account Name Title for the merchant account.
    Status When checked the merchant account is available for use.
    Configuration settings for the server software of the merchant account. For more information on the software type tab click here.
    Access information for the credit card server and/or software. For more information on the connection info tab click here.
    Authorization settings for credit card authorization. For more information on the authorization tab click here.
    End of Day wizard settings for the merchant account. For more information on the settlement tab click here.
    Currency conversion settings (if applicable) for the merchant account. For more information on the currency tab click here.
    Merchant contact information for the service provider associated with the merchant account. For more information on the miscellaneous tab click here.
    The staff members in Theatre Manager who are permitted to use this merchant account. For more information on the Employees tab click here.
    The payment methods enabled for use with the merchant account. For more information on the Employees tab click here.

    Software Type Tab

    Parts of the Software Type Tab

    Server Status When checked credit card processing is enabled
    Sever Software Credit card processing software Theatre Manager will be communicating with.
    Merchant Provider Merchant provider responsible for credit card authorization.
    Server ID Merchant or client ID number issued by the merchant provider.
    Host Draft Capture Setting much match the merchant providers setting.
    Terminal Capture Setting much match the merchant providers setting.
    IP Address IP address of the computer hosting the credit card processing software.
    Port # Port number for the credit card processing software.
    Availability Check When checked Theatre Manager will ping the credit card processing computer to ensure its available.
    Merchant Number Merchant account number provided by the merchant provider to be printed on ticket receipt.

    Connection Info Tab

    This page is in development. It will contain information about the Connection Info Tab in the Merchant Account Detail Window.

    Authorization Tab

    Parts of the Authorization Tab

    Box Office Duplicates -

    Force Without Notify Transactions to the same card for the same value will not receive a warning indicating a possible duplicate charge to the credit card when checked.

    Internet Duplicates -

    No Duplicate Forcing Transactions to the same card for the same value will not be processed via the internet.
    Always Force Duplicates Transactions to the same card for the same value will be allowed via the internet.
    Smart Force Duplicates Theatre Manager will determine if the transaction should be processed based on the transaction details.

    Address Verification -

    Send Address/Zip Zip code and address is sent with the credit card information during processing for verification. This information can decrease processing fees in the USA were applicable.

    Walk Up Sales -

    Send Card Swipe Data Card swipe data is sent during processing for verification. This can decrease processing fees where applicable.
    Timeout Maximum time, in seconds, Theatre Manager will try to process a card.

    Settlement Tab

    Parts of the Settlement Tab

    Timeout This is the maximum time, in seconds, that Theatre Manager expects to take to send the completed deposit batch to the bank. Normally, 120 seconds is enough for most processors but if you have larger batches or are using some terminal based authorization, you may need to alter this value.

    The time out is how long Theatre Manager will wait for a response from the processor before giving up and telling you that it was unable to get any response. If a response is received from the bank processor within that time frame, no errors are generated.

    Settle Batch Frequency This indicates the number of days that Theatre Manager will allow process credit cards without settling the batch. After this threshold is exceeded without doing an End of Day, Theatre Manager will display a warning message telling you to close the batch and will not accept any credit cards at the box office.

    Note: Web sales ignores this setting and will process credit cards even if the batch has not been settled.

    Notify on Quit If checked, an employee will be notified that a batch needs settled when they quit Theatre Manager if it finds any credit cards older than one day that are not yet deposited. In other words, you will only be told if there are cards from a previous day that have not been deposited.
    Deposit Status This field is checked when an end of day is in process AND a credit card deposit is currently being done for this merchant account through Theatre Manager. You cannot check this box, you can only uncheck it if you are 100% sure there is no settlement occurring for this merchant account (i.e. nobody has end of day open). Unchecking it will reset the end of day and allow a settlement to occur.

    Currency Tab

    In development. This page will contain information about the Currency Tab in the Merchant Account Detail Window.

    For more information about setting up Currency Exchange details and rates, click here.

    Miscellaneous Tab

    The miscellaneous tab is used to provide contact information for your merchant provider. Please put information into these fields so that your staff will know who to contact in case of messages from the merchant provider like 'Hold Card' or 'Decline'. Clients using Orbital can use the information pictured for the name and phone number fields, then the email address of the organization's finance director or accountant. PC Charge clients will need to fill in contact details for their Merchant Provider or bank here.

    Employees Tab

    This is the list of employees that currently use this merchant account. If changing merchant accounts, you might need to change these employees to another merchant record.

    If you have multiple merchant accounts (or are retiring an old merchant provider), you can drag employees from the 'employee' tab in one merchant detail window to another to transfer them to another merchant provider.

    Cards Tab

    The credit cards accepted for authorization by this merchant account. Add cards from the Payment Methods defined in Code Tables here using the New button and remove cards no longer accepted with the Delete button. The Open button will open the selected card's Payment Method entry in Code Tables. For more information about setting up payment methods in Theatre Manager for use in a merchant account, click here.

    If you have multiple merchant accounts (or are retiring an old merchant provider), you can open up the card window on both merchant providers and drag the payment types from one merchant account to another. Any post dated payments associated with the old merchant account will be transferred to the new merchant account so they can be authorized in the future properly.

    Creating a Merchant Account

    1. Open the Merchant Account Setup window.

      Click here to learn how to access the Merchant Account List window.

    2. Click the New button.

      The Merchant Account Detail window will appear.

    3. Enter the Account Name of the Merchant Account.
    4. Make appropriate Server Software and Merchant Provider selections in their respective drop-down menus.
    5. Enter the PNS or Merchant Number provided you by your merchant provider.
    6. Click the Connection Info tab.
    7. Enter data in the Merchant Account Connection Info tab based on the information given you by your merchant provider.

      For more information on the Merchant Account Connection Info tab click here.

    8. Click the Authorization tab.
    9. Enter data in the Authorization tab.

      For more information on the edits and accounting tab click here.

    10. Click the Settlement tab.
    11. Enter data in the Settlement tab.

      For more information on the edits and accounting tab click here.

    12. Click the Save button.

      The new Merchant Account is now created.

    Editing a Merchant Account

    Editing a Merchant Account

    1. Open the Merchant Account List window.

      Click here to learn how to access Merchant Account List.

    2. Select the Merchant Account to be edited.

      Single click on a account to select it.

    3. Click the Edit button.

      The Merchant Account Detail window will appear.

    4. Make changes as needed.
    5. Click the Save button.

      The merchant account is now updated and saved.

    Deleting a Merchant Account

    Deleting a Merchant Account

    1. Open the Merchant Account List window.

      Click here to learn how to access the Merchant Account List window.

    2. Select the Merchant Account to be deleted.

      Single click on a Merchant Account to select it.

    3. Click the Delete button.

      The Delete Record confirmation window will appear.

    4. Click the Delete button.

      The Merchant Account is now deleted.

    Commissions

    Commission Setup allows for the setup of rates that Outlets may charge each other for cross outlet ticket sales in Theatre Manager. While charging commissions is not required from Outlet to Outlet, some of the setup is required, such as the Default Posting Accounts for Commissions.

    If you have multiple Outlets, you may have multiple commission structures to accommodate your sales contracts between different Outlets. For example, you may not charge the community theatre Outlet any fees as you provide a "pro bono" service to them. For another Outlet, you may charge a "dollar fee" based on tickets sold, and another may charge you a percentage based on the value of the ticket.

    The Commission Setup window will open.


    Commission Detail Window

    Parts of the Commission Detail Window

    Inserts a new commission.
    Saves changes made to the currency commission.
    Creates a copy of the current commission.
    Undoes changes to the last saved point.
    Deletes the current commission.
    Name Title of the commission.
    Status When checked the commission is active.
    Value of the commission.
    Rules and accounting for the commission.

    Creating a Commission

    You will need at least one commission table in order to allow for cross Outlet sales. The value of the commission table may be $0 if you are not charging a commission between Outlets, however you will still need the setup in order for Theatre Manager to function.


    To Create a New Commission Table:


    1. Open the Commission Setup window.

    2. Click the New button.
    3. The Commission Detail window will appear.


    4. Enter the Name of the commission.

    5. Enter data in the Commission Calculation tab.

    6. Click the tab.

    7. Enter data in the Edits and Accounting tab.

    8. Click the Save button.
    9. The new Commission is now created.

    Commission Calculation Tab

    The Commission Calculation tab is where you can set the parameters of how the commission is charged, including dollar amounts and/or percentages of the ticket value, and whether the commission is applied before or after discounts and markups (Sales Promotions) and fees.

    Parts of the Commission Calculation Tab

    Dollar Dollar value of the commission earned. Can be combined with a percentage.
    Minimum Minimum value of commission to be applied to any ticket sale.
    Apply to Comp Tickets Commission applies to issued comp tickets. Note: 'Comp' tickets cannot be sold by another Outlet, however you may have internal sales staff who are paid commissions on all ticket sales - including comps - within your own Outlet.
    And/or Percent Percentage of the commission earned. Can be combined with the dollar value.

    % commission calculation on:

    Full Price Commission is charged on the base ticket price before discounts, markups or fees.
    Discount Commission is charged once the discount or markup has effected the base ticket price.

    Ticket Fee 1

    Commission is charged on the ticket price including the value of ticket fee 1.
    Ticket Fee 2 Commission is charged on the ticket price including the value of ticket fee 2.
    Ticket Fee 3 Commission is charged on the ticket price including the value of ticket fee 3.
    City Commission is charged once the city tax is applied.
    State/PST Commission is charged once the state/PST is applied.

    Federal/GST

    Commission is charged once the Federal/GST is applied.

    Edits and Accounting Tab

    The Edits and Accounting tab allows you to set parameters regarding the avenue of sale (Box Office, Internet, Season Subscriptions), and the General Ledger (GL) accounts where commission funds will be placed for each Outlet. These GL accounts must be set up in Default Posting Accounts in order to be used here.

    Parts of the Edits and Accounting Tab


    Apply to:

    Box Office Sales Commission is received when the Outlet sells tickets via the box office.
    Internet Sales Commission is received when tickets are sold through the Outlet's internet sales.
    Subscription Sales Commission is received when season tickets are purchased through the Outlet. Note: Season Subscription data is not shared between Outlets and therefore cannot be sold cross Outlet. However, you may have internal telemarketers who are paid commissions on subscription renewals within your own Outlet.

    Posting accounts when sold by:

    Owner Outlet When checked commission fees will be allocated to the designated general ledger accounts when sold by the Outlet responsible for the event. This allows you to assign commissions payable for internal telemarketing staff.
    Commission Cost of Sales General ledger account the value of commissions will be posted to when sold by the Outlet responsible for the event.
    Payroll Liability General ledger account the payroll fees are to be posted to when tickets are sold by the Outlet responsible for the event.
    Other Outlets When checked commission fees will be allocated to the general ledger accounts when sold by an Outlet other then the owner of the event.
    Commission Cost of Sales General ledger account the value of commissions will be posted to when sold by an Outlet other then the owner of the event.
    Outlet Payable Account General ledger account the payroll fees are to be posted to when tickets are sold by an Outlet other then the owner of the the event.

    Editing a Commission

    In most cases, it is better to create a new commission table rather than editing an existing one as making changes to any commissions parameters that are currently in use could have adverse affects on your accounting generation. However, occasionally, you may need to edit an existing commission setup.


    To Edit an Existing Commission Table:


    1. Open the Commission Setup window.
    2. Double-click the Commission to be edited.
    3. The Commission Detail window will appear.

    4. Make changes as needed.
    5. Click the Save button.
    6. The changes are now saved.

    Deleting a Commission

    Commission Tables can only be deleted if they have not been used for sales. If you need to delete a commission table that was created in error, you may do so.


    To Delete an Existing Commission Table


    1. Open the Commission Setup window.
    2. Select the Commission to be deleted.
    3. Single click on a Commission to select it.

    4. Click the Delete button.
    5. The Delete Record confirmation window will appear.

    6. Click the Delete button.
    7. The Commission is now deleted.

    Currency Exchange

    Currency Exchange allows for the setup of exchange rates in Theatre Manager.

    The Currency Exchange List window will open.

    For more information on the Currency Exchange List window click here.

    Currency Exchange List

    Parts of the Currency Exchange List Window

    Inserts a new currency exchange rate. For more information on inserting currency exchange rates click here.
    Opens the selected currency exchange rate for editing. For more information on editing currency exchange rates click here.
    Creates a copy of the current exchange rate.
    Deletes the current currency exchange rate. For more information on deleting currency exchange rates click here.
    Generates a report of the currency exchange rates to the screen or default print location.
    Exports out a list of the currency exchange rates in a tab-delimited format.
    Currency Conv. Date Options to search currency exchange rate by.
    From Starting point for the search.
    Currency Conv. Date-Effective Date the currency exchange will take effect.
    Country From Country the money is received from.
    Country To Country the money is being used in.
    Currency Conversion Rate Percentage of the conversion rate.

    Currency Detail Window

    Parts of the Currency Detail Window

    Inserts a new currency exchange rate. For more information on inserting currency exchange rates click here.
    Saves changes made to the currency exchange rate.
    Creates a copy of the current currency exchange rate.
    Undoes changes to the last saved point.
    Deletes the current currency exchange rate. For more information on deleting currency exchange rates click here.
    Effective Date Date the exchange rate will be activated.
    Convert From Country the money is received from.
    Convert To Country the money is applied to.
    Exchange Rate Rate of exchange.
    Conversion Results Result of the conversion rate.

    Creating a Currency Exchange Rate

    1. Open the Currency Exchange window.

      Click here to learn how to access the Fee Types List.

    2. Click the New button.

      The Currency Detail window will appear.

    3. Enter the Effective Date.

      The calendar button to locate a date.

    4. Select the Convert From country using the drop down.
    5. Select the Convert To country using the drop down.
    6. Enter the Exchange Rate.
    7. Click the Save button.

      The new Currency Exchange is now saved.

    Editing a Currency Exchange Rate

    1. Open the Currency Exchange List window.

      Click here to learn how to access the Currency Exchange List.

    2. Select the Currency to be edited.

      Single click on a fee to select it.

    3. Click the Edit button.

      The Currency Detail window will appear.

    4. Make changes as needed.
    5. Click the Save button.

      The changes are now saved.

    Deleting a Currency Exchange Rate

    1. Open the Currency Exchange List window.

      Click here to learn how to access the Currency Exchange List.

    2. Select the Currency to be deleted.

      Single click on a fee to select it.

    3. Click the Delete button.

      The Delete Record confirmation window will appear.

    4. Click the Delete button.

      The Currency is now deleted.

    Employees, Users and Access

    Employee access permissions, preferences, and notification setting all fall under the Users and Access Menu in System Setup.

    Employee Setup

    Employees can have various levels of access to control their ability to use the different modules of Theatre Manager. Access to Employee Setup is through Setup >> Users and Access >> Employee List

    This will open the Employee List window where you can enter first and/or last name information to search for a specific employee, or simply hit enter while the search fields are blank to pull up a list of all employees.

    For more information on the Employee List click here.

    Employee List

    The Employee List window can be accessed through Setup >> Users and Access >> Employee List and is used to quickly locate an employee record or to generate a quick list of employees that can be printed.

    Parts of the Employee List Window

    Opens the Theatre Manager online help.
    This button is not accessible because new employees must be added through the Patron Window. It is on the window for consistency. For more information on adding employees click here.
    Opens the selected employee record for editing. For more information on editing employee access click here.
    This button is not accessible because new employees must be added through the Patron Window. It is on the window for consistency. For more information on adding employees click here.
    Deletes the selected employee. This button is only accessible if the employee can be deleted (if they have no history tied to their login). For more information on deleting employees click here.
    Generates a report of the employee list to the screen or default print location.
    Exports out the employee list in a tab-delimited format.
    Opens the Patron Window. For more information on the Patron Window, click here.
    Open the selected Employee Preferences for the selected employee. For more information on Employee Preferences, click here.
    Initials Unique employee initials.
    Last Name Last name of the employee.
    First Name First name of the employee.
    Address Line 1 Employee address.
    Address Line 2 Employee address.
    City City the employee resides in.
    Province Province or State the employee resides in.
    Postal Code Postal or Zip Code for the employee.
    Title Job title of the employee.
    Tran Source Department within Theatre Manager the employee is assigned to.
    Outlet-Owner If using outlet edition, the outlet the user is assigned to.
    Primary Phone Primary telephone number for the employee.
    Primary E-Mail Employee's primary email address.
    Primary Fax Employee's primary fax number.
    Web Employee's web site.
    Patron # Employee's patron #.
    The fields listed above are the default columns listed for the Theatre Map List window, but the columns can be changed to suit your needs. For more details on changing column preferences, click here.

    Finding Employees in the Employee List Window

    To find an employee, you would perform the following steps:

    1. Click Setup >> Users and Access >> Employee Setup

      The Employee List window will appear.

    2. Enter the search range for the employee in the From and To fields.

      To access all employees leave the From and To fields empty.

    3. Click the Search button.

      The results of the search will be displayed in the Employee List window.

      For more information on the Employee List window click here.

    Employee Access Window

    The Employee Window can be accessed in two different areas of Theatre Manager. It can be accessed through the Employee List at Setup > Users & Access > Employee List by selecting an employee and clicking the Open button. For more information on the Employee List click here.
    Alternatively, the Employee Window can be accessed through the Patron List or Window. It can be accessed through the Patron List by searching for and highlighting the employee and then clicking the Employee button, or by opening the employee's Patron window and clicking the Employee button. For more information on the Patron List, click here. For more information on the Patron Window, click here.

    Parts of the Employee Window

    Opens the Theatre Manager online help.
    This button is not accessible because new employees must be added through the Patron Window. It is on the window for consistency. For more information on adding employees click here.
    Saves any edits made to the Employee Window. For more information on editing employee access click here.
    This button is not accessible because new employees must be added through the Patron Window. It is on the window for consistency. For more information on adding employees click here.
    Reverts changes made to the employee preference back to the last saved point.
    This button is not accessible because employees cannot be deleted. For more information on removing employees click here.
    Generates a report of the employee detail and access to the screen or default print location.
    Spell checks any fields that can by typed in.
    Opens the Patron Window. For more information on the Patron window, click here.
    Opens the Password Window. For more information on the setting employee's passwords, click here.
    Open the selected Employee Preferences for the selected employee. For more information on Employee Preferences, click here.
    Allows access to be copied form one employee to another. For more information on copying employee access click here.
    For more information on the Access tab click here.
    For more information on the Data tab click here.
    For more information on the Functions tab click here.
    For more information on the Group tab click here.
    For more information on the Box Office tab click here.
    For more information on the Solicitor tab click here.
    For more information on the Facility Management tab click here.

    Access Tab

    Simply entering the employee name does not provide the security you may require for the information you maintain in Theatre Manager. A Master User or Outlet Administrator must indicate which type of access a new employee will be granted. There are three primary choices, No Access, Master User, and Normal as well as Outlet Administrator for sites using outlets.

    Sites set up with the Outlet Edition of Theatre Manager must have their Outlet Administrator perform employee setup functions. The Master User in the Outlet Edition is only intended for use in setting up the Outlet Administrator Employees.

    Parts of the Access Tab

    Access Id

    The logon name for the employee when the default logon window is set to Access ID/Password. Refer to the PCI Security Tab of System Preferences for more information.
    Hired Date the employee was hired. The calendar lookup button can be used to select the date.
    Resigned Date the employee left the organization. The calendar lookup button can be used to select the date.

    Logon Level

    No Access

    An employee with no access cannot use any aspect of Theatre Manager. Their user name will not appear on the login window, it will however appear on any employee list report unless specifically excluded. A user may be given no access because they have resigned, or the company wants a database of their employee's even if some employees never use Theatre Manager.
    Master User This employee can access any part of Theatre Manager. They are denoted by a bullet beside the user name in the login window. The Master User has unrestricted access to all modules of Theatre Manager, including the ability to change the access levels of other employees and themselves.
    Outlet Administrator Administrative access over an outlet. They are denoted by a percent symbol beside the user name in the login window. Outlet administrators have access to all modules of an outlet excluding system settings.
    Normal User Access can be restricted to various parts of Theatre Manager. These restrictions are set in the Data and Functions Tabs. The Normal User is not able to alter their own access levels.
    Employee # The employee # that is connect to all records in the database. This number is automatically assigned and cannot be changed, much like a Patron #.
    Server User # Internal number to references the employee in the SQL database. This number is automatically assigned and cannot be changed and is used for back-end database procedures.
    Attempts The number of times the employee has tried to login with the incorrect password since the last logon.

    Data Tab

    This is where a Normal employee's access to different data areas in Theatre Manager is set up. An employee can have various combinations of four (4) levels of access to particular areas of data within Theatre Manager. These level's are View, Insert, Edit and Delete. Uncheck all boxes next to an item to completely disable access (or just uncheck View, since no access to View precludes access to any of the other three actions).

    List of Data Fields to be Accessed

    The following fields are the various access levels defined in Theatre Manager:

    View Find and view the data listed in this column.
    Insert Insert the type of data listed in this column.
    Edit Edit or change the data listed in this column.
    Delete Delete the type of data listed in this column.

    Accounting

    A/P-Enter payables and expenses
    A/P Write cheques
    G/L Budget information Provides access to the setup of general ledger budgets for each general ledger account. Details on how each account is compared to the budgeted amount can be viewed.
    G/L Chart of account set up Provides access to the setup of general ledger accounts. Details on how an account is setup and the overall revenue allocated to each general ledger account can be viewed.
    G/L Entries, whether manually created or generated by the system Provides access to the general ledger entries. For an employee who may need to 'close' or 'cash out' at the end of the day, it is recommended that 'view' access be granted. With 'view' access, the employee will be only able to view the sales and deposit entry created by the End-of-Day wizard, and if required print the desired reports.
    G/L tax table setup - so they can be used for sales Provides access to setup tax tables, to define the table and enter/edit the percentage of tax levied and the g/l account tax will be allocated to.

    Attendance

    View and set patron attendance status to a performance

    Coupons

    Set up discount coupon codes that can be redeemed at the box office or via the web

    Credit Cards

    Patron Credit Card Tab

    Default Data

    Company Policy information (manage rules about how the system works) Provides access to Default Data settings such as Company name, mandatory data fields, data appearances (custom labels on fields), default fees on ticketing etc.

    Donor

    Attach or remove pledge reminder letters to a Donation to be sent at a future date
    Donation information for any donor record (on patron or order window-see function access)
    Manage Donation receipts
    Manage Donation soft credits

    Employee

    Change personal preferences in the employee preference window
    Manage employee data and access rights

    Facility Management

    "Hot Seat" analyzer to determine which seats have been used the most.
    Edit the contents of a task such as date, time, and participants.
    Manage filters that are used to decide what is displayed on a particular calendar view.
    Manage projects and associated tasks.
    Manage task dependencies in a project using the Gantt chart
    Set or edit an alarm on a task for themselves.
    Setup task resources that can be associated with a theatre or other tasks

    Fees

    The fee component of a sale (eq mail fee, order fee, subscription fee)

    Form Letters

    Create and change the form letters (anybody can use them) Provides access to the form letters module. Creating form letters and performing letter merges with information from Theatre Manager's database.
    Manage form letters and letter security from the membership window
    Manage form letters and letter security from the patron window

    Mail Lists

    Saved results of a query against the database used in reports or finding Patrons Provides access to the setup of mail lists and the patrons who are on each of the mail lists.

    Member

    Member cards to assign to any number of memberships Provides access to the setup of membership information on individual patron's accounts.

    Order

    Order information such as ticket printing status and comments
    View and edit items in the order window

    Outlet

    Creation of outlets (or departments) as a functional business entity Provides access the setup of the outlet locations and which employee is assigned to which outlet.
    Set up the Currency Exchange records for multi currency web usage
    Setting up of the commission structure for sales at an outlet Provides access the setup of the commission pay structure for an employee's ticket sales.

    Patron

    Basic Patron information such as name and address Provides access to the setup of patron information.
    Favourite seats and season subscription packages, including on the order window Provides access to the Season Subscription favorite seats tab on the patron window.
    Manage any Relationships between one or more patrons Provides access to Relationship tab on the patron window, to establish relationships between two or more patrons.
    Media information in the tab on the patron window Provides access to the setup of media information on individual patron's accounts.
    Member detail component of a sale (on the patron or order window-see function access)
    Patron payment information and prior payments on the order window Provides access to the patron payments after they have been created.

    Play

    Accounting information and setup for postings & taxes Provides access to the Accounting area in the play setup.
    Add task resources pertaining to Facility Management
    Main window containing the play & date information Provides access to the Attendance area in the play setup.
    Performance dates & management of sales parameters Provides access to the Performance area in the play setup.
    Play maps and attendance information
    Play revenue and cash flow information
    Set prices and valid sales promotions Provides access to the Prices and Promotion area in play setup.

    Plug-in Code

    Plug-in Code modules Provides access to Plug-ins, custom coded prices strategies. A Plug in is a system table setting and custom coding by Arts Management Systems to manage unique pricing structures.

    Report Card Template

    Manage report card templates to be used for course grading

    Report Cards

    View and edit report cards assigned to patrons and used for course grading

    Reports

    Items added to the report queue for later printing and customized report category detail windows Provides access to the setup of reports to be created and printed during non prime time hours.
    View and edit saved report criteria

    Resource

    The resource component of a sale. Provides access to resources that may be added to a sale.

    Season Reservations

    'Manage Favorite Seats' for all patrons via the subscription menu
    Alter the contents of the season package for an individual patron
    Setup the contents of the season packages that can be sold Provides access to the Season Subscription Renewal Notice process.

    Setup

    Code Table data used to manage valid entry values in various tables Provides access to the setup of code table settings in the System Table area of Theatre manager. This area is best restricted to Master Users of Theatre Manager.
    Create and manage sales rules for automatic discounting of tickets.
    Creation of fee types that can be applied to orders
    Creation of merchant accounts
    Creation of donation campaign/funds to be used in the system Provides access to the set-up of Donation Campaigns and Giving Levels matrixes
    Creation of membership types that can be sold Provides access to setup Membership types, to enter/edit membership styles and g/l accounts associated with each membership.
    Sales promotion codes used to manage discounting of tickets Provides access to the setup of ticket sales promotions and discount offers.
    Standard comments that can be put on invoices, etc. Provides access to the setup of standardized comments for ticket invoicing.
    Work Flow Notifications - who receives an email when certain actions occur in the system Provides access to the setup e-mail notifications.

    Theatre

    Manage theatre capacity, layout and seating names

    Ticket Faces

    The layout information for a thermal ticket printer Provides access to the setup of customized ticket face coding for the thermal ticket printers.

    To Do List

    Open/manipulate the calendar of events and to-do list items on the main to-do list window

    Transaction

    Access transaction information on reports and windows

    Volunteer

    Manage volunteer recognition awards
    Manage volunteer time availability
    Volunteer activity history - record of each instance of working in the position (from volunteer or play window) Provides access to the historical information for each personnel position. Such as each individual time the personnel was an actor, producer, or usher and the unique responsibilities for each position.
    Volunteer overview information and data entry window Provides access to the general personnel information on the patron window and on the personnel window.
    Volunteer positions - the activities that they will do when asked Provides access to the personnel positions each of the personnel may have held.

    Web Sales

    Manage shopping carts for internet sales Provides access to Web Cart tab on the patron record.
    View and reset web performance statistics gathered from the apache server by the web listener

    Functions Tab



    List of Functions to be Accessed

    The following fields are the various functions available in Theatre Manager:

    Functions

    Accounting 'Force balance' the G/L entries in end of day if the EOD balance is non-zero (not recommended).
    Accounting 'Force' a credit card deposit through TM only (not recommended-should balance to CC software).
    Accounting Access or complete a till balance for another user.
    Accounting Clear the 'order-in-use' flag when a ticket sale is aborted by mistake (eg force quit)
    Accounting Create bank deposits for current payments received-Cash/Checks/Other
    Accounting Create bank deposits for current payments received-authorized credit cards only (ie. allow settlement)
    Accounting Create sales entries for tickets, donations and memberships
    Accounting Export G/L entries to a tab delimited file (which sets the G/L entry exported flag)
    Accounting Post sales and deposit to the G/L (that have already been created)
    Accounting Run reports permitted for user in End of Day Wizard
    Accounting Run the year end roll over to prepare for a new year
    Accounting Unpost sales/deposit G/L entries and reverse them from G/L
    Batch Functions Batch print any tickets that have not yet been printed
    Batch Functions Mass update of patron marketing fields via direct SQL
    Batch Functions Recalculate all patron balances based on existing order balances
    Credit Cards Allow a refund to a credit card
    Credit Cards Allow empty CID or CVV2 number even if required for credit card payments
    Credit Cards Change to a different merchant account in the payment window (if there are multiple merchant accounts)
    Credit Cards Delete authorized credit card payments in TM instead of voiding on Server as well (recommended unchecked)
    Credit Cards Delete credit card payments for auto-renewed subscriptions during End of Day deposit process
    Credit Cards Deposit current/post dated credit cards (that have not yet been authorized) with authorizing the card
    Credit Cards Display all digits of last used charge card on payment window (otherwise remove last 4 digits to force card completion)
    Credit Cards Edit the credit card number on any existing payment that has not been deposited
    Credit Cards Last used charge card # - display all digits on payment window (otherwise remove all digits - overrrides other CC display options)
    Credit Cards Over-ride the 'cash only' setting for the patron and accept a credit card
    Credit Cards Search for a patron using a credit card number
    Credit Cards Shred cards older than 99999 days on the patron window
    Credit Cards Use 'force-duplicate' and cause a second charge for same amount for same card #/patron/batch
    Credit Cards Use the lookup button on the payment window to see other credit cards for the patron
    Credit Cards View entire card number (otherwise show **** and last 4 digits on most reports and screens)
    Donor Add donations for a patron while in the patron window
    Donor Add donations to an order while on the ticket sales window
    Donor Clear date that commission paid for the donation
    Donor Print donation acknowledgments to the ticket printer
    Donor Print donation charitable receipts
    Donor Unprint donation charitable receipts for later reprinting
    Donor View donors summary information (all non private) at the top of the patron window
    Donor View donors summary information (marked PRIVATE) at the top of the patron window
    Fees Change a fee used during a 'New Sale'
    Fees Change a fee used during an 'Exchange'
    Fees Change a fee used during the 'Refund' process
    Fees Change a fee used during the order 'Modify' process
    Fees Enter a negative value for a fee (ie. discount) if able to edit fees on the order window
    Form Letters Merge letters from the form letter list or edit window
    Form Letters Print or Batch Print form letters or emails that had been previously assigned to print later
    Membership Able to renew the membership if it is past its expiry date/renewal deadline
    Membership Add membership for a patron while in the patron window
    Membership Add membership to an order while on the ticket sales window
    Membership Change the full redeemable value of the membership from the purchase price to confer benefits
    Membership Print membership tickets
    Membership UnPrint membership tickets
    Outlet Sell tickets at All Locations (regardless of Outlet that created event)
    Patron Change the primary address from one address to another
    Patron Change the primary email from one email to another
    Patron Change the primary phone or fax from one phone to another
    Patron Clear the 'cash only' flag so that patron can resume using credit cards
    Patron Clear the 'do not mail, telemarket, etc.' flags
    Patron Merge two or more patron records into the same person and delete the others
    Patron Merge/transfer two or more patrons into a common household
    Patron Send a patron their email address and web password in an email
    Patron Set the 'cash only' flag so that patron cannot use credit cards
    Patron Set the 'do not mail, telemarket, etc.' flags
    Patron View annual marketing purchase statistics on the patron window at the lower right
    Payments Access and change 'Contractual Notes' on the payment screen
    Payments Delete post dated payments previously entered against the order
    Payments Use 'Gift In Kind' as payment method (means G/L account code needed)
    Payments Use 'On Account' as payment method on any order (closes without a payment & creates A/R)
    Payments Use 'Post Dated Payments' as a payment method which will appear in End of Day on appropriate future date
    Payments Use 'Membership' (current) as payment method
    Payments Use membership (expired) as payment method
    Reports Print invoices for a patron from the order window or batch functions.
    Reports Run donation reports
    Reports Run general reports (the majority of reports)
    Reports Run sales summary analysis reports
    Reports Run ticket revenue reports
    Sales View 'Transaction Monitoring' window
    Season Reservations Print season renewal notices
    Season Reservations Process a season ticket reservation using the book button
    Season Reservations Process season subscription auto renewals (people who get same seats each year)
    Season Reservations Unprint season renewal notices so they can be printed again
    Tickets Associate plug in code to any data record
    Tickets Change default ticket sale/reservation setting to allow tickets to be sold as reservation only (no A/R created)
    Tickets Change the promotion/price code during a quick exchange for a performance that DOES NOT have the employee's security access priviledges
    Tickets Change the promotion/price code during a quick exchange for a performance that the employee has security acess to
    Tickets Confirm attendance at a performance using ticket scanner or entering ticket number
    Tickets Exchange tickets by transferring them "en masse" from one performance to another on the attendance tab in the play window
    Tickets Exchange tickets to a performance that DOES NOT have the employee's security access priviledges
    Tickets Exchange tickets to a performance that has the employee's security access priviledges
    Tickets Hold tickets to prevent selling them
    Tickets Print tickets for fully paid order
    Tickets Print tickets for partially paid order
    Tickets Recalculate a specific order balance based on its contents
    Tickets Refund tickets to a performance that DOES NOT have the employee's security access priviledges
    Tickets Refund tickets to a performance that has the employee's security access priviledges
    Tickets Refund tickets when the performance is no longer on sale
    Tickets Refund tickets when the performance is over
    Tickets Release all held tickets for a performance on ticket sales window
    Tickets Sell COMP tickets (where a promotion was required to reduce the initial base price to $0.00)
    Tickets Sell FREE tickets where the base price starts at $0.00 (these are not considered comps)
    Tickets Sell from the patron screen using 'buy' button
    Tickets Sell held tickets which are marked on maps as held with lowercase letter (but only to permitted hold codes in employee record)
    Tickets Sell tickets to performance that is in the past
    Tickets Sell using 'Before Event Sales' menu (no patron data captured)
    Tickets Sell using 'Quick Buy' (sell tickets first, ten transfer to a patron)
    Tickets Set the price of a traveling troupe performance during the sales process
    Tickets Unprint a ticket (so it can be reprinted later)
    Tickets Use their personal setting for 'Reservation Only' ticket sales (means no transactions created until first payment)
    Utilities Open the Data Verify utilities under 'Setup'
    Utilities Purge historical data from the database
    Utilities Open the Data Verify utilities under 'Setup'
    Web Sales Add e-mails to patron correspondence history for mass emailing later
    Web Sales Start the web sales listener and become a web listener under their personal user id
    Web Sales View and manage emails pending on the web to resend or cancel them
    Web Sales View ticket scan statistics window

    Adding and Removing Access to Functions

    1. Open the Employee Data window for the Employee.

      For information on how to access the Employee Data window click here.

    2. Click the Functions tab.

      When a box is checked an employee has access to the function. If the box is unchecked an employee can not access the function.

    3. Click on the box next to the function to change the status.
    4. Click the Save button.

      Changes to the Functions tab have now been saved.

    Group Tab

    The Group tab allows for the level of security access to be set for the employee.

    Parts of the Group Tab

    Letters & E-Blasts Notes and letters access.
    Task Notes Access to Task notes.
    Play Selling Performance sales access.
    Play Reporting Report access.
    Volunteer Evaluation Volunteer History Access restrictions.
    Queued & Saved Reports Access to reports that have been saved

    Security 1

    Level of security the employee has access to. Each level can be renamed in the appearance tab of company preferences. For more information on changing the security level title click here.
    Security 2 Level of security the employee has access to. Each level can be renamed in the appearance tab of company preferences. For more information on changing the security level title click here.
    Security 3 Level of security the employee has access to. Each level can be renamed in the appearance tab of company preferences. For more information on changing the security level title click here.
    Security 4 Level of security the employee has access to. Each level can be renamed in the appearance tab of company preferences. For more information on changing the security level title click here.
    Security 5 Level of security the employee has access to. Each level can be renamed in the appearance tab of company preferences. For more information on changing the security level title click here.
    Security 6 Level of security the employee has access to. Each level can be renamed in the appearence tab of company preferences. For more information on changing the security level title click here.
    Security 7 Level of security the employee has access to. Each level can be renamed in the appearance tab of company preferences. For more information on changing the security level title click here.
    Security 8 Level of security the employee has access to. Each level can be renamed in the appearance tab of company preferences. For more information on changing the security level title click here.
    Security 9 Level of security the employee has access to. Each level can be renamed in the appearance tab of company preferences. For more information on changing the security level title click here.
    Security 10 Level of security the employee has access to. Each level can be renamed in the appearance tab of company preferences. For more information on changing the security level title click here.

    Box Office Tab

    The Box Office tab sets an employees sales management and report processes access.

    Parts of the Box Office Tab

    Box Office and Sales Management

    Initial Window Window that Theatre Manager will automatically open first when an employee logs on. The initial window may be different for each employee.
    Festival Seating Sales Default for selling festival tickets as a one ticket per admission or one ticket per purchase.
    Transaction Source Department the employee works in.
    Hold Letters Hold letters the employee can set, release or hold tickets for.
    Merchant # Merchant account the employee processes credit cards to.
    Merchant # Merchant account the employee processes credit cards to.
    User Initials Unique initials for allowing access over-rides and scanner login.

    Web Listener Auto Login

    This section only applies if the employee is going to act as a weblistener. The settings will only be saved for the computer currently being used.
    Clicking this button sets Theatre Manager to automatically login as the employee and open the web listener window when Theatre Manager is started on the computer currently being used.
    Clicking this button clears the automatic login set by the button above.

    Solicitor Tab

    The Solicitor tab shows information about the donations which the employee has taken in. The "Allow Employee to be a Solicitor" must be selected to allow the employee to accept donations under there name.

    Parts of the Solicitor Tab

    Allow Employee to be a Solicitor When checked an employee can accept donations under their name.
    Prospects Total amount of prospective donations generated by the employee.
    Soft Pledge Total amount of soft pledges solicited by the employee
    Soft Credits Total amount of soft credits solicited by the employee
    Actual Total amount of actual donation $ solicited by the employee
    Total Donations Total number of donations that have been solicited by the employee
    Hard Pledges Amount of hard pledges solicited by the employee.
    Matching Gifts Total matching gift donations solicited by the employee.
    # Gifts Matched Number of matching gifts solicited by the employee.
    Written Off Amount of written off donations solicited by the employee.
    Balance Owing Balance of outstanding donations solicited by the employee.

    Facility Management Tab




    Parts of the Facility Management Tab

    Billing Information These settings are used for costing/billing employees in the Facility Management module. More more information about Facility Management, click here.
    Pay Period The pay period for the employee. Can be Contract Rate, Day Rate, Hourly, Monthly or Weekly.
    Pay Rate An employee's rate of pay for projects/tasks.
    Overtime Rate An employee's overtime pay rate.
    Internal Employee # A payroll number or internal indentifier for an employee (could match external accounting software, etc)

    Adding Employees and setting up access rights

    The pages in this section detail how to set up Employees in Theatre Manager and grant them access to various areas of the program.

    Adding Employees

    1. Login to Theatre Manager as a Master User, or Outlet Administrator where applicable.
    2. Sites set up with the Outlet Edition of Theatre Manager must have their Outlet Administrator perform employee setup functions. The Master User in the Outlet Edition is only intended for use in setting up the Outlet Administrator Employees.

    3. Create a patron record for the employee.

      Click here to learn how to create patron records.

    4. Highlight the employee's patron record from the patron window

    5. Click the Employee button.

      A confirmation window will appear.

    6. Click the Yes button.

      The employee data window will appear.

    7. Click the Password button to set a password for the employee.
      For more information on setting an employee password, click here.
    8. Click the Preferences button to set the employee preferences.
      For more information on setting employee preferences, click here.
    9. Make any required changes to the Access tab.

      For more information about the Access tab, click here.
    10. Make any required changes to the Data tab.

      For more information about the Data tab, click here.
    11. Make any required changes to the Functions tab.

      For more information about the Functions tab, click here.
    12. Make any required changes to the Group tab.

      For more information about the Group tab, click here.
    13. Make any required changes to the Box Office tab.

      For more information about the Box Office tab, click here.
    14. Enter the information on the Solicitor tab.

      For more information about the Solicitor tab, click here.
    15. Enter the information on the Facility Management tab.

      For more information about the Facility Management tab, click here.

    Adding and Removing Access to Data

    1. Open the Employee Data window for the Employee.

      For information on how to access the Employee Data window click here.

    2. Click the Data tab.

      When a box is checked an employee has the selected access rights to that data. If the box is unchecked an employee does not have the unchecked level of access rights to the data.

      For more information on the data tab click here.

    3. Click on the desired box next to the access level to change the status.
    4. Click the Save button.

      Changes to the Data tab have now been saved.

    Copy Access from one Employee to another

    When inserting a new employee record it may be decided the new employee should receive the exact same access levels to Theatre Manager as a pre-existing employee. If so, copy the access from the existing employee to the new employee. This is a time saving feature so access to data and function levels do not have to be hand-picked for each employee. This function is only used for employees who have Normal Access, as Master Users already have access to everything.

    1. Open the Employee List window.

      Click here to learn how to access the Employee Data window.

    2. Select the Employee to copy the access to.

      Single click on the employee line to select it.

    3. Click the Open button.

      The Employee Data window will open.

    4. Click the Copy Access button.

      The Employee List will appear.

    5. Click the Search button.

      These are the employees access can be copied from.

    6. Select the Employee to Copy Access from.

      Single click on an employee to select them.

    7. Click the Select button.

      This completes the process. The employee access has been copied.

    Editing Employee Data

    1. Open the Employee List window.

      Click here to learn how to access the Employee Data window.

    2. Select the Employee to edit.

      Single click on an employee to select them.

    3. Click the Open button.

      The Employee window will open.

      For more information on the Employee Data window click here.

    4. Change the employee data as needed.
    5. Click the Save button to save the changes.

    Changing Access Levels

    The access level on an employee effects the ability to log into Theatre Manager as well as the areas of Theatre Manager an employee will have access to. It is recommended the Master User employee have Master User access and the remaining employees have variations of Normal access.

    1. Open the Employee Data window for the Employee.

      For information on how to access the Employee Data window click here.

    2. Click the Access tab.

      The current level of access is seen under the Logon Level and is marked by a bullet.

      For more information on the access tab click here.

    3. Click on the circle next to the logon level to change the status.
      The options to choose from are No Access, Master User, Outlet Administrator and Normal. Descriptions of the logon levels can be found to the right of the logon levels.
    4. Click the Save button.

      Changes to the Access Level have now been saved.

    Reinstating Employee Access

     

    If an Employee returns to work for your organization, you can reinstate their Employee account.

    You will also need to do this when an Employee enters an incorrect password too many times as Theatre Manager will lock the Employee out of the program. This is designed to prevent people from accessing the database who should not have access.

    Theatre Manager applies a resignation date to the Employee record and removes them from the login window.

    This process will also work in cases where the Master User has been resigned/locked out. In that case, another Employee with Master User privileges can log in and complete the following process for the Master User account. We also highly recommend setting a primary email for the Master User on its patron account so that users can choose to have an email with the password sent to that email address in cases where the password is lost or forgotten

    1. Login to Theatre Manager as a Master User or Outlet Administrator.

    2. Open the Employee List window.
    3. Check the Resigned box in the upper left of the window.

    4. Search for the Employee.

    5. Single click on the resigned Employee to select them.

    6. Click the Open button.

    7. Clear the Resigned date field.

    8. Click the Password button to set a password for the Employee.

    9. Close the Employee Access Data window.

    The Employee now appears in the login window again. They will be able to access Theatre Manager using the password defined above.

    In some very rare cases, there will be no other Employees with Master User access to complete the above steps. In those instances, please enable Remote Assistance on the database server machine and contact support@artsman.com with the login id/pw combination so we can reinstate access.

    Removing Employee Access

    Since employees have important information tied to their accounts like transaction data, there is no way to permanently delete them from the system. You can remove their access which will remove them from the active employee list and prevent them from logging into Theatre Manager.

    1. Open the Employee List window.

      Click here to learn how to access the Employee List window.

    2. Select the Employee to remove.
    3. Click the Open button.

    4. Enter the resignation date.

      Enter the last day the employee worked.

    5. Click the Save button.

      The employee will not be removed from the active employee list and will no longer be able to login to Theatre Manager.

    Setting Employee Passwords

     

    An employee password can be set, changed or reset if forgotten.

    1. Log into Theatre Manager as a Master User or Outlet Administrator.
    2.  

    3. Open the Employee List window.

       

      Click here to learn how to access the Employee Data window.

       

    4.  

    5. Search for the desired Employee. .

       

    6.  

    7. Single click on the Employee to select them.
    8.  

    9. Click the Open button at the top of the window.

       

      The Employee Data window will open.

       

    10.  

    11. Click the Password button.

       

      The New Password window will open.

       

    12.  

    13. Enter the password in the New Password field.
    14.  

    15. Confirm the new password in the Retype Password field.
    16.  

    17. Click the Accept button.

       

      The new password is now set for the employee.

    18.  

    Employee Preferences Window

    The Employee Preferences Window is used to set defaults for an individual user. Employee preferences may be accessed by clicking the Preferences button on the Access Tab of Employee Setup. Preferences can also be accessed through Setup >> Users and Access >> Employee Preferences. Accessing Employee preferences through the Setup menu will only show the preferences for the currently logged on employee. Changing the preferences changes the preferences for that employee no matter where they log on to Theatre Manager.

    Parts of the Employee Preferences Window

    Opens the Theatre Manager online help.
    This button is not accessible because new employees must be added through the Patron Window. It is on the window for consistency. For more information on adding employees click here.
    Saves changes made to the employee preferences.
    This button is not accessible because new employees must be added through the Patron Window. It is on the window for consistency. For more information on adding employees click here.
    Reverts changes made to the employee preference back to the last saved point.
    This button is not accessible because employees cannot be deleted. For more information on removing employees click here.
    Generates a report of the employee detail and access to the screen or default print location.
    Spell checks any fields that can by typed in.
    Opens the Password Window. For more information on the setting employee's passwords, click here.
    Ticketing and membership default search criteria. For more information on the patron tab click here.
    Sales defaults for the employee. For more information on the box office tab click here.
    Default ticket printer information for the employee. For more information on the ticket printer tab click here.
    Reporting preferences for the employee. For more information on the reports tab click here.
    Spell check default settings. For more information on the spell checker tab click here.
    Status bar location. For more information on the windows tab click here.
    Email setup for the employee. For more information on the Email tab click here.

    Patron Tab

    Parts of the Patron Tab

    Default Ticket Search Criteria

    Ticket Status

    Choose the types of tickets to be displayed in the ticket tab. There are three choices: All Tickets, Printed Tickets, and Unprinted Tickets. If Printed Tickets was selected then all tickets displayed would be tickets that have already been printed, or marked as printed.
    Year of Play Choose the year of the tickets to be displayed in the ticket tab. There are 6 choices: The future year, the current year, previous year, two years prior, Current Year and All Years. If the current year was selected then all tickets displayed would be for events that take place in the current year.

    Maximum Tickets

    The maximum number of ticket to be displayed in the patron window when the patron record is loading. If a patron has more tickets than the number specified in this field, in this case 300, then a message will appear when you open that patron record informing you that 300 tickets have been found would you like to add 300 more. Clicking yes will display another 300 tickets, if there are that many more. If there are less then 300 it will just display the remainder of the tickets. By clicking no, then only the first 300 tickets will be displayed.

    Default Membership Search Criteria

    Status Choose the types of membership to be displayed in the membership tab. There are three choices: All Memberships, Invalid, and Valid. If Valid was selected then all memberships displayed would be active and not yet expired.
    Year Choose the year of the memberships to be displayed in the membership tab. There are 6 choices: The future year, the current year, previous year, two years prior, Current Year and All Years. If the current year was selected then all memberships for the current year would be displayed.

    Default Quick Find Field

    The default field used for the employee for the Quick Find function. The available options are Patron or Marketing Field #1-4.

    Box Office Tab

    Parts of the Box Office Tab

    Quick Buy Patron

    This field requires a valid patron number. The patron number entered should be for a patron who was specifically set up to act as a quick buy / before event sales patron. A quick buy / before event sales patron is a dummy patron account (not a real person), and because the patron is set in user preferences each user can have their own Quick Buy / Before Event Sales Patron.

    Show Ticket Prices (when selling)

    Base Price + Tax + Fee

    Ticket price is displayed as the base price plus tax any any fees associated with the sales promotion.
    Base Price + Tax Ticket price is displayed as the base price plus tax.
    Base Price + Fees Ticket price is displayed as the base price plus fees associated with the sales promotion.
    Base Price Only Ticket price is displayed as the base price only.

    Display Following Data In List

    Closed orders Fully paid orders will be displayed.
    Closed and deposited payments Payments for fully paid orders will be displayed.

    Default Sales Mode

    Sale Purchases are recognized as an accounts receivable at the time of purchase. If payment is made the accounts receivable is cleared. If no payment is made the tickets remain on account until payment is received.
    Reservation Purchase is not recognized as an accounts receivable until the first payment or donation is received.

    Managing the Sale

    Single Tickets Festival seating tickets are issues as one ticket per admission.
    Group Tickets Festival seating tickets are issues as one ticket per event.
    Default number of days to hold Seats Default number of days a patron seat request will be held for an event.
    Display credit card authorization number Credit card authorization number is displayed in the payment window before completing a sale.
    Cash Drawer Port If using an electronic cash drawer, the port on which it communicates.
    Delay /60 Sec The amount of seconds of delay before the cash drawer opens.

    Ticket Printers Tab

    Parts of the Ticket Printers Tab

    Ticket Printer Configuration

    Printer Type

    Tickets can be printed to a Boca, Boca Dual, Practical Automation, Datamax Allegro or Datamax S-Class. Choose the default ticket printer the employee will print to.
    Print Delay Allows for a printer buffer to clear before printing the next ticket. This delay is hardware specific. If tickets are being printed on top of one another, tickets are not printed correctly, or if tickets are skipped during the printing process the print delay should be increased.

    Ticket Cutting Options

    If printer supports ticket cutting, there are three options to choose from: Cut ech ticket, Cut after last tickets for patron, or Do not cut tickets

    Settings for Printer #1

    Port #1 Name The port the primary ticket printer is attached to.
    IP Address IP address of printer if using ethernet printer
    IP Port IP port of printer if using ethernet printer

    Settings for Printer #2

    Port #2 Name The port the secondary ticket printer is attached to.
    IP Address IP address of printer if using ethernet printer
    IP Port IP port of printer if using ethernet printer

    Reports Tab

    Parts of the Reports Tab

    Reporting Options

    Show Page Setup for each report

    When checked the user will always be given the opportunity to change the page orientation and paper size before printing a report even if the default destination is to the screen.
    Show Report Window As Steps Changes the criteria window to a series of Next/Previous windows rather then tabs. This assists infrequent users in entering relevant information.
    Show Saved Criteria Options When unchecked, will remove the Save Criteria buttons to reduce the number of buttons in the criteria window for simplicity.
    Show Report in 'Page Preview' Mode When checked, reports on screen are displayed is actual view with the paper outline.
    Default Criteria Filter Level Can change the default criteria filter level to make choosing fields for search criteria more simple. Options are: All, Frequently Used and Essential.
    Default Destination A drop down list allowing users to specify the default print location. There are five options: Clipboard, File, Page Preview, Printer, Screen.
    Removes any saved report criteria.

    Spell Checker Tab

    Parts of the Spell Checker Tab

    Ignore Options

    Ignore capitalized words Ignores capitalized words found in mid sentence. An example may be a day of the week or a country.
    Ignore all-caps words Ignores words completely capitalized. An example may be a radio station or acronym.

    Ignore words with numbers

    Ignores words that contain both letters and numbers. An example may be an event code.
    Ignore words with mixed case Ignores mixed case words. An example may be ArtsMan.
    Ignore domain names Ignores domain names for email or web sites. Often domain names are a combination of words that run together. An example would be artsman.com

    Suggest / Report Options

    Report doubled words Detects same words typed side by side. An example would be the the.
    Case sensitive Locates words that should be capitalized but are not. An example would be canada.
    Phonetic suggestions Displays word suggestions that sound like the miss spelt word. Either phonetic suggestions or typographical suggestions must be selected in order for spell check to provide suggestions.
    Typographical suggestions Displays word suggestions that appear similar to the miss spelt word. Either phonetic suggestions or typographical suggestions must be selected in order for spell check to provide suggestions.
    Suggest split words Displays suggestions for words that appear to run together.
    Auto correct Detects words within the selected dictionary marked as Auto Change and correct them without prompting. An example may be teh changing to the.

    Language

    Select a language to spell check in. Choices are American English, British English, Dutch, French, German, Italian, and Spanish.

    Accuracy

    Fast but less accurate A fast scan of the source document which may provide less accurate spell check results.
    Moderately fast and accurate A quick scan of the source document which moderate accuracy.
    Slow but very accurate A slow, accurate scan of the source document.

    Dictionaries and Glossary

    When ignore all is selected during spell check the words are stored for future reference. Clear ignores removes these words from the stored reference.
    Edit the spell check dictionary. Exclude, Ignore, Conditionally Changes and Auto Changes can be adjusted in the dictionary.

    Windows Tab

    Parts of the Windows Tab

    Main Toolbar Settings

    Settings for main Theatre Manager toolbar.
    Icon Size Choice between Small and Large icons.
    Text Position Can either have no text or text showing below icons.
    Menu Position Where you would like the menu positioned on the screen: None, Top, Bottom, Left, Right, Floating

    Window Tooltips

    Display tooltips on windows and buttons Displays tips on windows and buttons when the mouse is hovered over top of the window or button
    Display tooltips on a theatre map Displays seat information when mouse is hovered over top of seat on a theatre map
    Resets all window settings back to default settings when clicked.

    Preferred Toolbar Icon Settings

    Settings for toolbars on top of each window.
    Icon Size Choice between Small and Large icons.
    Text Position Can either have no text or text showing below icons.

    Windows Status Bar Position

    Where you would like Theatre Manager status bar positioned. This status bar displays information and any errors you may receive. Options are: Bottom, Top, or Operating System Default

    Email Tab

    Parts of the Email Tab

    Email Setup

    Primary E-Mail Automatically generated from the primary email as set up on the employee's patron record.
    SMTP Server The company's SMTP server to send emails to/from this employee.
    SMTP Port Usually 25 - the port used to talk to the SMTP server for email sending to/from the web listener for this employee.
    User Id In cases where authentication is necessary, the employee's email user id login for the SMTP server.
    Password In cases where authentication is necessary, the employee's password for their user id for the SMTP server.
    Needs Authentication box Check this box if authentication is required to access the SMTP server. Encryption methods of NONE, LOGIN, PLAIN, CLEARTEXT, and CRAM-MD5 are supported.
    Use SSL box Check this box if the SMTP server requires SSL for connection. TLS (Transport Layer Security) is not supported at this time.
    Click the Test Email button to send a test email using the SMTP settings as entered.
    Click the RSS Feed button to open your web browser and go to the Arts Management RSS Feed to bookmark for future reference.

    Facility Tab

    In the Facilites tab of Emplyee Preferences you can effect users abilities to edit calendar items.

    Parts of the Facility Tab

    Unassigned Activity Patron Enter a default unassigned activity patron here as a placeholder for personnel assigned to specific project tasks to be used while those personnel are still being set up. It is also used in the volunteer/personnel tab in events and dates to bulk set up the people needed to work a performance.
    Others who can edit my tasks Here you can assign delegates who can edit your calendar task information. This prevents others from changing your tasks by supplying a list. Use the green plus and red minus buttons at the bottom left of the table to add or remove patrons from this list.

    Work Flow Notification - Introduction

    Work Flow Notifications enable you to take common situations, such as donations being sold or changed, or patrons creating records via the internet, and send notification emails to certain employees who will be responsible for tracking changes to the database. You must have purchased the Web Sales Module in order to use Work Flow Notifications. Common notifications, such as donation sales or membership sales, can be assigned on a per campaign or membership basis.They are assigned in the setup of each patron, campaign, giving level, pass or membership.

    Work Flow notifications can be accessed by clicking on Setup >> Users and Access >> Work Flow Notification.

    This will open the Work Flow Notification window.

    Creating a Notification

    Work Flow Notifications enable you to take common situations, such as donations being sold or changed, or patrons creating records via the internet, and send notification emails to certain employees who will be responsible for tracking changes to the database.

    You must have purchased the Web Sales Module in order to use Work Flow Notifications.

    Creating a Notification

    1. To Access Work Flow Notification Setup, go into the Setup Menu - Users and Access - Work Flow Notification

      This will open the list of all notifications that are setup in your system.

    2. Click the New button.

    3. Select the Notification Type from the list.

      These notifications are setup in the Code Tables.

    4. Select an Form Letter to use for this notification by clicking the Letter button.

      For more information about Form Letters, click here.

    5. Select the form letter that corresponds to the notification that you are setting up.

    6. Click Select

    7. Select whether this email will be sent when the event is added, changed or deleted.

      This allows you to send emails to different employees for different situations. For example, not all employees will need to be notified if a donation is changed, but more will be on the list for donations being added.

    8. Enter any notes to describe what this notification is to be used for.
    9. Select whether the notification will be sent for Box Office, Internet Sales, or both.
    10. Click the Send Email To tab.

    11. Select the employees that will receive this notification.

      If an employee does not have an email address, you will need to enter one for them to be added to a notification. Click here for Employee Setup.

    12. Click the Save button.

    Editing a Notification

    1. To Access Work Flow Notification Setup, go into the Setup Menu - Users and Access - Work Flow Notification

      This will open the list of all notifications that are setup in your system.

    2. Double click on the notification you wish to edit.

    3. Edit any of the fields as required.
    4. Click the Save button.

    Deleting a Notification

    1. To Access Work Flow Notification Setup in order to delete a notification that is no longer necessary, go into the Setup Menu - Users and Access - Work Flow Notification

      This will open the list of all notifications that are setup in your system.

    2. Highlight the notification you wish to delete.
    3. Click the Delete button.

      The Delete Record confirmation window will appear.

    4. Click the Delete button.

      The notification is now deleted.

    Employees Currently Logged In

    The Employees Currently Logged In windows provides a list of all employees who are currently logged in to Theatre Manager. This can be useful to monitor access to the system at any given time. The window is automatically refreshed every 15 seconds. It operates by polling pg_Admin activity, and reporting that activity to the viewer.

    The Employees Currently Logged In monitor is accessed via the Setup >> Users and Access >> Employees Currently Logged In menu.



    Parts of the Employees Logged In window

    Prints the current record.
    Exports the log file in a tab or comma delimited file.
    Pid Process ID.This is the process ID assigned to the employee connection to the PostgreSQL database. If a user account becomes stuck in Theatre Manager, AMS Support personnel can remote in to the server and free the User based on the PID. This can also be used if a User is running an unusually large database query and uses up too much of the CPU resources. The PID can be used to stop the query and free the CPU resources back up again.
    User Name The Access ID of the User who is logged on. This value is defined in the Employee record.
    Application The application the User is logged into. Since this is provided by pg_Admin, the application will always be Theatre Manager.
    IP Address The IP address of the machine where the User is logged on from. This is useful to monitor not only what users are logged in, but to which specific workstation.
    Port The internal port that the User is currently using to access the database.
    Query Start When pg_Admin was last checked for activity status from this User.
    Waiting Indicates if the User is waiting for access to the database.
    Current Query The code line in pg_Admin used to monitor the log in status of the User.

    Disable Access to Theatre Manager

    The Disable Access function allows you to set a time to force users to log off Theatre Manager in order to perform scheduled maintenance and other functions that require exclusive use of the database. Theatre Manager will deny users access to the database until the pre-determined time in this window.

    A Master User can always log on to the database to reset the values in this window, regardless of whether Theatre Manager is currently unavailable to other users.

    The Disable Access function is accessed via the Setup >> Users and Access >> Disable Access menu.



    Parts of the Disable Access window

    Timed Logoff Sets an immediate logoff in a specified number of minutes. For example, if you want to force all users off in 10 minutes, then enter the value "10" and click the Deny Login button. Theatre Manager will log all users off in 10 minutes.
    Date Time Logoff Sets a future date time during which all users will be logged off, and no users will be allowed access. This is useful if the IT department is planning a machine or systems upgrade during a specified time.
    Message Allows setting of a message to display to all users of an impending planned outage. This message uses Theatre Manager's Growl notification system.
    Displays a list of users who are currently logged in.
    Activates the outage as defined in the top portion of this window.
    Cancels the planned outage, and allows users to log in normally.

    Canceling a Disable Use of Theatre Manager session

    If you need to cancel a Disable Use of Theatre Manager session because the planned maintenance took less time than was originally scheduled, you can easily do so by "Allowing Login" once again.

    1. Log on to Theatre Manager as a Master User
    2. Open the Disable Access function, located via the Setup >> Users and Access >> Disable Access menu.
    3. Click the button.

    For more about the Disable Access function click here.

    Access Audit Log

    The Access Audit Log is a critical part of PCI Compliance. It provides a method of electronically tracking when users

    • Log in to the database
    • Log out of the database
    • Made too many attempts to log into the database and were subsequently locked out
    • Access credit card data
    • Use Manager overrides for payment acceptance
    • Ran specific payment reports containing secure data
    • And access other sensitive areas of the database
    • Specifically, the Access Audit Log establishes a process for linking all access to system components to each individual user – especially access done with administrative privileges. It allows you to track and monitor all access to network resources and cardholder data as per PCI requirments.

      For more on PCI Compliance click here.

      The Access Audit log is located under the Setup >> Users & Access >>Access Audit Log menu.

    Access Audit Window



    Parts of the Access Audit Window

    Opens the selected transaction to view details. You may also simply double click on the transaction in the list.
    Prints the list as shown.
    Exports the list.
    Displays the patron record to whom the transaction is attached.
    Seq # The Sequence number of the transaction.
    Trans Date The date and time of the transaction.
    Journal # If the transaction affected the General Journal, the Journal number that was affected.
    Code The transaction code used to identify the specific transaction.
    Transaction Description A translated description of the transaction code.
    Order # If the transaction affected a specific Order, the order number willbe listed here.
    Play If the transaction affected a specific play, the play code will be listed here.
    Performance If the transaction affected a specific performance, the performance code will be listed here.
    Type Whether the transaction is auditable.
    Description of Entry A more detailed listing of the transaction, including the User name who affected the transaction.

    Transaction Detail Window



    Parts of the Transaction Detail Window

    Displays the patron record to whom the transaction is attached.
    General Informtion Displays the
    • Type of transaction
    • Patron name
    • Date of Creation
    • Employee name who created the transaction
    • Revenue and Journal date
    • Transaction #
    Transaction Detail Displays
    • What data was requested from the database
    • The Employee who permitted the data to be viewed (if it was an override from creating user)
    • What specific activity took place

    Audit Search Options

    There are many options for you to search for specific transactions. Using the drop-down list in the upper left corner, simply choose the criteria you wish to search by.



    Options for searching the Transaction List

    All Transactions Displays all transactions. Click on any column header to sort by that column.
    Code The specific Transaction Code
    Order # A specific order number. This may be helpful when diagnosing ledger transactions.
    Journal # A specific General Journal number. This may be helpful when diagnosing ledger transactions.
    Revenue Date A specific date of revenue. This may be helpful when diagnosing ledger transactions.
    Seq # A specific Sequence number. This may be helpful when diagnosing ledger transactions.
    Trans Date A specific transaction date. This may be helpful when examining a specific day or range of days.
    Play #, #Perf, Tix #, Seat Code Use these to examine transactions based around a specific event.
    Trans Patron #, Name/Company, Last Name, First Name, Company Use these to search for transactions generated by a specific patron record.
    Play Title, Play, Performance Use these to search for transactions generated by a specific event.
    Description, Campaign Name These will search for transactions generated by a specific donation campaign.
    Merchant #, GL# These may be helpful when diagnosing ledger transactions.

    System Preferences

    Company Preferences are used to manage how Theatre Manager behaves for all outlets in the database. (This also applies if there is only one outlet). The items that can be changed generally have to do with system maintenance, overall appearance and general behaviour that all users will experience.

    Click on a link to the left to view the details of each tab in this window.

    Opening the System Preferences Window

    The System Preferences Window is accessed through the Setup >> System Preferences Menu.

    This will open the System Preferences Window.

    Edits Tab

    Edits Tab

    The Edits tab contains patron data management information for Theatre Manager.

    Data Editing

    "Unknown" Phone Number The phone number which can be used if there is no patron phone number. This number will be ignored when checking for multiple patrons.
    First Name Connector The connector which will be used to join first and last names in reports and letters.
    Greeting Name Preference The greeting preference used when sending material to patrons.

    Auto Capitalize

    Controls Theatre Manager's ability to set mixed case letters during entry and reduces the necessity to use the shift key. Several methods can be chosen to control this process.

    Never Capitalize - Removes this option by always accepting exactly what is entered.

    First Time - Capitalizes the first letter of data entered into a field the first time it is entered. When the field is edited, the changes will be saved as entered.

    Mac: Except for <Option> <Tab> - Capitalizes the first letter of any word entered into a field unless the <Option> key is held down when <Tab> is used to move into the next field. When the <Option> key is depressed, and <Tab> is used to move to the next field, the data is recorded as entered.

    Windows: Except for <CTRL> Click - Capatilizes the first letter of any word entered into the field unless the <CTRL> key is held down and clicking is used to move into the next field. When the <CTRL> key is depressed, and the click is used to move to the next field, the data is recorded as entered.

    Always Capitalize - Capitalizes the first letter of any word entered into a field.

    Disable Postal Code Edits If selected, the program will not validate a Countries Postal/Zip code requirements.

    Examples:

    Canadian Format : xxx xxx

    American Format: xxxxx or xxxxx-xxxx

    New Zealand Format: xxxx

    Disable Telephone Number Edit If selected, the program will not validate a countries telephone number requirements.

    Examples:

    Canadian/American Format: (xxx) xxx - xxxx

    New Zealand Format: 0800 xx xx xx or 021 xxx xxxx or 025 xxx xxx or 0Y xxx xxxx where Y is a number between 3 and 9.

    Email Address Domain Verification

    Never E-mail addresses will not be verified when entered into Theatre Manager.
    Internet Only E-mail addresses will be verified when entered through web sales.
    Everywhere E-mail addresses will always be verified when entered into Theatre Manager. This can slow down data entry but is the most accurate.

    PCI Security Tab

    The PCI Security tab allows the Master User to set the parameters of how Employees will log on to the database, the structure of their passwords, and important PCI Compliance considerations for credit card data.




    Employee Access Management

    Logon Window Setting Offers the option to have Employees login:
    Minimum Length Sets the minimum length of logon passwords. For PCI compliance, the minimum length is 7 characters.
    Unique Passwords The number of unique passwords required by the system. If set to zero, then passwords are not required to be unique. If set to 2, then the same password may be shared by two employees. If set to 3, then the same password may be shared by three employees.
    Days til Change Allowed The minimum number of days that a password must be used before it is allowed to be changed.
    Days until Expiry The maximum number of days that a password may be used. For PCI compliance, this must not exceed 90 days.
    Attempts til Lockout This determines how many incorrect attempts an employee may make before Theatre Manager will lock them out of the system and must be manually re-instated.
    By clicking this button, Theatre Manager will be set to use all the PCI Standards in terms of employee passwords and logons. Note: Use of this setting will change existing passwords to be fully PCI compliant, and all parameters to meet the minimum compliance standards.

    Credit Card Management

    Theatre Manager can implement either Schedule "C" or "D" for the Self-Assessment Questionnaire (SAQ) - the choice is yours. You can define a retention period for credit card information before it is 'shredded' per PCI DSS standard 3.1

    A shredded card means that it will be stored in the database as '#### **** **** ####'. This renders the PAN useless for all purposes. However, given the first 4 and last 4 digits of any card, you can still search for the patron.


    Schedule C:

    Shred cards after Daily Use

    Using an online payment gateway and the Schedule "C" setting effectively means that cards will be onsite for the duration of the transactions. Using PCCharge and the Schedule "C" setting effectively means that cards will be onsite for the duration of the day.

    Schedule D:

    Encrypted credit card data

    Schedule "D" compliance with about 120 days of retention is sufficient for most venues, especially if you are using post dated payments or may have to deal with refunds for cancelled events.
    Retention Period The number of days credit card information will be retained before it is shredded in a Schedule D environment. The recommended minimum is 90 days, and the recommended maximum is 365 days.
    Generates a completely random 40 character key to use as half of the encryption key process that will be unique to the venue and re-encrypt all cards in the database.
    Immediately shreds credit cards longer than the Retention Period as noted above.

    Shredding Credit Cards

    In Theatre Manager, 'shredding' credit cards means removing the middle 8 digits of a credit card number so that what is stored in the database is only the first four and last four digits of the number: 1234-xxxx-xxxx-1234. Cards stored in this manner cannot be accessed for use (because those 8 digits aren't masked - they really no longer exist). Users can still search the database for a credit card using the first four and last four digits for reporting and transaction history.


    There are two choices for 'Shredding' Credit Cards. The first method, Shredding Unused Credit Cards, allows a venue to set the number of days a credit card is stored in the usual encrypted format in the database (and is therefore available for use as a payment method for post-dated payments or in the patron's credit card tab), and then after that period, a card is considered "unused" and is shredded of its middle 8 digits.


    The second method, setting the database to Schedule C: Daily Shredding, will shred cards of those center 8 digits daily. This is rarely used, as it will prevent some common or desirable business functions (and maintaining Schedule D: Encrypted Credit Card data, the default PABP/PCI Compliant method will not prevent those functions).

    Shredding Unused Credit Cards

    The simplest solution for venues to have a higher degree of security in their database, than that allowed by the PABP/PCI compliant data encryption of the credit card numbers, is to "shred" unused or old credit cards in patron records.

    "Shredding" removes the middle 8 digits of the number and renders the card information unusable (as it is stored - you can still swipe or enter the card again in the future with no problem).

    To do "shred" a credit card, you perform the following steps:

    1. Open the PABP Security Tab in Setup > System Preferences.
    2. Under Credit Card Management, click the Shred Unused Credit Cards button.

      A dialogue opens, asking for a retention period during which cards are considered active (and therefore, not "unused"). We recommend at least 90 days, 365 as the longest.

    3. Click Shred Cards to immediately shred cards that have not been used in a number of days greater than that set as the retention period.

      this action cannot be undone!

    Schedule C Daily Shredding

    In some rare cases, a venue will choose to shred cards daily for added security. It is worth noting here that Theatre Manager's default method, Schedule B Data Encryption with a rotating encryption key, is PABP/PCI compliant. If a venue still wishes to shred cards daily:

    1. Go to System Setup > System Preferences > PABP Security Tab
    2. In Credit Card Management, change the radio button to Schedule C: Shred cards after daily use
    3. A series of warning messages will appear. Click the Yes button on each to proceed:

    System Preferences - Appearance Tab

    Appearance Tab

    The Appearance tab contains default text for various areas of Theatre Manager. These fields can be edited to language that best suits the organization. Click on any of the fields in the right hand column to edit the text.

    System Preferences - Box Office Tab

    Ticket Reservation Display Letters

    Letter Display Determine whether the price code or the seat code from the Buy Window appears on the seat in the map display. If you change the setting to or from 'Price Code' and 'Promotion Letter', you will need to verify future performances to change the actual letter display on the map.
    Set Colour of seats for current sale Click on this box brings up the colour palette window to allow the selection of both the foreground and background colours.
    Set Colour of seats for current exchange Click on this box brings up the colour palette window to allow the selection of both the foreground and background colours.

    Play Sell Warning Colours

    Performance has begun or is over Click on this box brings up the colour palette window to allow the selection of both the foreground and background colours.
    30 minutes until Performance starts Click on this box brings up the colour palette window to allow the selection of both the foreground and background colours.
    1 hour until Performance starts Click on this box brings up the colour palette window to allow the selection of both the foreground and background colours.
    2 Hours until Performance starts Click on this box brings up the colour palette window to allow the selection of both the foreground and background colours.
    4 hours until Performance starts Click on this box brings up the colour palette window to allow the selection of both the foreground and background colours.

    Held Seat Setup

    Hold Colour Clicking on each letter brings up the colour palette window to allow the selection of both the foreground and background colours. Seat hold letters are always represented with lowercase letters.. You can also define the meaning of the seat hold code by entering a description beside each of the 26 lower case letter codes.

    System Preferences - Licence Tab

    License Tab

    The License tab contains information about the components of Theatre Manger currently in use and provides the ability to purchase upgrades.

    Software License Profile

    Allows for the entry of a license upgrade. For more information on entering license upgrades click here.
    Software Features This is a list of all the possible features that Theatre Manager offers. The features that have check marks beside them are the features that the company currently has access to. In order to receive additional features that the Theatre Manager has to offer the organization must purchase a license upgrade.

    System Preferences - Licence Upgrades

    Purchasing a License Upgrade

    Once a company has purchased a license upgrade the new Customer and License numbers need to be entered to activate the additional features of Theatre Manager.

    1. Open Setup >> System Preferences

    2. Click the Purchase License Upgrade button.

      The Customer and License Number Window will open.

    3. Enter new customer number.
    4. Enter new license number.
    5. Click the Accept button.

      Theatre Manager will now automatically restart to activate the new features.

    System Preferences - Mandatory Data Tab

    Mandatory Data Tab

    The Mandatory Data tab defines fields that must be completed during household, company or patron insert.

    Patron Data

    Name Info Select what names must be given before a patron record can be saved.

    Patron Address Checking this box means that the patron's address must be entered before a patron record can be saved. Only one out of the two address lines need to contain information.
    Patron City Checking this box means that the patron's city must be entered before a patron record can be saved.
    Patron Province Checking this box means that the patron's province must be entered before a patron record can be saved.
    Patron Postal Code Checking this box means that the patron's postal/zip code must be entered before a patron record can be saved.
    At least on telephone number Checking this box will require a minimum of one phone number be given before a patron record can be saved.
    Area codes on all phone numbers Checking this box will require all phone numbers given be accompanied by an area code before a patron record can be saved.

    Payment Data

    Why Did Patron Buy Checking this box means that before a payment can be finalized the user must select the reason that the patron has made a purchase. The why did patron buy field is a drop down list that is found on the payment window. The values listed in why did patron buy can be customized. Click here for more information on customizing these values.
    Pressing this button will set the above options to the default settings that Theatre Manager recommends.

    System Preferences - Other Tab

    Other Tab

    The Other tab contains details on miscellanous information with Theatre Manager.

     

    Non Financial Transaction Management

    Do not purge after posting to the G/L Checking this box prevents non-posting transactions from being purged.
    Otherwise Keep For Determine the number of days to keep the non-posting transaction records before purging them.

    Data Management & Backup

    Backup Run Time Define the time that the system should run a backup each day. This is best done when the system is not in use.

    System Preferences - Security Tab

    Security Tab

    The Security tab can be used to set the password standards for logging into Theatre Manager.

    Employee Access Management

    Set the password standards to those recommended by the Credit Card Industry Task Force.

    Password Content

    Logon Window Setting

    Allows changes to the login window the users sees upon starting Theatre Manager.

    Minimum Length Defines the minimum length of a user's password.
    Unique Passwords Defines the number of unique passwords before a password can be re-used. Setting this to 0 (zero) ignores this setting.
    Days til Change Allowed Number of days before user is allowed to change password again. Setting this to 0 (zero) ignores this setting..
    Days until Expiry The number of days a password may be used before it must be changed. Setting this to 0 (zero) ignores this setting.
    Attempts until Lockout Number of invalid attempts to login that are allowed before the user is locked out. Setting this to 0 (zero) ignores this setting.
    Password is all Upper Case Checking this box sets all passwords to upper case.
    Require Mixed Case Checking this box requires that the password have at least one lower case and one upper case letter.
    Prevent Repeating Characters Checking this box denies the use of repeating characters.
    Require Number and Characters Checking this box requires that the password must have one letter and one number.

    System Preferences - Web Tab

    Web Tab

    The Web tab can be used to set the behaviors of Web Listeners.

     

    Web Sales Options

    Enable Web Sales Checking this box enables the use of the web sales module.
    Maximum Tickets The maximum number of tickets that may be purchased in a single web order.
    Remove The time in minutes before a performance start time that it is removed from web sales.
    Hold Letter Define the letter that will be displayed on the map when a web sale is in progress.

    Company Preferences

    Company Preferences

    Company Preferences allows customization of Theatre Manager to work optimally with a venue. From this window many of the features and behaviors of Theatre Manager specific to the company can be modified.

    In the outlet version of Theatre Manager, a master user will need to create a Company Preferences record for each participating company. The companies can then set their own default preferences to have different box office policies, names for entities, development defaults, etc.

    Opening the Company Preferences Window

    The Company Preferences Window is access through the Setup >> Company Preferences Menu.

    This will open the Company Preferences Window.

    Company Tab

    The Company tab contains all the information about the company.

     

    Default Company Information

    Short Name A shortened version of the company's name. The shortened company name is printed on all reports.
    Company The full legal name of the company.
    Address The location of the company offices.
    City The city in which the company is located.
    Province/State The province or state the company is in. The title of this field can be changed under the appearance tab of the Default Data Window.
    Postal Code/Zip Code The postal / zip code of the company. The title of this field can be changed under the appearance tab of the Default Data Window.
    Country The country in which the company is located.
    Telephone The company telephone number.
    Fax The company fax number.
    Web Site The Internet web site for the company.
    Web Server button Display a window showing web server SMTP settings.
    Meeting Server button Displays a window showing meeting server settings.

    Meeting Server SMTP/POP settings

    Meeting Reminder Email Setup

    Email Address The Internet Email address for the company.

    Meeting Reminder Outgoing Email

    SMTP server The email server for sending batch emails.
    User ID ID name required for email authentication.
    Password Password required for email authentication.
    SMTP Port Port to use for SMTP.
    Timeout Timeout period.
    Needs Authentication SMTP server requires password authentication. Encryption methods of NONE, LOGIN, PLAIN, CLEARTEXT, and CRAM-MD5 are supported.
    Use SSL SMTP server requires SSL. TLS (Transport Layer Security) is not supported at this time.
    This sends a test e-mail to verify that all settings have been entered correctly.
    Default Acceptance Status For Invitations Select Needs Invitation or Don't Ever Invite to indicate whether Email invitations need to be sent out or not.

    Meeting Reminder Incoming Email

    POP server The email server for receiving incoming emails.
    User ID ID name required for email authentication.
    Password Password required for email authentication.
    POP Port Port to use for POP.
    Timeout Timeout period.
    Needs Authentication SMTP server requires password authentication. Encryption methods of NONE, LOGIN, PLAIN, CLEARTEXT, and CRAM-MD5 are supported.
    Use SSL SMTP server requires SSL. TLS (Transport Layer Security) is not supported at this time.
    This checks the POP Email server to verify that all settings have been entered correctly.

    Web Server SMTP settings

    Web Email and E-blast Setup

    Email Address The Internet Email address for the company.
    SMTP server The email server for sending batch emails.
    User ID ID name required for email authentication.
    Password Password required for email authentication.
    SMTP Port Port to use for SMTP.
    Timeout Timeout period.
    Needs Authentication SMTP server requires password authentication. Encryption methods of NONE, LOGIN, PLAIN, CLEARTEXT, and CRAM-MD5 are supported.
    Use SSL SMTP server requires SSL to communicate with it.

    NOTE: STARTTLS (Transport Layer Security) is not supported at this time.

    This sends a test e-mail to verify that all settings have been entered correctly. If you get errors with emails, please refer to the SMTP Errors web page to help diagnose issues.

    Accounting Tab

    The Accounting tab allows changes to the company's accounting formats. Adjustments to the fiscal year and accounting format can be made here.

    General Accounting Information

    Fiscal Year This is the fiscal year that the company is currently in. This can be altered by clicking in the field and retyping the year.
    Month Start This is the month that the company's new fiscal year starts in. This can be altered by clicking in the field and retyping the month. If the fiscal start month is changed after sales information has been posted to the General Ledger accounts, it may be necessary to Recalculate General Ledger Totals.
    Store Years As - Start If selected the year stored in the GL will be the year at the beginning of the fiscal year. i.e. 2000/2001 fiscal year dates will be stored as 2000.
    Store Years As - End If selected the year stored in the GL will be the year at the end of the fiscal year. i.e. 2000/2001 fiscal year dates will be stored as 2001.

    Internal Account Number Format

    Account # Format Allows the account number to be up to 15 digits, excluding dashes, in any combination of numbers and dashes.
    Export Format Select which format to use for exporting GL entries for use with accounting software. Options include tab delimited format, XML Banner FINFEED, Excel Workbook 97-2004 (.xls) or Excel Workbook 2008 (.xlsx) format.
    This button will create a set of sample accounts if no accounts have been setup under Accounting >> G/L Accounts.

    Ticket Sales Deferred Revenue Rollover Options

    Day of Performance Moves money for the performance from Deferred to Sales on the day of the performance.
    Day after Performance Moves money for the performance from Deferred to Sales on the day after the performance.
    Day of First Performance Moves money for the play from Deferred to Sales on the day of the first performance.
    Day after Last Performance Moves money for the play from Deferred to Sales on the day of the last performance.
    During year end rollover for next season Moves money for the play from Deferred to Sales on the during the year end rollover.

    Default Sales Mode

    Sale Adds transactions to the Accounts Receivable ledger immediately.
    Reservation Adds transactions to the Accounts Receivable ledger after the first payment has been made.
    Do not allow 'Reservation Only' Will prevent the 'Reservation Only' option from appearing at checkout.

    Foreign Currency

    Other Country This is where an optional country can be selected for accepted foreign currency when selling tickets. If the organization does not accept foreign currency, set the country to the "home" country.
    Exchange Rate This is where the exchange rate for converting from the local currency to the currency of the foreign country is entered. If the organization does not accept foreign currency, set the exchange rate to 1.000000.

    Export Format Options

    Theatre Manager has formatting options for exporting GL data from TM to import into your accounting software.

    1. TM Tab Delimited format works with most accounting packages and with MS Excel. Most clients will use this format for GL exports.
    2. BANNER FINFEED creates an XML export file for use with the Banner financial package. If your organization uses Banner, then select this option. You will also want to visit the page describing the External Account information in GL Account Setup found here .
    3. Excel Workbook 97-2004 creates an .xls export file that can be opened directly in Microsoft Excel versions 97 through 2004 with no need for conversion.
    4. Excel Workbook 2008 creates an .xlsx export file that can be opened directly in Excel 2008 and higher with no need for conversion.

    End Of Day Tab

    This screen has an important button on it to reset the end of day use count and is described below. You may have to do this if you receive the message about a deposit in progress during end of day wizard.

    End of Day Wizard and Posting Options

    Allow sales while End of Day Wizard is Open Click to allow employees to continue with the day's sales while the End of Day is being run.
    # Times EOD is open A counter that tracks the number of times that End of Day is currently open.

    NOTE: If end of day wizard is not open, yet the end of day counter value is greater than zero, then use the Reset button to reset the end of day counter to zero so that you can resume your end of day processing. Doing this also clears the merchant in use settings if you receive a deposit in progress message.

    Web Logs and Shopping Cart Retention Policy

    Purge completed carts after "xx" days After this many days, purge web logs for carts where a patron signed in. Only logs are purged, not actual carts.
    Purge anonymous carts after "xx" days After this many days, purge web logs for carts which remained anonymous or were not attached to a patron. Only logs are purged, not actual carts.
    Purge misc data after "xx" days After this many days, purge miscellaneous data entry online that is not confirmed or saved by the patron.
    Purge unconfirmed mail list after "xx" hours This represents the amount of time (in hours) that a pending subscribe to a mail list will remain without confirmation. If a patron does not confirm addition to the mail list in less than the number of hours specified, the patron will be removed from the mail list.

    Deposit Reports Required

    Bank deposit summary by payment type When checked, a summary of all payments, sorted by type, will print automatically during End of Day. This report can also be found in Reports > Order and Payments > Bank Deposit - Totals
    Deposit detail of all payments When checked, a detail report of all payments in the deposit, sorted by patron, will print automatically during End of Day. This report can also be found in Reports > Order and Payments > Deposit Detail
    Cheque listing for bank deposit When checked, a list of cheque detail in the deposit (suitable for taking to the bank) will print automatically during End of Day. This report can also be found in Reports > Order and Payments > Bank Deposit - Cheque Listing

    Next Transaction Numbers

    Deposit Number The next bank deposit number. This value should not be set less than the current number.
    Till Bal(ance) Number The next till balance number. This value should not be set less than the current number.
    Sales Posting Number The next sales posting reference number. This value should not be set less than the current number.
    Member Control Number The next member control number. This value should not be set less than the current number.
    Date Last Deposit The date of the most recent successful (completed) End of Day Deposit in Theatre Manager.
    Date Last Posted The date of the most recent balance of the End of Day (Post to G/L) in Theatre Manager.
    Order Last Posted The last order number posted to the G/L during End of Day.

    Box Office Tab

    Adjustments to how the Box Office operates can be made from this tab.

    Managing the Sale

    Tix Sales Warning A warning notification is displayed on the screen if the number of tickets being sold is greater than this number.
    Warn if Performance Displays a warning on screen once a performance start time has gone past the denoted amount of time.
    Remove Performance Removes the performance from the sell list once this much time has elapsed past the start time. Users with past performance access can still sell to this performance.
    Display past play Number of days to still list past performances.
    Play Selection: Display Sold Out Performances Checking the box will show Sold Out performances from the Buy Window.
    Before Event Sales: New order for each transaction Checking the box will create a new order for each ticket transaction (generally each walk up patron).
    Warn if Receivables Over Checking the box will issue a warning to the screen when a patron's receivables exceed the value denoted.
    Next Season Starts Denotes when the next season starts.
    Why did Patron buy? The option selected from the drop-down will show on the Payment Window of an order as the default option for the patron's reason for buying the order. Options for the drop-down are set in Order reason to buy in Code Tables.

    System Plug Ins

    Checkout Plug In Allows the selection of a plug in to be used for after the order has been placed. Press the Plug In Search button to see all available plug ins.
    Payment Plug In Allows the selection of a plug in to be used for after the payment has been taken. Press the Plug In Search button to see all available plug ins.

    Orders and Payments

    Hold for Pickup / Taken If selected, this option will be the default on the Payment Window and indicates that tickets are generally held to be taken by the patron or are immediately taken by the patron (walk-up).
    Mail to Patron If selected, this option will be the default on the Payment Window and indicates that tickets are to be mailed to the patron.
    Hold for Will Call If selected, this option will be the default on the Payment Window and indicates that tickets are to be held for Will Call for the door sale of the performance.

    Exchange Policies

    Collect $ for higher price If selected the difference between the exchanged tickets and the new higher priced tickets will need to be collected.
    Collect $ for lower price If selected the difference between the exchanged tickets and the new lower priced tickets will need to be refunded.
    Exchanged tickets retain original price If selected when tickets are exchanged for lower priced tickets the lower priced tickets adopt the price of the original tickets.

    Ticket Faces Tab

    Default Ticket Faces

    Address Ticket The address ticket face number.
    Default to 'Print Address Header' on payment window. When checked, this will set the Address Ticket to always be selected for printing by default on the Payment Window.

    Credit Card Receipts

    Receipt Ticket The receipt ticket face number.
    Print Automatically for Patron Present credit card payments. Prints a credit card receipt automatically if a card is swiped in the box office - ie. the payment source is marked "patron present".
    Print Automatically for Telephone and Mail Order credit card payments. Prints a credit card receipt automatically if a card is keyed in manually in the box office - ie. the payment source is marked "telephone" or "mail" order in the payment window.
    Prompt user if receipt required when no tickets are being printed. When selected, a window will open during payment that prompts the user to select a credit card/address ticket receipt option when tickets are not being printed in the order - ie. when "Accept Payment" is clicked instead of "Print Tickets".
    Print Receipts The number of times the credit card receipt should be printed.

    Ticket Stock Management

    Approx. Tickets Left The count of the number of blank tickets that you currently have in stock.
    Reorder Level The point at which Theatre Manager will show a reminder to you to order more ticket stock. You will get a warning if the approximate count of tickets dips below this number. We recommend setting this number to be the number of tickets you will print in an average month.

    Since theatre manager counts each ticket that is printed, the purpose of tracking ticket inventory is so that you do not run out of tickets at a critical time.

    Holds Tab

    This section defines the appearance and release time for held seats. Held seats can be set to automatically release prior to the performance. Enter the time before the performance that the seats are to be released.

    Held Seat Setup

    Auto Release Holds The number of minutes prior to a performance that held seats will be released.
    Holds to Release The letters, representing a held seat, to be released.
    Set default holds using venue map when creating a new performance Use the map holds as the default setting when creating a new performance.
    Holds at other Outlets. These holds codes may be released by sales people working at other outlets if they have access to those hold codes in their own outlet.
    Release all expired holds for all performances. For more information about this function, click here.

    Web Options Tab

    Web Sales Options

    Enable Web Sales Enables sales to occur on the web. If turned off, users will receive a message that the site is down.
    Auto Start Automatically starts the web listener when the web sales listener window is opened.
    Allow Anonymous Login Patrons can shop and add items to a web sales baskets without logging in.
    Send web log to disk. When selected, web logs will be saved to disk in addition to be saved in the database.
    Look Ahead Number of days in advance events should be displayed for.
    Max Events The maximum number of events to be displayed on the events page.
    Timeout The number of minutes a patron accesses a page without activity before the cart becomes inactive and the items released.
    Log Size The maximum number of lines in the web listener display log. Larger numbers require more memory.

    Permitted Web Ticket Printing Options

    Mail to patron Tickets purchased on the internet are marked for printing and mailing by the box office. A Mail Fee must be entered above in order for this option to be selected. When selected, online patrons are presented with a Mail My Tickets option at checkout.
    Mail Fee The number of the order fee designated as a Mail Fee in Fee Tables.
    Print At Home Tickets Tickets purchased on the internet are marked as printed and patrons are presented with the option to print their own bar-coded tickets.
    Hold for Will Call When selected, patrons online can select to have the box office print and hold their tickets in Will Call.

    HTML Page Substitution Options

    Show sales promotion When selected, the sales promotion's external description will be visible to patrons online during seat selection.
    Show price code When selected, the Price Code description will be visible to patrons online during seat selection.
    Accept active coupons When selected, patrons will be able to enter a coupon code at checkout. For more about coupons, click here.
    Enable presale access codes When selected, patrons will be able to enter a presale access code on the Events list online in order to see shows which are not online for sale to the general public. For more about presale access codes, click here.
    Suggest donation in cart When selected, patrons will be asked to include a donation with their order at checkout.
    Acknowledge terms When selected, patrons will be required to read/accept the terms and conditions at checkout. For information about the tmtermsandconditions.html page, click here.

    Apache Tab

    Apache Web Server External URL

    Web Server URL The domain for the ticketing site.
    Web Server Port # Enter the port number that the web server will be using for incoming connections. If this is blank (recommended), then 80 is the default for http and 443 for https.

    Web Listener Contact IP Address

    Internal Router If the network uses more then one router for configuration the external IP address of the internal router should be entered in this field.
    Listener Port # The port that should be used by the web listener to listen for incoming connections. By default Theatre Manager will start at Port 5111 and work it's way up sequentially depending on the number of listeners.

    Template Page Management

    Template Page URL This should be the location of the web pages within the network. Traditionally this is appears as the domain for the ticketing site.
    Template Page Port # Enter the port number that the template server will be using for incoming connections. If this is blank, then 80 is the default for http and 443 for https.
    Last Cache Clear The date the cache on the web listener was last cleared. The button to the right of this field can be used to clear the cache on all currently running listeners simultaneously.

    Template Page FTP Access

    FTP User ID The ID name as it appears in the FTP application. For more information about setting up FTP access to Apache, click here.
    FTP Password The password corresponding to the ID for the FTP application.
    FTP Port # The desired port for FTP communication within the network.
    Use FTP Options The option to use for sending via FTP. Selections include FTP Only, FTP with SSL, and FTP with TLS/SSL.
    Use this button to Test your FTP settings. For more information about setting up FTP Access in Company Preferences, click here.

    Web Listener Tab

    The Web Listener tab controls ways that the Web Listeners operate.

    Parts of the Web Listener tab

    Statistics Tracking and Performance Settings

    Sample Interval The amount of time between each snapshot of usage statistics from the apache server. By default, this is set to 60 minutes. You can change it to 0 if no statistics are to be gathered.
    Web Log Level The verbosity level of the web logs - select what type of reporting to see in the web logs from the drop-down. Errors is the default setting.
    Transactions - create at time of sale The web listener (like the Box Office) creates transactions at the completion of the order. However you can change this to create the transactions at the time of sale. this will cause the web listener to slow down.
    Eblast/Web Page Footer for Google Analytics If you have a Google Analytics account, Google will provide a tracking code for you to include at the bottom of your web pages. Enter that code in this area, and Google will track your traffic. Having code here will also allow you to add this field at the bottom of eblasts so you can track traffic on your eblast mailings. For more on Google Analytics, click here. For more on eblasts, click here.
    Tests the maximum speed for checking in an entire performance record (and then restoring it to its original status). An onscreen report is generated with statistics of its speed.
    Tests the maximum speed for selling and refunding tickets to a performance one ticket at a time. This is best used from multiple workstations to get an idea of how well the database server might respond under load and should only be used in a performance that is not yet for sale to the public and does not have an tickets currently sold to it.
    Ticket Holds in Abandoned Carts This setting indicates how long Theatre Manager will allow tickets to remain in web carts that are no longer in use. You can also manually clear expired holds. For more information on manually clearing expired web holds, click here.
    Web Languages The languages supported in your htdocs (web pages). Each is designated by a two-character language code (eg, EN for English, FR for French) and will also be designated in the name of the WebPages folder(s) inside htdocs (eg. WebPagesEN and WebPagesFR).

    Check Scan Performance

    causes Theatre Manager to initiate a test to try to determine the maximum speed for checking in and checking out an entire performance record (when complete, all tickets are returned to their original status).

    An onscreen report is generated with statistics of its speed. This can be useful if you need to check network speed when using attendance scanners.

    You will need to provide a performance that has ticket sold to it as per the window below and then click 'Test' to initiate the test.

    Performance Sales Test

    tests the maximum speed for selling and refunding tickets to a performance one ticket at a time. This can be used from multiple workstations to get an idea of how well the database server might respond under load.

    The general process that the test goes through is that Theatre Manager

    1. Creates an order for the person you are logged in under
    2. Randomly generates a number of seats that it wants to buy (1 to 6)
    3. Uses the best seat algorithm to find something in the performance. If nothing is found, it tries again with a different number of seats.
    4. After a random number of tickets have been booked, The test releases 10% of the tickets in the order, one at a time.
    5. Steps 2 to 4 are repeated until there is nothing left to sell or the find best seats algorithm returns no tickets found.
    6. The test reports some statistics and asks if you want all the tickets to be released. This is done, one at a time, to create as much contention as possible with the database

    Some suggestions for setting up a multi-workstaton test are:

    • Make a backup of the database before starting.
    • Use performances that are not on sale to the public and have no tickets currently sold to it. This will make it easier to refund tickets if there is any issues.
    • You can used the same (or different) performances at each workstation which will slightly alter the meaning of the test. Selling for the same performance might imply testing for sellout conditions. Selling to different performances might imply standard box office walkup sales loading. Note that transactions are not created for the performances.
    • Log in as:
      • Different users on each workstation to simulate standard box office load -or-
      • The same user, if you wish to test a scenario akin to using the same web listener id on multiple listeners.
    • At the completion of the test:
      • Go to the patron record for the users involved and make sure that all tickets are released.
      • Verify the totals in each performance/event used in the test using play and dates (GL tab) to make sure totals are correct.
      • Run the create sales entries to make sure there is no impact on the GL.

    You can also watch the sales process from another workstation by opening up the sales window to the performance(s) used and clicking on the map background to see how it is progressing.

    Donations Tab

    This tab allows the setting of the default setting of the patron's name in the program when a donation is received.

    Donation Program Recognition Name

    Last Name, First Name If selected the name of the donor will appear on the program as Last Name, First Name
    First Name Last Name If selected the name of the donor will appear on the program as First Name Last Name
    Formal Name If selected the name of the donor will appear on the program as Formal Name. This includes all prefixes and titles.

    Misc Donation Information

    Next Contact Date The default number of months to set for the next contact with a donor. This value can be changed on a per-donation basis to override the default.

    Donation Tax Receipts

    Charitable Number The organization's government-issued Charitable Organization Number.
    # of Copies The number of copies of the donation receipt to print.
    Next Tax Receipt # The next donation receipt number.
    Starting Address Height The space to leave between the top of the receipt and the address.
    Default Receipt Type The donor receipt printing option.
    3 per 8.5x11" page Prints three receipts per 8.5x11" page.
    4 per 8.5x14" legal page Prints four receipts per 8.5x14" page.
    Comment or Issuing Location The general message on the receipt for every donation.

    Appearance Tab

    The appearance tab allows the change to the titles of common fields. A common example is province / state if the company is located in a country which uses "states." Simply change the value to the right of the title below and click the Save button.

    Some examples of alternate titles are listed below.

    Donor Donor, Sponsor
    Donation Donation, Gift
    Event Event, Play, Show, Game, Rodeo, Movie
    Festival Seating Festival, General
    Household Household, Family
    Internet Fee Internet Fee, Convenience Fee
    Media Media, Press
    Member Member, Voucher, Pass, Gift Certificate
    Membership Membership, Pass, Certificate
    Patron Patron, Customer, Client
    Performance Performance, Show
    Personnel Personnel, Volunteer, Actor, Staff
    Postal Code Postal Code, Zip Code
    Province Province, State, Territory
    Seat Seat, Chair
    Section Section, Door
    Social Security Social Security, Social Insurance
    Spouse Spouse, Partner, Parent
    Venue Venue, Theatre, Arena

    Mandatory Data Tab

    This tab allows setting which fields are required on the creation of a new patron.

    Default Data on Patron Insert

    City Checking this box ensures a default City is entered into the City field when a new patron is inserted. The default City comes from the city field under the Company Tab.
    Province Checking this box ensures a default Province/State is entered into the Province/State field when a new patron is inserted. The Province/State comes from the Province/State field under the Company Tab.
    Postal Code Checking this box ensures a default Postal/Zip Code is entered into the Postal/Zip Code field when a new patron is inserted. The Postal/Zip Code comes from the Postal/Zip Code field under the Company Tab.

    Mandatory Fields On Donor Window

    Donor #1 (Donor#1 (pop-up)

    Customizable pop-up donor field defined by the user.

    Donor #2 (Donor#2 (pop-up) Customizable pop-up donor field defined by the user.
    Donor #3 (Donor#3 (pop-up) Customizable pop-up donor field defined by the user.
    Donor #4 (Donor#4 (Char)) Customizable character donor field defined by the user.

    Mandatory Fields On Order Window

    Allow postal code to be entered on order When selected, a field for the postal code will appear on the Order Window and may be filled in (but is not required).
    Require postal code to be entered. When selected, a field for the postal code will appear on the Order Window and must be filled in.

    Marketing Data

    Patron age code Patron Age Marketing field.
    Marketing #1 Customizable marketing field defined by the user.
    Marketing #2 Customizable marketing field defined by the user.
    Marketing #3 Customizable marketing field defined by the user.
    Marketing #4 Customizable marketing field defined by the user.
    Marketing #5 Customizable marketing field defined by the user.
    Marketing #6 Customizable marketing field defined by the user.
    Marketing #7 Customizable marketing field defined by the user.
    Marketing #8 Customizable marketing field defined by the user.

    Default Values on Order Insert

    Postal Code (Before Event="xx") When checked, sales entered during Before Event Sales will all pull the postal code value from the Company Tab into the Postal Code field on the Order Window.
    Postal Code (PWYC="xx") When checked, sales entered during Pay What You Can (PWYC) mode will all pull the postal code value from the Company Tab into the Postal Code field on the Order Window.
    Postal Code (all others=value in patron address) When checked, all sales will pull the value from the postal code in the patron's primary address into the postal code field on the Order window.

    Reports/Misc Tab

    Date & Time

    Date Format The format for the date. Use the list window for all possible options.
    Time Format The format for the time. Use the list widow for all possible options.
    Time Zone What time zone the company is in. When Theatre Manager starts, it will base the time on this setting.
    Observe Daylight Savings Check the Observe Daylight Savings box if applicable in the region.

    Batch Printing Queue

    The Printer Batch Queue allows users to setup reports to be created and printed during nonprime business hours.
    Weekdays The time of day for the reports in the printer queue to start printing for Monday through Friday.
    Weekends The time of day for the reports in the printer queue to start printing for Saturday and Sunday.
    Warn if Reports in Queue When Quitting Click to warn a 'logging off employee' if there are any reports in the Batch Printer Queue to be printed. At least one employee must remain logged on to have the reports in the queue to be printed during nonprime time hours.

    Miscellaneous

    SQL Server ID This is the unique ID for this outlet in the database.

    Employee Access Management

    Inactivity Timeout Number of minutes of inactivity before Theatre Manager will log out the current user.

    Company Logo

    Logo Add a company logo to appear on reports when printed.

    Facility Management Tab

    This page is under construction.

    Gantt Chart Default Settings

    Wash Type This is the type of bar you wish displayed on the Gantt chart in the Facility Management Projects window.
    Fill Colour Select the default fill colour for new bars in the Gantt chart.
    Text Colour Select the default text colour for new bars in the Gantt chart.

    Batch Functions

    The Batch menu allows a number of batch functions to be performed. Batch functions are used for processing items in a group. For example, the printing of all tickets to a performance that have not been printed is done as a batch function rather than through each patron's record.

    1. From the main menu bar, go to Setup >> Batch Functions.

      This will display a submenu with a list of available batch functions.

      Print Uprinted Tickets Used for the printing of all tickets that have not been printed for a performance. For more information on using the Print Unprinted Tickets function, click here.
      Unprint Batch of Tickets Used for reprinting a previously printed batch of tickets. This removes the 'Printed' flag from the tickets. For more information on the Unprint Batch of Tickets function, click here.
      Print Ticket Invoices Used for printing all ticket invoices that have been marked for printing. For more information on the Print Ticket Invoices function, click here.
      Print Unprinted Passes Used for printing all passes that have not been printed. For more information on the Print Unprinted Passes function, click here.
      Unprint Batch of Passes Used for reprinting a previously printed batch of passes. This removes the 'Printed' flag from the pass(es). For more information on the Unprint Batch of Passes function, click here.
      Print Charitable Receipts for Donor Used for printing all charitable receipts that have been marked for printing. For more information on the Print Charitable Receipts for Donor function, click here.
      Print Annual Summary Charitable Receipts for Donor Used for printing all charitable receipts that have been marked for printing in an Annual Statement style. For more information on the Print Annual Summary Charitable Receipts for Donor function, click here.
      Unprint Batch of Charitable Receipts Used for reprinting a previously printed batch of charitable receipts. This removes the 'Printed' flag from the receipts. For more information on the Unprint Batch of Charitable Receipts function, click here.
      Order Balances Used for recalculating the order balances of all orders within a given range. For more information on the Order Balances function, click here.
      Patron Balances Used for recalculating the patron balances within a given range. For more information on the Patron Balances, click here.
      Orders Currently Being Sold Opens a window displaying a list of all orders currently flagged as being sold. This is useful if a workstation crashes in the middle of an order. For more information on the Orders Currently Being Sold function, click here.
      Clear/Replace Patron Fields This function will be implemented at a later date.

    Print Unprinted Tickets

    The Print Unprinted Tickets function is commonly used to print all tickets for a performance that have not been printed. Multiple performances can be printed in one batch, but it is recommended that each batch be a separate performance.

    From the main menu bar, go to Setup >> Batch Functions >> Print Unprinted Tickets.

    This will open two windows, with the Parameter window in front.

    Parts of the Unprinted Parameters Window

    If available, uses the default search criteria for this report.
    If this report has previously been run, this button will add the previous criteria.
    Opens a list of saved criteria for this report.
    Saves the current criteria to be used later.
    Saves the current criteria to be used later and opens a dialog to name this criteria.
    Opens the Add/Edit Parameter window to facilitate adding new criteria. Click here for more information on the Add/Edit Parameter window.
    Opens the currently selected criteria in the Add/Edit Parameter window to allow adjustments.
    Deletes the currently selected criteria.
    Deletes all criteria from the Search tab.
    Allows for adjustments to the criteria if more specialization is available.
    Prints a listing of the criteria currently in the Search tab.
    Tests the current criteria to see how many records will be returned. A message will appear at the bottom of the window showing the number of records to be returned.
    Groups the currently selected criteria. This forces the criteria to take precedence in the search.
    Ungroups the currently selected criteria.
    The Search tab is used to enter the criteria to be used in the search of records. For more information on the Search tab, click here.
    The Selection Limits tab is used to enter limits for the number of items to be printed. For more information on the Selection Limits tab, click here.
    The Additional Items tab is used to mark any additional items that should be printed when the batch is printed. For more information on the Additional Items tab, click here.
    The Sort tab is used to determine how the batch should be sorted when printed. For more information on the Sort tab, click here.

    For more information on the Batch Printing window for batch ticket printing, click here.


    Search tab

    The Print Unprinted Tickets function is commonly used to print all tickets for a performance that have not been printed. Multiple performances can be printed in one batch, but it is recommended that each batch be a separate performance.

    1. From the main menu bar, go to Setup >> Batch Functions >> Print Unprinted Tickets.

      This will open two windows, with the Parameter window in front.

    2. Enter the criteria for the batch.

      In the example above, one event and performance date have been selected.

    3. Click the button once the criteria has been entered.

    Selection Limits

    Set the selections in the window. These options include:
    All orders containing unprinted tickets Prints all unprinted tickets within any order that meets the Search criteria, regardless of payment status.
    Fully paid orders Prints all unprinted tickets within any order that meets the Search criteria, but only for fully paid orders.
    Fully paid orders, where payments are also deposited. Prints all unprinted tickets within any order that meets the Search criteria, but only for fully paid orders, for whom the End Of Day has been run and payments have been deposited.
    Limit Batch Size (optional) Allows you to limit the batch print size to accommodate ticket printing capacity and stock currently loaded in the printer.
    Past Plays/Events (optional) Allows you to print tickets for past events that may not have been printed, if they meet the selection criteria. This is useful if you wish to provide a patron who missed the event with a ticket (as a receipt) of their purchase.
    and then click the button.

    This will move to the next tab in the Parameter window.

    Additional Items tab

    Set the additional items to be printed. These items include (each of which are optional):
    Print Address Ticket Prints an address ticket at the head of each order. This is useful when batch printing season tickets to be mailed.
    Print Credit Card Receipt Prints a credit card receipt following each completed order.
    Include Memberships Includes membership ticket faces (if one has been assigned in the membership setup).
    Include Donations Includes donation ticket faces (if one has been assigned in the donation setup).
    Mark Tickets as Printed Changes the ticket printed status on the ticket from "Not Printed" to "Printed." Use this option to indicate in the patron record that the tickets have been printed.
    and then click the button.

    This will move to the next tab in the Parameters window.

    Sort Options

    Set the sort options for the tickets. These options include:
    Sort Tickets By Options to sort either by Patron Last Name or Postal Code, then Patron last Name. The latter can be useful if mailing susbcription tickets by postal code.
    And then sort by
    • Date, Section/Row/Seat. This is useful for subscription printing.
    • Date, Seat Code. The Seat Code is defined in the Venue Map setup. To learn more about the Seat Code, click here
    • Section/Row/Seat, Date. This is useful for subscription printing.
    • Seat Code, Date. The Seat Code is defined in the Venue Map setup. To learn more about the Seat Code, click here

    Then click the Done button.

    This will close the Parameters window and reveal the Batch Ticket Printing window.

    The Batch Printing Window

    The Batch Printing window allows for the final options to be set prior to printing a batch.

    Parts of the Batch Printing Window

    Opens the Parameter window for adjustments to be made to the search parameters. For more information on the Parameters window, click here.
    Opens the selected item.
    Removes the selected item from the batch.
    Reverts to the last saved search criteria.
    Exports the list of items in the batch to a TXT file.
    Prints the list of items in the batch.
    The Ticket Counts tab gives a summary of the items in the batch. Additional final options can also be set prior to printing the batch. For more information on the Ticket Counts tab, click here.
    The Selected Tickets tab lists all of the items that will be printed in the batch. For more information on the Selected Tickets tab, click here.

    Ticket Counts

    Once you have clicked the button on the Sort Options window, the second window in the Batch Print process will come to the front.


    The number of tickets to be printed will appear in the Tickets field. For more information on the Batch Printing window, click here.

    Set any final printing options, and click the Start Printing button.

    The tickets will now begin printing to the selected ticket printer.

    Parts of the Batch Printing Ticket Counts Tab

    The Selected Tickets tab lists all of the items that will be printed in the batch. For more information on the Selected Tickets tab, click here.
    Tickets The total number of tickets to be printed in the batch.
    Include When checked, this item will be printed in the batch.
    Mark As Printed When checked, this item will be marked as printed, but nothing will be printed.
    Memberships The total number of memberships in the batch.
    Send Notifications The letter associated with this item that will be included.
    Donations The total number of donations in the batch.
    Credit Card Receipts The total number of credit card receipts in the batch.
    Address Header The total number of address header tickets in the batch.
    Total Ticket Stock The grand total number of tickets that will be printed so that the stock in the printer can be verified prior to printing.

    Notification Routing

    Print Letters If notification has been set for any of the items, the notifications will be printed.
    Email Letter If notification has been set for any of the items, the notifications will be emailed.

    Ticket Cutting Options

    Cut each ticket Tells the ticket printer to cut the stock after each ticket.
    Cut after last ticket printed for patron Tells the ticket printer to cut the stock after the last ticket for each patron is printed.
    Do not cut tickets Tells the printer to not cut the stock until the end of the batch.
    Starts the printing of the batch.

    Selected Tickets Tab

    The Batch Printing window allows for the final options to be set prior to printing a batch.

    Parts of the Batch Printing Selected Tickets Tab

    The Ticket Counts tab gives a summary of the items in the batch. Additional final options can also be set prior to printing the batch. For more information on the Ticket Counts tab, click here.
    Order # The Order number associated with the item.
    Patron # The Patron Number to whom the tickets were sold.
    Last Name The last name of the patron.
    First Name The first name of the patron.
    Company The company of the patron.
    Event/Play The event the item is for.
    Performance The performance the item is for.
    Qty The quantity of the item.
    Section The section the ticket is in.
    Row # The row number the ticket is in.
    Seat # The seat number the ticket is in.
    PC The price code that was used with the ticket.
    Promotion The promotion that was used with the ticket.
    Starts the printing of the batch.

    Other Fields Not Shown

    Total The total price of the ticket.
    Date Printed The date the tickets were printed. Normally blank, but if the tickets were previously printed, their original print date would appear here.
    Date The date of the performance.
    Time The time of the performance.
    Play/Event Title The play or event title.
    Ticket # The serial number of the ticket.
    Notes Any order notes for the selected ticket.

    Unprint Batch of Tickets

    The Unprint Batch of Tickets function allows for the 'Printed' flag to be removed from tickets so that they can be printed again. This is helpful when a batch of tickets needs to be reprinted. To access the Unprint Batch Of Tickets function:

    From the main menu bar, go to Setup >> Batch Functions >> Unprint Batch of Tickets.

    This will open the Unprint Batch of Tickets window.

    Parts of the Unprint Batch of Tickets Window

    Clicking "Open" with a ticket highlighted opens the ticket detail window. For more on the Ticket Data window, click here.
    Clicking the Unprint button will set the print status on the selected ticket(s) to "unprinted."
    Clicking the Refund button will open the Refund Wizard and refund the selected tickets. For more on the Refund Wizard window, click here.
    Prints the selected tickets. This option is only available if the selected tickets have the ticket status of "unprinted."

    Ticket Data Window

    The ticket detail window allows you to view the specific details surrounding the sale of the selected ticket.

    Ticket Detail Tab

    The ticket detail window allows you to view the specific details surrounding the sale of the selected ticket.

    Details include

    • Event Name, Venue, Performance Date and time and seat
    • Promotion and Employee Sold by
    • Pricing details, including Ticket Fees and Taxes
    • Order details, including Patron Name, Order #, Ticket Serial #, Date purchased/Journalized/Printed. Clickable icons are provided for direct access to:
      • The Patron record
      • The gifted ticket recipient
      • The Order
      • The Season Package Favorite Seats window
    • Attendance Status, including scanner ID (if the ticket was scanned)
    • Auction Item notes (if applicable)

    Transactions Tab

    The Transactions tab allows you to view the specific details surrounding the audit transactions of the selected ticket.

    Parts of the Transactions Tab

    Seq # The transaction reference number.
    Trans Date Date the transaction took place.
    Journal No Journal Entry reference number.
    Code Theatre Manager reference code used to determine the type of transaction.
    Transaction Desc Brief description of what the transaction was.
    Order # Reference number used to tract the components of the order.
    Play Code Play code reference the donation is associated with.
    Performance Code Performance code reference the donation is associated with.

    Order Notes tab

    The Order Notes tab allows you to view the specific details surrounding the processing of the order of the selected ticket. The tab discloses the Ticket Handling, Why Patron Bought, Ticket Comments, and any Order Notes.

    Ticket Refund Wizard

    The Ticket Refund Wizard allows you to refund tickets from the Unprint Tickets window.


    1. Select the tickets you wish to refund. Options include:
      • Refunding only the selected ticket
      • Refunding ALL the tickets for the given performance.
    2. Select the option to refund only the ticket paid for via Credit Card
    3. Select whether to refund payments. Options include:
      • Do not create refund payments. Ticket will be refunded, but the payment will not, leaving a credit balance on the patron's account.
      • Create a payment if a credit card was originally used to pay for the order. This will add a refund to the credit card that was used to pay for the order, and will appear in your End Of Day.

        If you have opted to shred credit cards daily (Schedule C or D PCI Compliance) then this option will not be available.

    4. Click the button.

    Unprinting a batch of Tickets

    The Unprint Batch of Tickets function allows for the 'Printed' flag to be removed from tickets so that they can be printed again. This is helpful when a batch of tickets needs to be reprinted.

    1. From the main menu bar, go to Setup >> Batch Functions >> Unprint Batch of Tickets.

      This will open the Unprint Batch of Tickets window.

    2. Enter the date the tickets were printed in the From and To fields.
    3. Click the Search button to begin the search.

      Any tickets printed in the date range given will appear.

    4. Highlight the tickets to be unprinted.

      Use the <SHIFT> key to highlight a range of tickets. To highlight multiple individual tickets, hold the <CTRL> key (Windows) or the <OPTION> key (Mac).

    5. Click the Unprint button to remove the 'Printed' flag.

      The tickets can now be added to a new batch of tickets to be printed.

    Print Ticket Invoices

    Invoices can be created for any order at any time. Using the proper criteria, it is easy to create invoices for orders. To access the Print Ticket Invoices function, you can go to either:

    Setup >> Batch Functions >> Print Ticket Invoices.

    Or through the Reports >> Ticket Printing, Invoicing and Inventory Analysis >> Print Invoices function.

    This will open the Print Invoice Criteria window.

    For more information on the Print Invoice Criteria window, click here.

    The Print invoices Criteria Window


    Parts of the Print Invoices Criteria Window

    If available, uses the default search criteria for this report.
    If this report has previously been run, this button will add the previous criteria.
    Opens a list of saved criteria for this report.
    Saves the current criteria to be used later.
    Saves the current criteria to be used later and opens a dialog to name this criteria.
    Opens the Add/Edit Parameter window to facilitate adding new criteria. Click here for more information on the Add/Edit Parameter window.
    Opens the currently selected criteria in the Add/Edit Parameter window to allow adjustments.
    Deletes the currently selected criteria.
    Deletes all criteria from the Search tab.
    Allows for adjustments to the criteria if more specialization is available.
    Prints a listing of the criteria currently in the Search tab.
    Tests the current criteria to see how many records will be returned. A message will appear at the bottom of the window showing the number of records to be returned.
    Groups the currently selected criteria. This forces the criteria to take precedence in the search.
    Ungroups the currently selected criteria.
    The Search tab is used to enter the criteria to be used in the search of records. For more information on the Search tab, click here.
    The Header tab is used to enter options regarding the Address Label, format of the invoice (Invoice, Statement, Payment Reminder, Confirmation, or Contract), and layout. For more information on the Header tab, click here.
    The Footer tab is used to enter options for a tear off section, and comments to the recipient. For more information on the Footer tab, click here.
    The Tickets tab is used to choose options for ticket summary and details to be included in the invoice. For more information on the Tickets tab, click here.
    The Membership tab is used to choose options for membership (pass/gift certificate) summary and details to be included in the invoice. For more information on the Membership tab, click here.
    The Donations tab is used to choose options for donation summary and details to be included in the invoice. For more information on the Donations tab, click here.
    The Projects tab is used to choose options for project summary and details to be included in the invoice (Facilities Management module only). For more information on the Projects tab, click here.
    The Payments tab is used to choose options for the payment summary and details to be included in the invoice. For more information on the Payments tab, click here.
    The Fees & Taxes tab is used to choose options for fee and tax summary and details to be included in the invoice. For more information on the Fees & Taxes tab, click here.
    The Sort tab is used to enter the sort order parameters for the printed batch. For more information on the Sort tab, click here.
    The Search tab is used to enter optional titles and descriptions for the printed invoice. For more information on the Titles tab, click here.
    Proceeds to the next tab in the Print Invoices Criteria.
    Cancels that adding of criteria and returns the user to the Report window.
    Completes the addition of criteria and the sorting of data, and begins to generate the report. Click here for more information on the Finished Report window.

    Search Tab

    The Search tab allows you to enter criteria to locate pending ticket invoices needing to be printed from within the database.


    Parts of the Print Invoices Search Tab

    Exclude Records These checkboxes provide the opportunity to exclude patrons based on the settings within the Marketing tab on the patron record. For more information on the Marketing tab click here.
    Household Options Use Household Options to indicate which patrons will receive the invoice. Options include:
    • All Patrons. All patrons who match the criteria will receive an invoice.
    • Primary Patrons Only. If anyone within the household matches the criteria, the Primary Patron will receive the Invoice.
    • Non-Primary Patrons Only. In a non-primary patron matches the criteria, they will receive the invoice. Primary Patrons are excluded.
    The criteria window Criteria used to batch print invoices is entered here using the button. For more information on how to add criteria to a report or invoice, click here.
    Proceeds to the next tab in the Print Invoices Criteria.
    Cancels the adding of criteria and clears the window.
    Completes the addition of criteria and the sorting of data, and begins to generate the invoice.

    Header Tab

    The Header tab allows you to choose options regarding layout of the address portion, the columns included and the overall look of the Invoice.


    Parts of the Header Tab

    Address Label Allows you to select how the address portion of the Invoice will appear.
    • Strict Address Compliance. Forces the address to appear according to official postal guidelines. These include all caps, and specific abbreviations for Road (RD), Street (ST), Boulevard (BLVD), etc.
    • Regular Name. The first and last name of the patron.
    • Formal Name. The full formal name of the patron: Mr. John Q. Public, Jr.
    • Company. The company name (if applicable).
    • Title. Patron title (e.g. President, Manager, Principal).
    • Address Comment. An opportunity for you to add a comment line to the address field.
    Layout Allows you to select which columns will appear on the Invoice.
    • Show Date Column. Includes a column for date of service.
    • Regular Name. The first and last name of the patron.
    • Show Item Column. Includes the item name.
    • Show Quantity Column. Includes the quantity of the the item.
    Invoice Title & Style Allows you to select the style of the invoice.
    • Invoice. Used when no payment has been received on an order. For an example of an Invoice, click here.
    • Statement. Used when a payment has been received on an order, and you are sending a statement of the current financial status of the order. For an example of a Statement, click here.
    • Payment Reminder. Used as a reminder for an upcoming payment. For an example of a Payment Reminder, click here.
    • Confirmation. Used as a confirmation for an order. For an example of a Confirmation, click here.
    • Contract. Used as a "sign and return" contract for the sale of an order. For an example of a Contract, click here.
    Returns to the previous tab in the Print Invoices Criteria.
    Proceeds to the next tab in the Print Invoices Criteria.
    Cancels the adding of criteria and clears the window.
    Completes the addition of criteria and the sorting of data, and begins to generate the invoice.

    Footer Tab

    The Footer tab allows you to decide whether to include a tear-off section at the bottom of the invoice or not. It also allows you to indicate how many minutes prior to an event patrons should arrive, and add any comments to the invoice.


    Parts of the Footer Tab

    Print Tear Off Section By checking this option, a tear off section will appear at the bottom of the invoice.
    Performance Start Warning Time Allows entry of a suggested arrival time prior to the performance. Use of this is helpful on invoices to school or tour groups, indicating they should arrive in order to be properly seated.
    Additional Comments An opportunity to add any comments to the invoice in the body of the document. Alternatively, you can choose standardized comments from the "Quick Select" drop down. For more information on adding standard invoice comments click here.
    Returns to the previous tab in the Print Invoices Criteria.
    Proceeds to the next tab in the Print Invoices Criteria.
    Cancels the adding of criteria and clears the window.
    Completes the addition of criteria and the sorting of data, and begins to generate the invoice.

    Tickets Tab

    The Tickets tab determines the level of detail regarding the tickets that will be printed on the invoice.


    Parts of the Tickets Tab

    Ticket Detail and Summary Options Determines whether the tickets will be printed (if at all) with a detail of one ticket per line, or summarized. The summary options include:
    • Event Code. Tickets will be summarized on an event by event basis. For example, all tickets to Show 1 will be summarizes, then all tickets to Show 2, etc.
    • Performance Series Code. Tickets will be summarized based on the day of the week which the performance takes place. For example, all Friday tickets will be summarized, then all Saturday tickets, etc.
    • Promotion Title (Internal). Tickets will be summarized based on the internal name as it appears on the Sales Promotion setup.
    • Promotion Decription. Tickets will be summarized based on the external name as it appears on the Sales Promotion setup. For example all REGULAR tickets will be summarized, then all COMP tickets will be summarized, etc.
    Ticket Total Options When checked, Theater Manager will calculate the total dollar amount of the tickets and print it below the ticket detail or summary.
    Ticket Date Options When checked, Theatre Manager will print performance dates for the tickets within the invoice.
    Returns to the previous tab in the Print Invoices Criteria.
    Proceeds to the next tab in the Print Invoices Criteria.
    Cancels the adding of criteria and clears the window.
    Completes the addition of criteria and the sorting of data, and begins to generate the invoice.

    Memberships Tab

    The Memberships tab determines the level of detail regarding the memberships that will be printed on the invoice

    Depending on how your database is configured, this may appear as the GC/Pass tab, or Voucher tab.


    Parts of the Memberships Tab

    Membership Detail and Summaryn Determines whether the Memberships will be printed (if at all) with a detail of one Membership per line, or summarized. The summary options include:
    • Member Type Description (Internal). Memberships will be summarized based on the internal name as it appears on the Membership setup.
    • Member Type Description (External). Memberships will be summarized based on the external name as it appears on the Membership setup.
    Membership Total Options Options to include either one or both of Membership total (dollar amount) and any Membership notes, which are drawn from the Membership . For more on adding notes to a Membership, click here.
    Returns to the previous tab in the Print Invoices Criteria.
    Proceeds to the next tab in the Print Invoices Criteria.
    Cancels the adding of criteria and clears the window.
    Completes the addition of criteria and the sorting of data, and begins to generate the invoice.

    Donations Tab

    The Donations tab determines the level of detail regarding the donations that will be printed on the invoice.


    Parts of the Donations Tab

    Donation Detail and Summary Options Determines whether the Donations will be printed (if at all) with a detail of one Donation per line, or summarized. The summary options include:
    • Campaign Name (Internal). Donations will be summarized based on the internal name as it appears on the Campaign setup. For example, this may be "General Operating-2011" or "Restricted Equipment Purchases."
    • Campaign Name (External). Donations will be summarized based on the external name as it appears on the Campaign setup. For example, this may be "Annual Fund" or "Digital Projector Project."
    Returns to the previous tab in the Print Invoices Criteria.
    Proceeds to the next tab in the Print Invoices Criteria.
    Cancels the adding of criteria and clears the window.
    Completes the addition of criteria and the sorting of data, and begins to generate the invoice.

    Projects Tab

    The Projects tab determines the level of detail regarding the Facilities Management Projects that will be printed on the invoice.

    This tab will only be available if you have the Facilities Management module. For more information on Facilities Management, click here.


    Parts of the Projects Tab

    Project Detail Options Determines whether the Projects will be printed (if at all) with a detail of one task per line, or summarized. The options include:
    • No Projects Shown. No projects or their details will be included in the invoice.
    • Project Totals Only. Summates the project total, and does not print any detail.
    • Also Include Task Group Details. If there are details associated with a particular task group, they will be included here.
    • Also Include Task Details. Specific task details will be included.
    Project Totaling Options Indicates whether each Group will have a subtotal line associated with it.
    Reporting Options Includes options to either list items on the invoice by the project hierarchy or by date. Project hierarchy means that the tasks will be listed with the groups, the tasks underneath them, in the order the project displays in in the Gantt chart, regardless of the date order. At current, the "By Date" option has not yet been implemented.
    Show Comments When checked, Theatre Manager will show line by line any comments associated with any of the individual tasks in the list.
    Returns to the previous tab in the Print Invoices Criteria.
    Proceeds to the next tab in the Print Invoices Criteria.
    Cancels the adding of criteria and clears the window.
    Completes the addition of criteria and the sorting of data, and begins to generate the invoice.

    Payments Tab

    The Payments tab determines the level of detail regarding the payments that will be printed on the invoice.


    Parts of the Payments Tab

    Payment Detail and Summary Options Determines whether the Payments will be printed (if at all) with a detail of one Payment per line, or summarized. At this time, payments may only be summarized based on payment method (cash, check, Visa, MasterCard, etc.)
    Payment Total Options When checked, Theatre Manager will include the total (dollar amount) of any payments.
    Returns to the previous tab in the Print Invoices Criteria.
    Proceeds to the next tab in the Print Invoices Criteria.
    Cancels the adding of criteria and clears the window.
    Completes the addition of criteria and the sorting of data, and begins to generate the invoice.

    Fees & Taxes Tab

    The Fees & Taxes tab determines the level of detail regarding the fees and taxes that will be printed on the invoice.


    Parts of the Fees & Taxes Tab

    Fee Options Includes options to print either (or both):
    • Show Fee Detail Line. A line by line fee detail for each fee assessed. If a per ticket fee is used, then the invoice will display one fee per ticket.
    • Show Fee Total Line. Prints a summary of the fees at the bottom of the invoice. This is the default option.
    Tax Options Includes options to print either (or both):
    • Show Tax Detail Line. A line by line tax detail for each fee assessed.
    • Show Tax Total Line. Prints a summary of the taxes at the bottom of the invoice. This is the default option.
    Returns to the previous tab in the Print Invoices Criteria.
    Proceeds to the next tab in the Print Invoices Criteria.
    Cancels the adding of criteria and clears the window.
    Completes the addition of criteria and the sorting of data, and begins to generate the invoice.

    Sort Tab

    The Sort tab determines the sort order of the patron invoices that will be printed.


    Parts of the Sort Tab

    Available Sort Fields A list of fields available to sort by.
    Adds the currently selected field to the sort field list.
    Removes the currently selected field from the sort field list.
    Selected Sort Fields The fields currently used for sorting. Default sort fields may appear here. There is a limit of nine sort fields.
    Sort In Descending Order When checked, the currently selected sort field will sort in descending order.
    Upper Case Conversion When checked, the currently selected sort field will be converted to upper case letters.
    New Page When Field Changes When checked, the currently selected sort field will start on a new page when the field changes.
    Returns to the previous tab in the Print Invoices Criteria.
    Proceeds to the next tab in the Print Invoices Criteria.
    Cancels the adding of criteria and clears the window.
    Completes the addition of criteria and the sorting of data, and begins to generate the invoice.

    Titles Tab

    At this time, changes to this tab do not affect the printed output of the Invoice.


    Parts of the Titles Tab

    Returns to the previous tab in the Print Invoices Criteria.
    Cancels the adding of criteria and clears the window.
    Completes the addition of criteria and the sorting of data, and begins to generate the invoice.

    Printing Ticket Invoices

    Invoices can be created for any order at any time. Using the proper criteria, it is easy to create invoices for orders.

    1. Go to Setup >> Batch Functions >> Print Ticket Invoices.

      This will open the Print Invoice Criteria window.

      For more information on the Print Invoice Criteria window, click here.

    2. Click the New button to add criteria to the search.

      This will open the Add/Edit Parameters window.

      For more information on the Add/Edit Parameters window, click here.

    3. Select that appropriate paramaeters based on the invoice to be created, then click the Save button.

      This will place the parameters in the Search tab of the Print Invoices Criteria window.

    4. Either adjust the options on the tabs, or click the Done button to display all invoices to be printed.

      The invoices will be printed to the screen before being routed to the printer.

    5. Click the Print button at the top of the window to print the invoices.

      Alternatively the Invoice can be emailed directly to the patron. To learn more about emailing invoices click here.

    Invoice Examples

    The following pages contain examples of each Invoice type listed in the Header tab of the Print Invoices Criteria. There are five different Invoice Styles:

    • Invoice
    • Statement
    • Payment Reminder
    • Confirmation, and
    • Contract
    • Selection of any of these styles will create different invoice formats to be printed.

      While many of the items included in the invoices in terms of tickets, donations and memberships and their detail and summary level are customizable based on your organizations needs, placement of specific fields has been set by Theatre Manager in an effort to adhere to standard A-10 Window envelope format. Placement of fields such as logo, address (sender and recipient), and the tear off section may not be altered. As an alternative, you may build a Form Letter to use as a completely customized Invoice. For more on building form letters, click here.

    Invoice

    An example of an Invoice.

    Statement

    An example of a Statement.

    Payment Reminder

    An example of a Payment Reminder.

    The verbiage indicated in the document is customizable under the tab in the Invoice setup.

    Confirmation

    An example of a Confirmation.

    The verbiage indicated in the document is customizable under the tab in the Invoice setup.

    Contract

    An example of a Contract.

    The verbiage indicated in the document is customizable under the tab in the Invoice setup.

    Print Unprinted Passes

    The Print Unprinted Passes function is commonly used to print all passes, memberships, gift certificates and vouchers that have not been printed.

    Only Memberships and Passes with ticket faces associated with them that have been based on Member Data will be printed

    For more on Membership Setup Overview click here.

    For more on creating a ticket face click here.

    1. From the main menu bar, go to Setup >> Batch Functions >> Print Unprinted Passes.

      This will open two windows, with the Parameter window in front.

      For more information on the Parameters window for batch ticket printing, click here.

    2. Enter the criteria for the batch.

      In the example above, all passes that have been updated in a range have been selected.

    3. Click the Next button once the criteria has been entered.

      This will move to the next tab in the Parameter window.

    4. Set the selections in the window, and then click the Next button.

      This will move to the next tab in the Parameter window.

    5. Set the additional items to be printed, and then click the Next button.

      This will move to the next tab in the Parameters window.

    6. Set the sort options for the tickets, and then click the Done button.

      This will close the Parameters window and reveal the Batch Pass Printing window.

      The number of passes to be printed will appear in the Memberships field. For more information on the Batch Printing window, click here.

    7. Set any final printing options, and click the Start Printing button.

      The passes will now begin printing to the selected ticket printer.

    Unprint Batch of Passes

    The Unprint Batch of Passes function allows for the 'Printed' flag to be removed from passes (Memberships, Gift Certificates, Vouchers) so that they can be printed again. This is helpful when a batch of passes needs to be reprinted. To access the Unprint Batch Of Passes function:

    From the main menu bar, go to Setup >> Batch Functions >> Unprint Batch of Passes.

    This will open the Unprint Batch of Passess window.

    Parts of the Unprint Batch of Passes Window

    Clicking "Open" with a pass highlighted opens the Membership detail window. For more on the Membership Detail window, click here.
    Clicking the Unprint button will set the print status on the selected pass(es) to "unprinted."
    Prints the selected pass(es). This option is only available if the selected pass(es) have the print status of "unprinted."
    Exports the selected pass(es) to your choice of text or Excel files.
    Status The current status of the pass.
    Patron # The Patron Number to whom the pass(es) were sold.
    First Name The first name of the patron.
    Last Name The last name of the patron.
    Company The company of the patron.
    Description The type of pass.
    Control # The unique control number of the pass.
    Date Printed The date the pass was previously printed.
    Remain $ The remaining dollar amount (if applicable) on the pass.
    Remain Qty The remaining quantity of admissions (if applicable) on the pass..
    Expiry Date The expiration date (if applicable) of the pass.
    Date Full Redemption The date the pass was fully redeemed (if applicable).
    Date Posted The date the sale of the pass was posted to the General Ledger.
    Order # The Order number associated with the item.

    Other Fields Not Shown

    Membership # The sequence number (not the control number) of the pass within the database.
    Membership Year-Fiscal The fiscal year in which the pass was originally sold.

    Unprinting a Batch of Passes

    1. From the main menu bar, go to Setup >> Batch Functions >> Unprint Batch of Passes.

      This will open the Unprint Batch of Passes window.

    2. Enter the date the passes were printed in the From and To fields.
    3. Click the Search button to begin the search.

      Any passes printed in the date range given will appear.

    4. Highlight the passes to be unprinted.

      Use the <SHIFT> key to highlight a range of passes. To highlight multiple individual passes, hold the <CTRL> key (Windows) or the <OPTION> key (Mac).

    5. Click the Unprint button to remove the 'Printed' flag.

      The passes can now be added to a new batch of passes to be printed.

    Print Charitable Receipts for Donor

    The Print Charitable Receipts for Donor batch function allows you to print all unprinted donation receipts, using parameters such as:

    • Campaign
    • Last Name, or
    • Calendar Year

    Receipts only print if a payment is received, the print options on the donation require one, and the Campaign allows receipts to be printed.

    The Print Charitable Receipts for Donor is accessed under the Setup>>Batch Functions>>Print Charitable Receipts for Donor menu.



    Parts of the Print Charitable Receipts for Donor Window

    If this report has previously been run, this button will add the previous criteria.
    Opens a list of saved criteria for this report.
    Saves the current criteria to be used later.
    Saves the current criteria to be used later and opens a dialog to name this criteria.
    Allows editing of the batch print parameter for included donations. For more on the Donation Receipt tab, click here.
    The Sort tab allows adjustment of the sort order of the columns found in the report. For more on the Sort tab, click here.
    The Titles tab allows you to give the report a name that is meaningful to your requirements. For more on the Titles tab, click here.
    Proceeds to the next tab in the Charitable Receipts for Donor Criteria.
    Cancels that adding of criteria and closes the criteria window.
    Completes the addition of criteria and the sorting of data, and begins to generate the donation receipts.

    Donation Receipt Tab

    The Donation Receipt tab determines what receipts will print depending on the criteria entered.


    Parts of the Sort Tab

    Next Receipt # The next starting number for receipts. You may edit this if you wish, however Theatre Manager will default to the next available donation receipt number.
    Select Donation For A drop down to limit your donation receipts by specific campaign, or All Campaigns. By default, Theatre Manager will include receipts for all campaigns.
    Last Name Between An opportunity to limit the donation receipts to a specific patron or group of patrons based on Patron Last Name. By default, this is normally blank.
    Calendar Year Allows you to print all unprinted charitable receipts for a specific calendar year. This may be used in January to print all unprinted receipts from the previous year.

    This field is mandatory for Annual Summary Charitable Receipts.

    Print on Receipt Options for including:
    • Receipt # on Forms. Unless your donation receipts have pre-printed numbers on them, it is suggested to allow Theatre Manager to print the receipt number.
    • Regular Name With company. If the donation is a corporate gift, and an individual's name appears int he patron record, Theatre Manager can include both names on the donation receipt.
    • Campaign Prompt. If selected, will print the Campaign to which the donation was made on the receipt.
    # of Copies Allows you to adjust the number of copies printed for each receipt. For example, if you enter "3", you will get a page with 3 copies of the same receipt on the page. This may be helpful if you are providing a copy for the patron, one for the patron's accountant and one for your files.
    Comments For Receipts Allows for limited comments to be printed on the receipts.
    Proceeds to the next tab in the Charitable Receipts for Donor Criteria.
    Cancels the adding of criteria and clears the window.
    Completes the addition of criteria and the sorting of data, and begins to generate the Charitable Receipts for Donors.

    Sort Tab

    The Sort tab determines the sort order of the patron invoices that will be printed.


    Parts of the Sort Tab

    Available Sort Fields A list of fields available to sort by.
    Adds the currently selected field to the sort field list.
    Removes the currently selected field from the sort field list.
    Selected Sort Fields The fields currently used for sorting. Default sort fields may appear here. There is a limit of nine sort fields.
    Sort In Descending Order When checked, the currently selected sort field will sort in descending order.
    Upper Case Conversion When checked, the currently selected sort field will be converted to upper case letters.
    New Page When Field Changes When checked, the currently selected sort field will start on a new page when the field changes.
    Returns to the previous tab in the Charitable Receipts for Donor Criteria.
    Proceeds to the next tab in the Charitable Receipts for Donor Criteria.
    Cancels the adding of criteria and clears the window.
    Completes the addition of criteria and the sorting of data, and begins to generate the Charitable Receipts for Donors.

    Titles Tab

    Parts of the Titles Tab

    Page Header Titles
    Use default report title If enabled, the default report tile will print. If disabled, you can specify a specific title for the report.
    Title Enter the title you want the report to have.
    Display employee full name The name of the employee logged into Theatre Manager will print on the report.
    Description You can enter a description of the report and/or the criteria you have selected.
    Returns to the previous tab in the Charitable Receipts for Donors criteria.
    Cancels that adding of criteria and closes the window.
    Completes the addition of criteria and the sorting of data, and begins to generate the Charitable Receipts for Donors.

    Charitable Receipt Example

    This is an example of a Charitable Receipt for a Donor. The parameters used indicated only 1 copy of each receipt to be printed. The intention of donation receipts is that they will be printed on a pre-printed, perforated form that contains other required data for a receipt. This data may include (check your local requirements):

    • Your Company Name
    • Your Company Address
    • Your Company Phone Number
    • Your Company's Tax ID #

    In addition, you may want to include:

    • Your Company Logo
    • A signature line
    • Other graphic items as desired

    Print Annual Summary Charitable Receipts for Donor

    The Print Annual Summary Charitable Receipts for Donor batch function allows you to print all unprinted donation receipts in summary format, using parameters such as:

    • Campaign
    • Last Name, or
    • Calendar Year (required for Annual Summary receipts)

    Receipts only print if a payment is received, the print options on the donation require one, and the Campaign allows receipts to be printed.

    The Print Annual Summary Charitable Receipts for Donor is accessed under the Setup>>Batch Functions>>Print Annual Summary Charitable Receipts for Donor menu.



    Parts of the Print Annual Summary Charitable Receipts for Donor Window

    If this report has previously been run, this button will add the previous criteria.
    Opens a list of saved criteria for this report.
    Saves the current criteria to be used later.
    Saves the current criteria to be used later and opens a dialog to name this criteria.
    Allows editing of the batch print parameter for included donations. For more on the Donation Receipt tab, click here.
    The Sort tab allows adjustment of the sort order of the columns found in the report. For more on the Sort tab, click here.
    The Titles tab allows you to give the report a name that is meaningful to your requirements. For more on the Titles tab, click here.
    Proceeds to the next tab in the Charitable Receipts for Donor Criteria.
    Cancels that adding of criteria and closes the criteria window.
    Completes the addition of criteria and the sorting of data, and begins to generate the annual summary donation receipts.

    Annual Summary Charitable Receipt Example

    This is an example of an Annual Summary Charitable Receipt for a Donor. The parameters used indicated all gifts in Calendar Year 2010. The intention of donation receipts is that they will be printed on a pre-printed form that contains other required data for a receipt. This data may include (check your local requirements):

    • Your Company Name
    • Your Company Address
    • Your Company Phone Number
    • Your Company's Tax ID #

    In addition, you may want to include:

    • Your Company Logo
    • A signature line
    • Other graphic items as desired

    Unprint Batch of Charitable Receipts

    The Unprint Batch of Charitable Receipts function allows for the 'Printed' flag to be removed from donation receipts so that they can be printed again.

    The Unprint Batch of Charitable Receipts for Donor is accessed under the Setup >> Batch Functions >> Unprint Batch of Charitable Receipts menu.



    Parts of the Donation Receipts List

    Opens the donation record for the selected receipt.
    Unprints the selected receipt(s).
    Exports the current Donation Receipt List to a text file for use in Excel.
    Prints the Donation Receipt List as shown to a report.
    Opens the Patron record for the selected donor.
    Last Name Last name of the donor.
    First Name First name of the donor.
    Company Company name (if applicable) of the donor.
    Campaign Name (Internal) Campaign name (internal) to which the donation was made.
    Receipt Number Current receipt number of the selected receipt. This number will be "retired" once the receipt is unprinted.
    Receipt Amount Donation amount the receipt is for.
    Receipt Printed Date the receipt was previously printed.
    Fiscal Year Fiscal Year the donation was attributed to.
    Donation Date Date of the donation.
    Actual Amount Amount of the originating donation.

    Unprinting a Batch of Charitable Receipts

    1. From the main menu bar, go to Setup >> Batch Functions >> Unprint Batch of Charitable Receipts.

      This will open the Donation Receipt List window.

    2. Enter the date the receipts were printed in the From and To fields.
    3. Click the Search button to begin the search.

      Any receipts printed in the date range given will appear.

    4. Highlight the receipts to be unprinted.

      Use the <SHIFT> key to highlight a range of tickets. To highlight multiple individual tickets, hold the <CTRL> key (Windows) or the <OPTION> key (Mac).

    5. Click the Unprint button to remove the 'Printed' flag.

      The receipts can now be added to a new batch to be printed.

    Order Balances ...

    The rebuild Order Balances function is used to verify that all orders in the specified range are in balance. This is useful when working through problems in the End of Day.

    1. From the main menu bar, go to Setup >> Batch Functions >> Order Balances...

      This will open the Verify Order Balances window.

    2. Enter the range of orders to be verified.

      Orders can be verified either based on order number or by a date range of when the order was last changed.

      Optionally, you can have Theatre Manager update the order comments field with the order totals from both before and after the recalculation. By default, this option is selected.

    3. Click the Recalculate Balance button.

      A confirmation window will appear.

    4. Click the Yes button.

      The orders within the range will now be verified and upon completion, the window will close.

    Patron Balances ...

    The rebuild Patron Balances function is used to verify that the totals on all the orders for a specified patron are in balance. This is useful when working through problems in the End of Day.

    1. From the main menu bar, go to Setup >> Batch Functions >> Patron Balances...

      This will open the Verify Patron Balances window.

    2. Enter the range of patrons for whom you wish to verify all order balances (or a single patron).

      Patron balances can be verified either based on Patron number or by a date range of when the patron account was last changed.

    3. Click the Recalculate Balance button.

      A confirmation window will appear.

    4. Click the Yes button.

      The patron balances within the range will now be verified and upon completion, the window will close.

    Order Currently Being Sold

    The Orders Currently Being Sold function can be used to release orders considered to be in use by another user. This may help resolve issues where the End of Day seems to be out of balance or if a workstation crashes in the middle of an order.

    1. From the main menu bar, go to Setup >> Batch Functions >> Orders Currently Being Sold.

      This will open the Order Currently Being Sold window.

    2. Select the order that you want to clear the 'being sold' flag by single clicking on it.

      Note; you should likely only clear old orders or those where you are sure nobody is actually working in them. For any order that is relatively current, please check with the user to see if they are working with that order.

    3. Click the Clear Order In Use Flag button.

      This will clear the order and allow the order to be accessed again.

    Clear/Replace Patron Fields

    This function has not been implemented yet.

    Data Utilities

    Theatre Manager

     

    Database Utilities

    Overview

    Data utilities are tools used to repair corrupted data. Database corruption can occur for a variety of reasons spanning both hardware and software issues. Data corruption on a network is usually caused by networking issues i.e. broken connections to the server or multiple databases being created. The built-in utilities for Theatre Manager are located under the Setup >> Data Utilities Menu.

    This menu will open the Database Utilities Window.

    Click Here for a detailed description of this window and its functions.

    Data Utilities Window

    This is the window from which all database checking and repair is performed. You are given a breakdown of all the data in the database along with the number and size of the records each contains.

    Parts of the Database Utilities Window

    File Name The name of the file.
    Quantity The number of records stored in the file.
    Description A brief description of what the file contains.
    Size The amount of memory the file occupies.
    Held for possible future use.
    Cleanup of a database rolls forward all temporary work files into the main database.
    Held for possible future use.
    Creates a printed copy of the list as shown.
    Allows entry of an SQL query of the database.

    Creating a New Database

    Clients often ask how to set up a training or demo database. Instructions for doing so follow.

    • Please note that these instructions are written and intended for experienced/technical users only.
    • It would be easy for an inexperienced user to accidentally delete the live database while attempting this process.
    • Please do not attempt if you are uncertain about any of the instructions below.

    1. Open pgAdmin and select/log in to the PostgreSQL Server.

      do this directly on the server machine to bypass having to enter a password. When the password prompt comes up, just click "OK" to log in.

    2. Highlight Databases and Edit >> New Object >> New Database.

    3. In Properties, set the Name to something descriptive of what kind of database this will be.

      In the above example - Training

    4. Set the Owner to TheatreManager.
    5. ***Version 8 ONLY**Select SQL_ASCII as the Encoding format.

      ***Version 9 ONLY**Select UTF8 as the Encoding format.

    6. ***Version 8 ONLY**Set the Template to Template0.

      ***Version 9 ONLY**Skip selecting this field.

    7. Click OK to create the database.

      You can use a backup of an existing database to populate the training database for staff use. Look in:

      • Mac: /Users/Shared/MyBackups
      • PC: C:/Box Office/Backups

      Then you can restore a backup to the new database you just created in pgAdmin:

    8. Highlight the new database.

      TrainingDatabase in the example.

    9. Select Tools >> Restore.
    10. Choose the backup to use and click OK.

      The Restore Database window opens.

      This process can take anywhere from a few minutes to a few hours to complete. Theis depends on the size of the database and speed of the server. Let it run without interruption.

      When the database is finished loading the window will have a line that reads

      "Process returned exit code 0" or "Process returned exit code 1".

    11. Either return exit code (0 or 1) is acceptable.

      Users can now log in to Theatre Manager and click Change Data File on the login window to access the new database from the database drop-down menu.

    Database Backup Instructions for Mac and PC

    The following links guide you to set up a backup process for your Theatre Manager database and for automating that process. Please follow the instructions for the appropriate platform for your venue.

    Your server will dictate whether you follow the PC or Mac instructions, regardless of the other workstations in the office.

    Creating Automatic Backups - Mac Instructions

    Once the database is set up, you will need to establish a back up frequency that is appropriate for your venue. Most often you can set up one backup daily to the backup directory and let it run late at night.


    However, a busy location may want to set up 2 or more daily backups while Theatre Manager is running choose less busy times, for example 8:00am, 1:30pm and 8:00pm.

    You can run a manual backup at any time, by going into Terminal and running the 'backupTM.php' file mentioned in this section, even if Theatre Manager is running.

    The backup process only exports data from the database and creates a compressed backup file. You then need to take those backups and copy them to another machine and/or establish a backup rotation and take some backups offsite.

    This process should have been part of the original Theatre Manager Installation.

    If automatic backups have been interrupted for some reason, but the backup script is still intact, please follow these instructions for recreating the CronniX task.

    the backup script needs to be replaced, continue with the following instructions before moving on to creating a daily backup routine.

    1. Navigate to the /Users/Shared/Backups directory.

    2. Download the PHP script and place it in that directory.

    3. If you have multiple databases to backup, make a copy of this file for each database you want to backup and edit accordingly.

    4. Right-click on the file and open it for editing in Text Edit.

      Change the line

      $backupDB = 'TheatreManagerDemo';

      to be

      $backupDB = 'xxxxxx';

      where xxxxx is the name of the database set up in PostGreSQL.

      The name of the database is case sensitive and must match what is seen in PGAdmin III, or what is used to log on to the database via Theatre Manager.

    5. If you want to alter the backup location, change the path mapping in the line that is highlighted.

      $localFolder = '/Users/Shared/Backups';

      Normally, this is not changed.

      The backup script can be set to automatically log into a remote FTP site and upload the database right at the end of the backups.

      To do this, set the values of $ftpHost, $ftpUser, $ftpPass, and $ftpFolder.

      If you do not want to do this, then leave the $ftpHost blank.

    6. Also make the changes outlined here that were described in the release notes for version 8.15.

    7. Save and close the file.
    8. Test the backup script.

      Do this by running a manual backup as outlined in these instructions.

      When the manual backup is finished, go to the /Users/Shared/Backups directory and see if there is a recent backup for your database. There should be some size to the database backup...it should not be zero bytes. There will be a new file here each time the backup is run.

    Creating a Daily Backup Job - Mac Instructions

    Timed daily backups are set up as part of the initial Theatre Manager installation. The following instructions explain how to set up the daily routine if a client would like to change or set up the routine again.
    1. Create a timed backup for the database by going to the /Users/Shared directory and starting a program called CronniX.

      A copy is included in the setup of the PostGreSQL database. However CronniX is shareware and can be found at www.abstracture.de/projects-en/cronnix.

      Log in as Adminstrator and do this on the machine that has the database server.

    2. Double click on the 'CronniX.app' icon (it may or may not have .app at the end) to begin the setup process.

      The CronniX task Scheduler starts.

      Cronnix is an interface to the Unix CRON facility. CRON has been around for a long time and is one of the task scheduling tools that is built into Unix operating system.

    3. Click the New icon on the upper left. A new window in the Intervals tab opens.

      A sample script at the bottom under Command that says:

      echo "Happy New Year!"

    4. Replace with the same command used to start a backup manually.

      php /Users/Shared/backupTM.php

    5. Click on the expert tab and make the settings in the upper half of the screen as in the example.

      These settings adjust your backup schedule. For example if you want a daily 2am and 2pm backup:

    • minute is on the hour (0)
    • hour is 2am and 2pm (2,14)
    • day of month is anything (*)
    • month is anything (*)
    • day of week is anything (*)
    This will schedule two per day backups of your database (the recommended backup schedule to setup.)

    Entries for any of the items can be:
    • * means 'always' for any entry. If minute said 10 and hour said *, it would mean every 10 minutes, regardless of hour.
    • 1,4,7,10 means on the 1,4,7, and 10. If this was hour, then there would be 4 backups at that time. If this was day, then only on the 1st of the month, 4th of the month, etc.
    • If you wish to read about more esoteric cron settings, please refer to internet sites by googling for 'cron settings'

    You can schedule backupTM to run as many times as you want during the day by changing the parameters of the one CRON job, or by creating more jobs. Once or twice per day is normally enough but you may feel that more times is better for your backup requirements on busy days.

    Creating Automatic Backups - PC Instructions

    Once the database is set up, you will need to establish a back up frequency that is appropriate for your venue. Mostly, setting up one backup daily to the backup directory should be enough and let it run late at night.
    However, it is perfectly okay to repeat the steps below, and set up 2 or more backups daily while Theatre Manager is running. You may wish to do this on a high volume site and pick times like 8:00am, 1:30pm and 8:00 pm, for example.
    You can also do a manual backup at any time by double clicking on the 'TMBackup.bat' file mentioned in this section - even if Theatre Manager is running.
    This backup process only exports data from the database and creates a compressed backup file. You will need to take those backups and copy them to another machine and/or establish a backup rotation and take some offsite.

    This process should have been part of the original Theatre Manager Installation.

    If automatic backups have been interrupted for some reason, but the backup script is still intact, please follow these instructions for recreating the Scheduled Task. If the backup script needs to be replaced, continue with the following instructions before moving on to creating a daily backup routine.
    1. Download the BackupTM BAT file.
    2. Create a directory called C:\BoxOffice\Backups (or D: or E: as appropriate) and move the BAT file into that folder.

      If you have multiple databases to backup, make a one copy of this file for each database you want to backup and edit accordingly.

      .
    3. Right-click on BackupTM.bat and Edit with WordPad or NotePad.
    4. change the line:

      set DATABASE_NAME=TheatreManager

      to be

      et DATABASE_NAME=xxxxx

      where xxxxx is the name of the client database set up in PostgreSQL.

      The name of the database is case sensitive and must match what is seen in PGAdmin III, or what you use to log on to the database.

    5. If you altered the install location of Postgres or the box office directory, change the drive mappings in the two lines that are highlighted.

      Set POSTGRESQL_PATH=C:\ ..... to D:, etc to match the path to the PostgreSQL directory. The default one for the installer is already in the file.

      set BOXOFFICE_DIR=C:\ .... to D:, etc, and

    6. Set BACKUP_PATH="C:\BoxOffice\Backups" to match the path where backups will be placed.

      Again the default one is already there and may not need to be changed.

    7. In most situations, with default installations, you will probably only need to edit the DATABASE_NAME parameter.

    8. Also make the changes outlined herethat were described in the release notes for version 8.15.
    9. Save and close the file.
    10. Test the backup script by running a manual backup as outlined in these instructions.
    11. When complete, and the DOS window closes, go to the C:\BoxOffice\Backups directory and see if there is a recent backup for your database.

      There should be some size to the database backup...it should not be zero bytes. There will be a new file here each time the backup is run.

    Creating a Daily Backup Job - PC Instructions

    Timed daily backups should have been set up as part of the initial Theatre Manager installation. The following instructions outline how to set up the daily routine.

    1. Open Start->Settings->Control Panel->Scheduled Tasks.

      Only do this on the machine that has the database server on it.

      If you are using Vista or do not have a 'Classic' view of the task scheduler,you may wish to change the control panel view to 'Classic' mode. It can make things easier to find.

    2. Double click on the Scheduled Task icon.
    3. Click the 'Add Scheduled Task' icon.

      The Scheduled Task Wizard opens.

    4. Click the "Next"button.

    5. On the displayed list of applications, click the "Browse" button.

    6. On the 'Select Program to Schedule' dialog, navigate to the C:\BoxOffice folder and click on the 'BackupTM' icon.

      Then click 'Open'.

    7. Choose a frequency for the backup.

      Daily is suggested.

      Then click 'Next'

    8. Pick the time that you want the backup to run.

      Generally picking a time in the middle of the night is the most conveniant. Then Click 'Next'

    9. Enter the password for the administrator of the machine.

      Then Click 'Next'.

    10. Click 'Finish' to save the job.

    You can schedule backupTM to run as many times as you want during the day by creating more jobs. Once is normally enough but you may feel that more times is better for your backup requirements.

    Backing Up the Database Manually

    The database backup process is automated and would have been set up for you during installation or conversion. If not, follow the instructions on downloading and upgrading the latest scripts.

    If the backups processes were created, you would have at least one recent backup. To create another one, follow the instructions and run the appropriate backup script on the database server machine.

    Backing Up Manually By Running the Backup Script

    1. On the Mac, you open the terminal on the server and type

      php /Users/Shared/backupTM.php

    2. On a PC, go to C:/BoxOffice directory on the server and run the 'BackupTM.bat' file (by double clicking on it.)

      In either case, check that there is a new backup in the 'Backups' directory that has 'yyyymmdd_mmhhss' as part of the file name where the date is the last few minutes.

    Backing Up Manually Using pgAdmin

    1. On the server, open pgAdmin by navigating to either Applications > PostgreSQL > pgAdmin (Mac) or by looking in Start Menu > Programs > PostgreSQL > pgAdmin.
    2. Select/log in to the PostgreSQL Server by double-clicking.

      When the password prompt comes up, click "OK".

    3. Double-click "Databases" to display the list of databases.

      Right-click on the database you wish to backup to bring up the context menu.

    4. Select Backup.

    5. Set up the window as shown.

      This file path is setup for Mac OS X. The equivalent path on a PC would be C:\BoxOffice\Backups\MyFile.backup

    6. Click "OK" to start the backup.

    Database Utilities - Sending a Database to ArtsMan - Macintosh

    Sending a Database to Arts Management Systems using Timbuktu - Macintosh

    To speed up the file transfer process you may compress your database and transaction files into an archive using Stuff-It. Their demonstration software can be downloaded from the website http://www.aladdinsys.com. If you require a copy of Timbuktu, please visit http://www.netopia.com/en-us/software/products/tb2/index.html for downloading an evaluation copy. If you find this tool useful, we recommend you purchasing a copy for your organization.

    Prior to sending a database to Arts Management, you must obtain 3 things to complete the process. Contact Arts Management Technical Support for these values:

    • the TCP/IP address of the computer you are about to send the database to
    • the login user name
    • the login password
    1. Open Timbuktu
    2. Select New Connection from the File Menu

      The following New Connection window will appear

    3. Click the TCP/IP tab.

    4. Enter the IP address given to you by Arts Management Systems

      It will be in a form of xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

    5. Click the Send Button

      The Network Password Window will open

    6. Enter the Name and Password given to you by Arts Management Systems
    7. Click the OK Button

      This will open the send window

    8. Click the Add Files Button

      The following window will open

    9. Navigate to where your database files are stored

      If you are unsure of their location ask your System Administrator.

    10. Select all of the files and click the Add Button

      If your database is made up of multiple segments, select all of the segments. If a segment is not sent, we will not be able to log into the database after we have received it. If you are unsure if you have multiple segments, ask your System Administrator.

      The files will be added to the middle portion of the screen

      You will return to the Send Window

    11. Enter in a Message that indicates who you are and the organization you are with.
    12. Click the Send Button to begin the file transfer

      The file transfer will begin.

    Database Utilities - Sending a Database to ArtsMan - PC

    Send a Database to Arts Management Systems - PC

    Send using Timbuktu
    Send using Internet Explorer

    Sending a Database to Arts Management Systems using Timbuktu - PC

    To speed up the file transfer process you may compress your database and transaction files into an archive using Winzip. Their demonstration software can be downloaded from the website www.winzip.com. If you require a copy of Timbuktu, please visit www.netopia.com/en-us/software/products/tb2/index.html for downloading an evaluation copy. If you find this tool useful, we recommend you purchasing a copy for your organization.

    Prior to sending a database to Arts Management, you must obtain 3 things to complete the process. Contact Arts Management Technical Support for these values:

    • the TCP/IP address of the computer you are about to send the database to
    • the login user name
    • the login password
    1. Open Timbuktu

      The following window will open.

    2. Click on the TCP/IP Tab

  23. Enter the IP address given to you by Arts Management Systems

    It will be in a form of xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

  24. Click the Send Button

    This will open the send window

  25. Click the Add Files Button

    The following window will open

  26. Navigate to where your database files are stored

    If you are unsure of their location ask your System Administrator.

  27. Select all of the files and click the Add Button

    If your database is made up of multiple segments, select all of the segments. If a segment is not sent, we will not be able to log into the database after we have received it. If you are unsure if you have multiple segments, ask your System Administrator.

    The files will be added to the lower portion of the screen

  28. Click Done

    You will return to the Send Window

  29. Enter in a Message that indicates who you are and the organization you are with.
  30. Click the Send Button to begin the file transfer

    The Log In Window will open

  31. Enter the Name and Password given to you by Arts Management Systems
  32. Click OK

    The file transfer will begin.

    Sending Database to Arts Management Systems using Internet Explorer - PC

    To speed up the file transfer process you may compress your database and transaction files into an archive using Winzip. Their demonstration software can be downloaded from the website www.winzip.com. If you require Internet Explorer, please visit www.microsoft.com/windows/ie/default.asp for downloading. This browser is free.

    Prior to sending a database to Arts Management, you must obtain 3 things to complete the process. Contact Arts Management Technical Support for these values:

    • the TCP/IP address of the computer you are about to send the database to
    • the login user name
    • the login password
    1. Open Internet Explorer

      The following window will open.

    2. Click on Address field

  33. Enter the IP address given to you by Arts Management Systems (Make sure there is the ftp:// at the beginning of the IP address)

    It will be in a form of xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

  34. Hit the Enter key on your keyboard

    This will open up a login window

  35. Enter in the User Name an Password given to you by Arts Management Systems. You will then be logged into the ftp server.
  36. Find where your database files are stored

    If you are unsure of their location ask your System Administrator.

  37. Select all of the files

    If your database is made up of multiple segments, select all of the segments. If a segment is not sent, we will not be able to log into the database after we have received it. If you are unsure if you have multiple segments, ask your System Administrator.

  38. Drag and Drop your files onto the Internet browser window

    You will see a similiar window indicating the transfer of the file(s)

  39. The window will close after all file(s) have been transferred
  40. PostgreSQL Terminal Commands

    This is a quick reference guide for how to edit settings via the terminal command line.

    To download a pdf copy of each OS
    Windows Cheatsheet
    Mac OS Cheatsheet

    Starting/Stopping the Server
    Refer to: http://www.postgresql.org/docs/9.0/interactive/app-pg-ctl.html

    Mac OS X
    1. Open Terminal
    2. Type su - postgres
    3. Type pg_ctl start or pg_ctl stop or pg_ctl restart
    4. - or - you may need to enter the full pathname of postgresql bin's folder including the location of the data folder if the PATH environment variables are set incorrectly. As in:
      /Library/PostgreSQL/9.0/bin/pg_ctl start -D /Library/PostgreSQL/9.0/data
      /Library/PostgreSQL/9.0/bin/pg_ctl stop -D /Library/PostgreSQL/9.0/data
    5. (Optional) Leave the terminal window open to view stderr log messages as you execute queries against the server.
    Windows
    1. Open Control Panel
    2. Open Administrative Tools
    3. Open Services
    4. Find the PostgreSQL Server service
    5. Start, Stop or Restart the service
    Reloading Changes to the Configuration File
    Refer to: http://www.postgresql.org/docs/9.0/interactive/app-pg-ctl.html - simply sends the postgres process a SIGHUP signal, causing it to reread its configuration files (postgresql.conf, pg_hba.conf, etc.). This allows changing of configuration-file options that do not require a complete restart to take effect.

    Mac OS X
    1. Open Terminal
    2. Type su - postgres
    3. Type pg_ctl reload
    Windows
    1. Open Command Prompt
    2. Go to C:\Program Files\PostgreSQL\9.0\bin (Do cd.. to get back to C: prompt then type cd "Program Files" - enter - cd PostgreSQL - enter - cd 9.0 enter - cd bin - enter
    3. pg_ctl reload
    Backing Up A Database

    Uncompressed backups from this point forward will use the .sql extenstion, while compressed backups will use the .backup extension.


    Mac OS X - Uncompressed
    1. Open the terminal
    2. Type su - postgres
    3. Type pg_dump -o [DatabaseName] > [Path] e.g For Database 'Demo' -> pg_dump -o Demo > /Users/Shared/MyBackups/Demo.sql
    Mac OS X - Compressed
    1. Open Terminal
    2. Type su - postgres
    3. Type pg_dump -F c -Z 9 [DatabaseName] > [Path] e.g For Database 'Demo' -> pg_dump -F c -Z 9 Demo > /Users/Shared/MyBackups/Demo.backup
    Windows - Uncompressed
    1. Open Command Prompt
    2. Go to C:\Program Files\PostgreSQL\9.0\bin (Do cd.. to get back to C: prompt then type cd "Program Files" - enter - cd PostgreSQL - enter - cd 9.0 enter - cd bin - enter
    3. pg_dump -U postgres -o [DatabaseName] > [Path] e.g For Database 'Demo' -> pg_dump -U postgres -o Demo > /Users/Shared/MyBackups/Demo.sql
    Windows - Compressed
    1. Open Command Prompt
    2. Go to C:\Program Files\PostgreSQL\9.0\bin (Do cd.. to get back to C: prompt then type cd "Program Files" - enter - cd PostgreSQL - enter - cd 9.0 enter - cd bin - enter
    3. pg_dump -U postgres -o -F c -Z 9 [DatabaseName] > [Path] e.g For Database 'Demo' -> pg_dump -U postgres -o -F c -Z 9 Demo > /Users/Shared/MyBackups/Demo.backup
    Windows - Compressed (via pgAdmin on a different machine then the server)
    1. Open Command Prompt
    2. Go to C:\Program Files\pgAdmin III\1.12 (Do cd.. to get back to C: prompt then type cd "Program Files" - enter - cd pgAdmin III - enter - cd 1.12 enter
    3. pg_dump --host [IP address of server] --port 5432 --username "postgres" --format=c --compress=9 --file "C:\BoxOffice\[DatabaseBackupName].backup [DatabaseName] e.g For Database 'Demo' -> pg_dump --host 192.168.0.3 --port 5432 --username "postgres" --format=c --compress=9 --file "C:\BoxOffice\Demo.backup" Demo
    Restoring a Database
    Mac OS X - Uncompressed
    1. Open Terminal
    2. Type su - postgres
    3. Drop the existing database (If it exists)
    4. Create a new database with the same name
    5. Type psql [DatabaseName] < [Path] e.g for Database 'Demo' -> psql Demo < /Users/Shared/MyBackups/Demo.sql
    Mac OS X - Compressed
    1. Open Terminal
    2. Type su - postgres
    3. Drop the existing database (If it exists)
    4. Create a new database with the same name
    5. Type pg_restore -d [DatabaseName] [Path] e.g for Database 'Demo' -> pg_restore -d Demo /Users/Shared/MyBackups/Demo.backup
    Windows - Uncompressed
    1. Open Command Prompt
    2. Go to C:\Program Files\PostgreSQL\9.0\bin (Do cd.. to get back to C: prompt then type cd "Program Files" - enter - cd PostgreSQL - enter - cd 9.0 enter - cd bin - enter
    3. Type psql -U postgres [DatabaseName] < [Path] e.g for Database 'Demo' -> psql -U postgres Demo < /Users/Shared/MyBackups/Demo.sql
    Windows - Compressed
    1. Open Command Prompt
    2. Go to C:\Program Files\PostgreSQL\9.0\bin (Do cd.. to get back to C: prompt then type cd "Program Files" - enter - cd PostgreSQL - enter - cd 9.0 enter - cd bin - enter
    3. Type pg_restore -U postgres -d [DatabaseName] [Path] e.g for Database 'Demo' -> pg_restore -U postgres -d Demo /Users/Shared/MyBackups/Demo.backup

    N/A - To Be Cleaned Up

    These pages are no longer applicable.

    Database Utilities - Creating a New Folder

    Creating a New Folder

    Windows

    1. Open Windows Explorer

      Either by clicking the explorer button on your shortcut bar

      or right clicking on your local drive and selecting explore

      The explorer window will open

    2. Navigate to your TM directory

      By default this should be C:\Program Files\TM\

    3. Create a new Folder

      Either use the Menu Bar and Select File >> New >> New Folder

      Or right click inside the TM folder and select New >> New Folder

      The new folder will be created and named "New Folder"

    4. Change the name

      Depending on what function you are performing change the name to either Rebuild Folder or Backup Database with a reference to the current date ie. BackupDB021216

    Database Utilities - Database Expansion

    Expanding the Database

    For Theatre Manager to run optimally there should be at least 10% free space in the database. This will result in faster access and manipulation of the database as well as greatly reducing the chances of sector overruns which result in freeblock damage. Theatre Manager can be setup to run a check to ensure the database has enough free space to run optimally. Click Here to learn how to setup an automatic check.

    Before you expand your database make a physical backup, Click Here to learn how to make a backup of the database.

    If you set Theatre Manager to automatically check for sufficient free space skip to step three.

    Manually expanding the database

    1. Open the Database Utilities Window

      Click Here to learn how to access this window.

    2. Click the Expand Database Button

      The Expand Database window will open.

      If the message is displayed you should expand your database you do not need to expand your database.

      Theatre Manager will set the expansion amount to the value which will expand the database so there is 10% free space. This value can be changed using the radio buttons under Expansion Amount.

    3. Click Expand Database to increase the free space

      Clicking Do Not Expand will cancel the expansion. The following window will open displaying the expansion progress.

      Once the expansion is finished you will be return to the Database Utilities Window.

    Database Utilities - Moving Your Database

    Moving Your Database

    Windows

    1. Open Windows Explorer

      Either by clicking the explorer button on your shortcut bar

      or right clicking on your local drive and selecting explore

      The explorer window will open

    2. Navigate to your source directory

    3. Select your Database by holding the <CTRL> key and selecting them in a Windows environment or the < > key in a Macintosh environment

    4. Select Cut from the Edit Menu or drag the files to your target directory

    5. Navigate to your target directory and select Paste from the Edit Menu

      Your Database will now be located at your target location.

    Database Utilities - Network Stress Test

    Network Stress Test

    The network stress test allows you to simulate traffic on your network during a normal day. Theatre Manger will attempt to send data to each of the workstations on the network to verify that they reiceve and transmit data correctly. To troubleshoot your network you may need to add workstations and hubs one at a time to determine where the fault lays. As with other database utilities this procedure should be run during down time to avoid disruptions.

    Running a Network Test

    1. Open the Database Utilities Window

      Click Here to learn how to access this window.

    2. Select Network Stress Test from the Database Utilities Menu

      The Network Stress Test Window will open.

      You may wish to change the Wait Time between Tests to equal or exceed the number of workstations on your network. This will represent a worst case senerio for network traffic.

    3. Click OK to begin the test

      During the Test a number of Progress Windows will appear showing the current task being preformed.

    Database Utilities - Power Rebuild - Creating a New Transaction Database

     

    Creating a New Transaction Database

    This procedure creates a new empty transaction database the same size as your original database. Depending on the extent of the damage you may not need to rebuild your transaction database.

    1. From the File menu select New Data File

    2. Save the data file called 'newfile.df1' in its own directory

    3. Click on the new transact file that you created in the top window

    4. Under the Utilities menu select Data File Tools >> Examine Data File
    5. Make sure the window title that popped up says 'data file -' and your new file name

    6. Step 3 will add a Data File menu to the main menu bar. From that menu select Change Data File Size
    7. Change the first segment size to 128000. If the window closes, open it again using step 5
    8. Click 'Add Segment'. Select the directory in which to create the new segment

    9. Make the second segment 524288 (or whatever the largest number it will allow you to put in)
    10. Note The first segment has the ability to auto-expand as it needs to. All other segments cannot and are set to the maximum size using this step.

    11. Repeat steps 8 and 9 as many times as you need to so that you have the same number of segments as the original transaction file
    12. Click the OK Button
    13. This will extend the data file's segments.

      Click Here for the procedure to reconstruct the transaction database.

    Database Utilities - Power Rebuild - Reconnecting Database Connections

    Rebuilding the Database Connections

    By this step your Main and Transaction Databases will both be copied into the new files you created. Now the data within them must be reassociated.

    1. Make a copy of the new data files and new transaction files

    2. Click Here for more information on physically copying the database files

    3. Open Theatre Manager
    4. Click the Change Data File Button
    5. Select the new database file you created
    6. Click Open
    7. Log on to Theatre Manager
    8. Go to data utilities and check that all data appears to be there
    9. Note, the data has only been recovered at this point, it is still not usable.

    10. Under the DB Utilities pop-upselect Verify All DB Connections


      A popup window will appear

    11. Click Yes to continue
    12. This will go through the data and perform step 2 of the normal database copy routines.... in other words it will connect the data together.

      At the end of the last step, there is a good chance that you will have recovered the database and all the records in it. This will be a pristine database.

    13. Exit Theatre Manager
    14. Create a folder to hold the old database
    15. Name it something like "OldDB-yy-mm-dd". By including the date you will know how old the database is and if it has been over 2 weeks without any problems it can be deleted.

    16. Move the original database to this folder
    17. Click Here for more information on moving the database.

    18. Move the database and ALL OF IT'S SECTIONS to your regular TM database location
    19. Click Here for more information on moving the database.

    20. Start Theatre Manager
    21. If you renamed your database to the original name you can login as ususal. If not you will have to use the change database button and navigate to the database.

      Go into File -> Statistics, and print the list of files. Compare this list with the one you printed in the 6th step at the top of this page, and check the record counts to make sure things match.

      Once you are satisfied that this new database is ready for use, move the old database into a new folder, called Old Data 021008 (or something similar). Click Here for more information on creating folders.

      Then move the new databases into the folder where your data normally resides, and allow users to log into it to begin any data entry that needs to be done. Click Here for information on moving your database.

    Database Utilities - Power Rebuild - Reconstructing the Main Database

    Reconstructing the Main Database

    In order to reconstruct your database you must have already followed the steps in Creating a New Main Database and read the outline Here. This procedure copies all the information from the corrupted database into the new database.

    1. From the Tools menu select Reconstructor

    2. The window will change.

    3. Click the Designate Source button and then click 'MAIN' in the popup window.
    4. Click the Designate Target Button and then select NewFile (or whatever you created in 'Creating a New Tm DataFile' )
    5. Click the selected slots radio button. Click all files in the list except F_TRANSACTION. This file does not belong in the main database.
    6. Make sure the 'Do not Update' button is NOT CHECKED.
    7. Click the 'Start Reconstruction' button and let the rebuild do its thing.
    8. Log out of TM

    Click Here to learn how to restore the database connections and start using the new database.

    Database Utilities - Power Rebuild - Reconstructing the Transaction Database

    Reconstructing the Transaction Database

    In order to reconstruct your database you must have already followed the steps in Creating a New Transaction Database and read the outline Here. This procedure copies all the information from the corrupted database into the new database.

    1. From the Tools menu select Reconstructor

    2. The window will change.

    3. Click the Designate Source button and select Trans in the popup window.
    4. Click the Designate Target Button and then select NewFile (or whatever you created in 'Creating a New Transaction Datafile' )
    5. Click the selected slots radio button.
    6. Select only the file F_TRANSACTION. This is the only file to copy to the new transaction database.



    7. Make sure the 'Do not Update' button is NOT CHECKED.
    8. Click the 'Start Reconstruction' button and let the rebuild do its thing.
    9. Log out of TM

    Click Here to learn how to restore the database connections and start using the new database.

    Database Utilities - Tools

    Database Utilities

    Toggle Unique Locks Modifies the way in which multi-user locking is handled for that slot in the data file.

    Lock Types

    • Unique Locks - makes locks unique
    • MultiRow - makes locks non-unique

    The default, non-unique locking, is faster but has the disadvantage that each time you lock a record, you lock approximately one in every 500 records in the same slot. This is the most reliable locking mode, If you find it essential to use row locking, where the locks apply to only one record at a time, you can toggle this mode on a slot by slot basis.

    Verify Invariant Keys Verifies that the unique keys in the database are setup correctly.
    Network Stress Test Allows for testing of the network to troubleshoot hardware and network problems.
    Power Utilities This function should only be used if advised to by support personnel.

    Employee Setup - Address Tab

    Address Tab

    The Address Tab window is where a master user sets up the contact information for employees.

    Parts of the Address Tab

    Emp # This is a unique number that is automatically assigned to a new employee when they are inserted into Theatre Manager.
    Salutation This is a drop down list that is located to the right hand side of the employee number, for which a salutation (if any) will be assigned to the employee.
    Name Employee's first name, initial and last name should be respectively inserted into these three fields.
    Initials Unique initials for the employee are used throughout Theatre Manager to maintain what changes have been made by each employee. The initials are also used to record all functions the employee has performed. For example, the orders, payments, donations, patron creations and changes to existing information the employee was responsible for.
    Title Employee's official job title with in the company. Eg. Box Office Manager, Accountant, General Manager.
    Greeting Greeting name for the employee.
    Home Address Contact address for the employee.

    Work

    Work phone number.

    Home

    Home phone number.

    City

    City of the contact address.

    Province

    Province or state of the contact address.

    Fax

    Fax contact number.

    Country

    Country of the contact address.

    Postal Code

    Postal or Zip code for the contact address.

    Other

    Additional contact number.

    E-mail

    E-mail address for the employee.

    Web

    Web address for the employee.

    Sends an e-mail to the employee.

    Opens the employees web address in the default browser.

    Subscribes the e-mail address in the e-mail field to the Arts Management Mailing List. You will receive periodic e-mails with tips and any available upgrades.
    Unsubscribe the e-mail address from the mailing list.

    Employee Setup - Billing Functions

    Billing Tab

    This information is primarily use for Theatre Manager modules such as production management for road house style venues.

    Parts of the Billing Tab

    Pay Period This drop down list displays the employee's pay period. The available selections are contractual, daily rate, hourly, monthly, and weekly.
    Pay Rate Hourly pay rate in dollars.
    Over Time Rate Hourly overtime rate in dollars.
    Billable Rate Hourly billable rate in dollars.
    Internal Employee Number Internal I.D. Number.

    Employee Setup - Employee Data

    Employee Data

    The Employee Data window is used to set employee access, preferences and contact information.

    Parts of the Employee Data Window

    Inserts a new employee. For more information on adding employees click here.
    Saves changes made to the employee record.
    Creates a copy of the selected employee record.
    Reverts changes made to the employee record back to the last saved point.
    Deletes the selected employee. For more information on deleting employees click here.
    Generates a report of the employee record to the screen or default print location.
    Checks the spelling of fields where data can be typed.
    Contact information for the employee. For more information on the address tab click here.
    Emergency contact, notes and miscellaneous information for the employee. For more information on the other tab click here.
    Access level for the employee. For more information on the access tab click here.
    Box office management settings for the employee. For more information on the box office tab click here.
    Security group levels for the employee. For more information on the address tab click here.
    Data access options for the employee. For more information on the data tab click here.
    Function access options for the employee. For more information on the functions tab click here.
    Solicitor totals for the employee. For more information on the solicitor tab click here.
    Billing and payroll data for the employee. For more information on the billing tab click here.

    Employee Setup - Employee Preferences

    Employee Preferences

    Employee preferences may be accessed by clicking the "Set Preferences Button" on the Access Tab of Employee Setup. Preferences can also be accessed through Setup >> Users and Access >> Preferences. Accessing Employee preferences through the Setup menu will only show the preferences for the currently logged on employee. Changing the preferences changes the preferences for that employee no matter where they log on to Theatre Manager.

    This will open the Preferences window.

    For more information on the Preferences window click here.

    Memberships - Assigning Cards

    Membership Cards

    After a membership has been sold, depending on what it's function is, a pass holder card can be assigned to it. Pass holder cards allow multiple patrons to have access to a membership(s) and each patron will have their own card with a unique number as well as there name printed on it. Patron card functions are located on the Membership Cards Window.

    Accessing the Membership Cards Window

    1. Open the Patron Window.

      Click here to learn how to access this window.

    2. Click on the Membership tab.

      Click here for more information on this tab.

    3. Select a membership.

      Single click on a membership to select it.

    4. Click the Open button.

      This will open the Membership Detail window.

    5. Click the Cards button.

      The Membership Cards Window will open.

      For a detailed description of this window and it's functions click here.

    Memberships - Member Types Window DUPLICATE PAGE

    Membership Window

    Through this window the user can add, edit, delete, view the details of the selected membership.

    Parts of the Membership Window

    Toolbar Functions

    Creates a new membership in a new membership detail window. For more information on purchasing new memberships click here.
    Saves changes made to the current membership.
    Duplicates the membership as a new membership in a new order.
    Reverts changes made to the membership to the last saved point.
    Deletes the membership. For more information on deleting memberships click here.
    Prints the record.
    Checks the spelling of fields that can be typed in within the membership.
    Opens the order payment window for the membership.
    Print Pass Image NEEDED Prints a ticket for the membership when a ticket face is associated to the member type.
    Attaches a letter to the membership allowing for details of the membership to be printed on the letter.
    Renews the membership for the time frame determined in the member type.
    Attaches a card reference to the membership.

    Tab Functions

    Information on the membership, the membership type, cost and dates. For more information on the membership details tab click here.
    Notes related to the membership. For more information on the notes tab click here.
    A list of who redeemed the membership and the value of each redemption. For more information on the redemption tab click here.
    Details of the renewal history for this membership. For more information on the renewal history tab click here.
    A list of all transactions associated with the membership. For more information on the transactions tab click here.

    Power Rebuild - Creating a New Main Database

    Creating a New Main Database

    This procedure creates a new empty database the same size as your original database. Eventually this will become your working database.

    1. Under the File menu pick New Data File

    2. Save a data file called 'newfile.df1' in a new directory
    3. Click Here to learn how to create a new folder

    4. Click on the new file that you created in the top window

    5. Under the Utilities menu select Data File Tools >> Examine Data File

    6. Make sure the window title that popped up says 'data file -' and your new file name

    7. Step 3 will add a Data File menu to the main menu bar. From that menu select Change Data File Size

    8. Change the first segment size to 128000. If the window closes, open it again using step 5

    9. Click Add Segment
    10. Select the directory in which to create the new segment
    11. Click OK
    12. Make the second segment 524288 (or whatever the largest number it will allow you to put in)
    13. Note The first segment has the ability to auto-expand as it needs to. All other segments cannot and are set to the maximum size using this step.

    14. Repeat steps 8-11 as many times as you need to so that you have the same number of segments as the original data file
    15. Click the OK Button
    16. This will extend the data file's segments.

      Click Here for the procedure to reconstruct the main database.

    Rebuilding a Damaged Database - Power Utilities

    Rebuilding a Damaged Database

    In some very rare instances, a databases become severely corrupted. We've seen this when a single computer on the network was on the verge or meltdown and only reinstallation of the system software would save it. Or, when write behind caching was turned on a Novell server. If this ever happens to you, and the damage has gone beyond the state where a normal data copy will fix the problem, all is not lost. There are tools available that can help extract data from one or more backup files.

    There are a few variations on the theme below and choosing which one to use depends on how you got into your current state. At the time of writing this web page, we have only used these tools twice in over 500,000 Theatre Manager user days, and only when a server crashed badly or some operating system changes turned out badly. The chances of you ever having to do this are negligible.

    Before attempting this process, call the Arts Management technical support line.

    There are two reasons:

    1. To be sure that you really need to do this. It can take a long time and you must know what you are doing
    2. You will need to log on to Theatre Manager in a special way to gain access to this routine.

    How to fix the data

    FOLLOW THESE STEPS EXACTLY. Do it on your server or fastest machine for speed.

    1. Call Arts Management to confirm that you should be doing this and to get a special number that enables the utilities
    2. Click Here for contact information.

    3. Get everybody to log off of the database
    4. Find your fastest workstation (this usually based on speed of the processor, amount of RAM memory, operating system, and age of the computer.)
    5. Copy the database to this computer
    6. If the fastest machine is where the database already resides, make a copy of all .df1,.df2, etc. files. Click Here for more information on making physical backups. Make a new folder (in this case it will be called New DB). Click Here for more information on creating a new folder.

      Make note of how many segments your databases are. Your main data file (YourCompany.df1) may have df2, df3, df4, etc. Each one is a new segment of that database. Your Transact.df1 might have multiple segments as well - make note of how many of each you have.

    7. Log into Theatre Manager on this computer as a master user
    8. When you get to the password screen, type in the master user password followed by :xxxxx. (That's 'colon' and 'xxxxx' right after the password). You must call support to get the value for xxxxx as it is date sensitive.

    9. Go into File -> Statistics
    10. Click the printer icon in the toolbar, which will print a list of all of the files in the database. Keep this for later reference.

    11. Go into Setup->Data Utilities
    12. This will open the Data Utilities Window
    13. Click Here for more information on this window and it's functions.

    14. Click DB Utilities , and pick Power Rebuild from the popup menu. If you don't see that in the menu, go back to step one.
    15. You will see a window with the title 'Applicat-Datatool - © 1999' as shown below. It should fill up with a list of files and show counts of records for all your datafile. Please confirm with Support that the correct data is there.

    16. Create a new TM Database
    17. Click Here to learn how to create a new TM Database.

    18. Create a new Transaction Database
    19. Click Here to learn how to create a new Transaction Database.

    20. Reconstruct the TM Database
    21. Click Here to learn how reconstruct the TM Database.

    22. Reconstruct the Transaction Database
    23. Click Here to learn how reconstruct the Transaction Database.

    24.  Rebuild Database Connections
    25. This relinks all of the separate parts of the database back together and allows you to use the new database files. Click Here to learn how to rebuild the database connections.

    Repairing Freeblock Structure

    This procedure is no longer required

    Theatre Maps - Overview

    We apologize for the inconvenience, but these Help Pages are currently under construction. To obtain Help for this feature, please contact Artsman support either via e-mail at support@artsman.com or via phone at (403) 536-1211.

    Database Utilities - Data Validation

    Data Validation

    Data validation should be performed periodically if there have been hardware or networking issues. If you are unsure if you should use this tool please contact us. Data validation ensures that the database has all the correct data. There may be variances in the database if there have been networking or hardware issues.

    Click Here to learn how to perform Data Validation

    Data Validation Options

    Patron Data Validates patron data. If you have just imported patrons you can validate only that data by selecting the first option. The second option allow for a check of formatting for patron names addresses and company names. Recalculate balances updates all the patron balances according to the tickets they have bought and their payments. Finally you can ensure that the patron is recognized at the proper level for their donations. This option will recalculate the amount they have donated and ensure they have been acknowledged at the proper level.
    Ticket Integrity Verifies that all tickets for reserved seating events have been held and any tickets without a patron will be returned for sale.
    Ticket Seat Codes Verifies the seat codes for reserved seating performances. There are two sub selections dealing with seat codes. The first is to display any erroneous tickets on the theatre map for quick reference and visual representation of the problem. The second simply releases any seats which have a seat code error.
    Mail List Count This function updates the patron count of each mail list in the database.
    GL Balances Recalculates the totals of all GL accounts. This is performed for both monthly and yearly totals.
    Tickets Without Order Finds any tickets with zero as the order number and attempts to assign them a valid number.
    Invalid Order # Searches for orders with a order number of zero and assigns them a new number.
    Reset Department ONLY FOR OUTLET VERSION Resets all records in Theatre Manager allowing access from all outlets.
    Reset Order(s) Verifies that the flag used to ensure that a record is not simultaneously accessed by users is in the correct position. You may need to use this if a user prematurely exited the system.
    Payment Transactions Verifies the payment transactions for all donation receipts.
    Price Codes Removes price codes which are not connected to a play or a performance.
    Sales Summary Clears the Sales Summary reports and resets them allowing for summarization during the End of Day Process.

    Performing Data Validation

    Data Validation is performed using the Theatre Manager Data Validation Window. This window is accessed through the Data Base Utilities Window (Click Here to learn how to access the window) under the Database Utilities Menu at the bottom of the window.

    1. Select the data you wish to validate

      Single click the selection box to the left of each option to validate that option. Use the chart above or the descriptions beside each option to determine their function.

    2. Click the OK Button to run the validation

      If you do not wish to continue with the validations click Cancel . If you chose to continue with the validation the following window will open reminding you that the process may take some time.

    3. Click Yes to continue

      If you do not have sufficient time to run the validation click No to return to the Theatre Manager Database Validation Window to modify your chosen options.

      The following window will open reminding you to ensure that you have made a backup of the database to prevent data loss.

      Note: If you have not made a backup of your database do not continue past this point. If you do and a power interrupt occurs during the process you can easily restore the database without repairing.

    4. Once you have a backup created click Yes to continue

      The Working Progress Bar will open to show the progress of the validation.

      When the verification has been completed you will return to the Database Utility Window.

    System Activity

    The System Activity monitor keeps track of various system processes such as upgrades, and more importantly the IP address from where the upgrade was run. This helps your organization fulfill the PCI DSS Cross Reference/Index Requirement 10: Track and monitor all access to network, where you are required to track and monitor all access to network resources and cardholder data. Logging mechanisms and the ability to track user activities are critical for effective forensics and vulnerability management. The presence of logs in all environments allows thorough tracking and analysis if something goes wrong. Determining the cause of a compromise is very difficult without system activity logs.

    For more on the PCI DSS Cross Reference/Index, click here.

    For more on Requirement 10 of PCI Compliance, click here.

    The System Activity Monitor is accessed under the Setup>>System Activity menu.





    The System Activity window will open.



    Enter the date range for which you wish to examine the logs.




    Parts of the System Activity Window

    Prints a report of the log file.
    Exports the logfile to either a text file or Excel.
    Date Date the particular activity took place.
    IP Address The IP address from where the activity was requested.
    Type The System Activity Record Type
  41. Upgrade Routine Progress Types:
    • 7: Upgrade Routine Progress
    • 9: Started Database Upgrade
    • 10: Finished Database Upgrade Messages
  42. Used in Version 6 for Database Management:
    • 11: Asked to Verify Database
    • 12: Verify Successful
    • 14: Verify Database Problems
    • 15: User Not Allowed To Verify
    • 16: Transaction File Created (perhaps it shouldn't be)
    • 20: User Added Events to the Database
    • 30: Start the Web Listener
    • 31: Stop the Web Listener
    • 32: Shut Down for Backups
    • 33: Restarted After Backups
    • 40: Unable to Find Accounts
    • 50: Expand Database Entered, Not Executed
    • 51: Database Expanded
    • 52: User Asked During Startup
    • 53: User Informed During Startup, Not Allowed
    • 54: Database Rebuild Request Started
    • 55: Database Rebuild Request Finished (If not in database, should never be in live database)
  43. Others not appearing in the list:
    • 1: Invariant Key Check - Database Management
    • 17: Check Data Log - Database Management
    • 41: User Changed Database - Employee Management
    • 60: Ping Error for Credit Card Server - System Startup Management
    Note Description of the activity.
    Count Is a generic/multi-purpose field:
    • Type 9: Used to track the number of times the Database Upgrade has been started by multiple workstations
    • Type (others): Not used at this time.
    Entered Date and Time the activity was initiated.
    Updated Date and Time the activity was completed.
    Changed By Log on name of the employee (if known) initiating the activity.

    Ping Computer

    The Ping function allows a computer to send a message to another computer and look for a response in its simplest form. The Ping function is useful for making sure that a workstation is "talking" to the server or that a computer is talking to the outside world.

    1. From the main menu bar, go to Setup >> Ping Computer.

      This will open the Ping Computer window.

    For more information on the Ping Computer window, click here. For more information on how to ping a computer, click here.

    The Ping Window

    The Ping window is used to ping another computer to check for communication. The function of ping is to send and receive a message from another computer.

    Parts of the Ping Window

    Your IP Address The IP address of the machine that is currently being used. This is the internal address.
    Firewall IP Address The IP address of the network. This is the outside IP address. This is the address that Artsman Support connects to for access to Timbuktu.
    Status Verifies that the IP address of the workstation is valid.
    Ping Computer at The IP address or URL of the machine to send a ping to.
    Begins the ping process. For more information on using the Ping function, click here.
    Port An optional port to check on the remote computer. A port check is more specific than a general ping. Leave this blank to generically ping the remote computer.
    A drop down menu listing machines that would be pinged on a regular basis.
    The drop down menu when the Pick button is selected. Selecting any of the items will enter the default IP and port number into the proper fields.
    Message The message received back from the ping.

    How to use the Ping Function

    The Ping function allows a computer to send a message to another computer and look for a response in its simplest form. The Ping function is useful for making sure that a workstation is "talking" to the server or that a computer is talking to the outside world.

    1. From the main menu bar, go to Setup >> Ping Computer.

      This will open the Ping Computer window.

      For more information on the Ping Computer window, click here.

    2. Enter an IP address or URL into the "Ping Computer at" field.

      Optionally, the Pick button can be used to choose a default computer to ping.

    3. Enter the port number to be pinged if necessary.
    4. Click the Ping button to begin the process.

      After a few seconds, a message should be displayed showing that the ping was successful.

      If the ping was unsuccessful, verify the address settings. If it continues to be unsuccessful, there is either a problem with the workstation or with the remote computer.

    Run Procedure File

    The Run Procedure File is a utility function that will allow the running of special files created by the Development Team at Arts Management Systems to directly address any required changes unique to your database. ( ProcedureFileName.TM2 ) This could vary from altering a date on records to clearing specific field(s) on all records, to name a couple. It is important to know that this utility function is only used when instructed by a member of the Arts Management Technical Support team. It is a utility function that is extremely rare to use.

    1. From the main menu bar, go to Setup >> Run Procedure File.

      This will open your navigation window to allow you to locate the .TM2 file provided by Arts Management Systems.

    2. The file will simply run, you may or may not not see a progress indicator and in most cases should only take a brief moment to complete the routine. When completed you will need to log out of Theatre Manager then log back in. Any changes or alterations as defined by the procedure file will have taken place.